Home

Fujitsu PRIMEQUEST2000 Series User's Manual

1. la Floppy Key Media I Fi Floppy Image v Browse Connect Floppy DA Floppy Key Media I era ics feat Floppy Image Browse Connect Floppy JA CD DVD Media I CD Image Browse Connect CD DVD DE CD DVD Media I CD Image Browse Connect CD DVD i 9E Hard disk USB Key Media I HD USB Image v Browse Connect Hard disk USB Key 2 PhysicalDrive0 C D Fixed Drive Hard disk USB Key Media II HD USB Image Browse l Connect Harddisk ASR Key 2 PhysicalDrive0 C D Fixed Drive Status Target Drive Connected To Read Bytes Virtual Floppy 1 Not Connected nia a virtual Floppy 2 Not Connected nia Virtual CD DVD 1 Not Connected nia C Virtual CD DVD 2 Not Connected nia ose H The following lists the buttons available in the virtual media list window TABLE 1 12 Buttons in Virtual Media window Item Description Browse Add image file as virtual media Connect Disconnect Connect or disconnect selected device to a partition Close Closes this window Note f you replace media while connecting to virtual media click Disconnect button after setting new media Click Connect again When the Video Redirection window closes all devices are disconnected from the server Also the devices are removed from the list If mounting the media selected by virtual media fails when connecting the media click Disconnect button and cli
2. sessseeseeeeeeenenene nennen nene 158 TABLE 8 2 Power on method and Power on unit sees nennen nnne nene tenere nennen 159 TABLE 8 3 Privilege for power on and power off eese nennen nennen tenete tentent tnnt 159 TABLE 8 4 Privilege for power on and power Off continued eese nnne netten nennen nnne nnns 159 TABLE 8 5 Relationship between scheduled operation and partition power restoration mode sees 164 TABLEE 8 6 Power ON off 3 e etes tod cited e ecd ta E re E te rt D th TABLE 8 7 ASR Control window display setting items TABLE 8 8 Power Restoration Policy XX C122 E175 01EN Preface TABLE 9 1 Functions provided by the MMB Web Ul eeeeeeeneneennnn nennen nennen nennen nennen nente nennen tnnnns 169 TABLE 9 2 Functions provided by the MMB CLl sess netten nennen tette tente tente tente tente tente tentent nens 171 TABLE 9 3 Functions provided by the UEFI caisean aan a aa ER nnne nnne entente entere nennen tenete nennen 171 TABLE 10 1 Maintenance modes c nter ener ede ftetit edente dn c te ea eda ed nd reda teda tede ated a edant 173 TABLE 10 2 Maintenance mode functions eese nennen tenent tenen entente teen tenente nennen nennen 173 TABLE 10 3 Icons indicating the system status secscsssececessesssescseseeseseeesecseseeesceesse
3. ETERNUS Multipath Manager OL x File Tools Help Fault list 0 Status Machine name Unit name E WS0BXB6 Disk Number 2ndPath 3rd Path E300 LUNO Disk1 Active Active LUNI Disk2 Active Active LUN2 Disk3 Active Active E340811A 230004 SCSPort2 BusO TargetD 0 QS SOSIPort3 BusO TargetID 0 d Offine 2 4 Auto Path Check ON Auto Path Recovery ON 4 Confirm target FC card by using Device Manager Confirm FC card with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 5 Disable target FC card by using Device Manager Disable FC card with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 6 Stop target FC card by using safely remove device from computer Stop FC card with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 7 Replace FC card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard FE s work Replace FC card with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 8 Confirm firmware version of replaced FC card It is required that the firmware version of new FC card is same as that of the FC card which had been replaced If the firmware version of new FC card is coincident with that of the FC card which had been replaced curr
4. 88 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards scsi 2 0 0 0 Direct Access FUJITSU E4000 X 0000 PQ 1 ANSI 5 sax C83 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed If only the message in 1 is displayed but the next line is not displayed or if the message in 1 is not displayed the FC card replacement itself was unsuccessful See Note below In this case power off the slot once Then check the following points again Whether the FC card is correctly inserted into the PCI Express slot Whether the latch is correctly set Eliminate the problem power on the slot again and check the log If the message in 1 is displayed but the FC linkup message in 2 is not displayed the FC cable may be disconnected or the FC path may not be set correctly Power off the slot once Confirm the following points again Confirm the FC driver setting The definition file containing a description of the driver option of the FC driver Ipfc is identified with the following command Example Description in etc modprobe d Ipfc conf grep l lpfc etc modprobe d etc modprobe d lpfc conf Confirm that the driver option of the FC driver Ipfc is correctly set For details contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative Check the FC cable connection status
5. Maintenance Wizard Unit Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on C FANM C IOU PCIC LSPCLESCI I C 7tReLBecEND C PSUFANU C SBBATTERY CPU DIMM Mezz PCISlot FBU 4 Select the radio button of PCI Box with the particular number click Next Example of operation for hot replacing PCI Express card of PCIC 1 mounted on PCI_Box 0 83 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number Me 7 Maintenance y menn Wi izard Maintenance Wizard PCI_Box PCIC Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on LN PCI Box l PCIC 0 11 Not present PCI_Box 2 PCIC 0 11 Not present 9 PCI _Box 3 PCIC 0 11 Not present 5 Select the radio button of the particular PCIC number and click Next Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB Part Number MCXXXXXXX ITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on foo fm ok xs o ooo oss 1528 C31 9 fa Tor200 aves 1305 Ee fr c3 oue C5 Standby Yo e 66 suas Standby Mure Sender Not present 6 Select Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition and click Next 84 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4
6. Status Power Alarm Location AC off and partition power Off Off Off Off Partition including IOU Power On On green Error of IOU On orange Identifying IOU On blue Turn on by Maintenance Wizard F 1 6 PCI Express slot of IOU There is no LED in PCI Express slots of IOU To mount and unmounts PCI Express card in an IOU physically take off the IOU from a cabinet F 1 7 DU DU comes equipped with the following LED Only Power LED is used Attention LED is not used TABLE F 10 IOU LED LED type Color Function Power Left Green Indicates power state in a DU Alarm Right Green Indicates power state in a DU Attention Left Orange Not used Attention Right Orange Not used TABLE F 11 IOU status and IOU LED display Status Power Left Power Right Attention Left Attention Right Partition including PCI Express slot 0 off On green Off Off Partition including PCI Express slot 1 off On green Off Off F 1 8 HDD SSD The HDD or SSD comes equipped with the following LEDs HDD or SSD in a SB and HDD or SSD in a DU have same LEDs TABLE F 12 HDD SSD LED LED type Color Function Note HDD SSD Access Green Indicates the HDD or SSD access status Mounted in only HDD or SSD HDD SSD Alarm Orange Indicates whether there is an error in the HDD Mounted in only HDD or or SSD and the hot operation status SSD TABLE F 13 HDD SSD status and LED d
7. The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed c Reflect the edited rules again Repeat the process done in step 9 to reflect the rules udevadm control reload rules d Power on the PCI Express slot Repeat the process done in step 10 to power on the PCI Express slot The interfaces created for the replacement NIC may be active because power is on to the PCI Express slot At this stage since we recommend proceeding with the work with the interface on the replaced NIC deactivated repeat the operation in step 12 e Collect the information about interfaces on the NIC again and create a table Use the same procedure as in step 2 to update the interface name information in the table from step 13 showing the correspondence of the interface before and after NIC replacement Note Confirm that each specified interface name is the same as before the NIC replacement Table4 10 Confirmation of interface names Interface name Hardware address Bus address Slot number etho 00 06e 0c 70 c3 40 0000 0b 01 0 20 eth1 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 0000 0b 01 1 20 Edit the saved interface configuration file Write a new hardware address to replace the old one In HWADDR set the hardware address of the replacement NIC in TABLE 4 9 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement or TABLE 4 5 Hardware address description examples Also for SLA
8. 6 Check Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition button and click Next button 125 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number Status Maintenance Wizard Maintenance System State Select the maintenance system mode Hot System Maintenance arget unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partitions Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breakers on Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breakers off 7 It will be Maintenance mode Information zone gray background and instruction pages to remove target PCI card will be opened Power off target PCIC slot and replace PCI card with opening this page See diagrams in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components and B 2Port Numbers and confirm physical location of PCI card which will be replaced board and slot About powering off PCIC slot see Powering on and off PCI slots About powering off PCIC slot the system administrator will perform Model PRIMEQUEST Active MIMIB O _ Part Number Serial Number Status FUJITSU gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenan
9. Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breakers off 7 It will be Maintenance mode Information zone gray background and instruction pages to add target PCI card will be opened Power off target PCIC slot and add PCI card with opening this page See diagrams in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components and B 2 Port Numbers and confirm physical location of PCI card which will be added board and slot About powering off PCIC slot see Powering on and off PCI slots About powering off PCIC slot the system administrator will perform 131 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first If you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI Box amp 0 PCIC 1 O When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previous Next View Configuration Note Don t click Next Button before adding PCI card About powering off PCIC slot the system administrator must perform 8 Add target PCI card power on target PCIC slot and click Next button About powering on PCIC slot see Powering on and off PCI slots About powering on PCIC slot t
10. Confirm the Storage FC settings Confirm that the settings that conform to the actual connection format Fabric connection or Arbitrated Loop connection were made If the messages in 1 and 2 are displayed but the messages in 3 are not displayed the storage is not yet found Check the following points again These are not card problems so you need not power off the slot for work Review FC Switch zoning settings Review storage zoning settings Review storage LUN Mapping settings Also confirm that the storage can be correctly viewed from LUNO Eliminate the problem Then confirm the settings and recognize the system by using the following procedure 1 Confirm the host number of the incorporated FC card from the message at 1 xx in scsixx xx is a numerical value in the message at 1 is a host number In the above example the host number is 10 2 Scan the device by executing the following command echo sys class scsi_host hostxx scan is command prompt xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 The command for the above example is as follows echo gt sys class scsi_host host10 scan 3 Confirm that a message like 3 was output to var log messages If this message is not displayed confirm the settings again Note In specific releases of RHEL a message like 1 for confirming FC card incorporation may be output in the followin
11. shuts down External file device Increase file device Support of increase file device linkage Installer linkage OS install support Support of ServerView Installation Manager GDS linkage GDS linkage Support of software RAID RHEL PXM linkage PXM linkage Support of PXM XSP emulation A 1 7 Security functions TABLE A 7 Security functions operation Minor item Description Security setting External IF security setting Network security setting SSL SSH etc User management User authentication MMB login account management authentication User authentication linkage Synchronization of the account between doubling MMB Audit trail Operating log Records such as MMB operating log and login history etc TPM TPM Support of TPM function 203 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 2 4 Hardware status display A 2 Correspondence between Functions and Interfaces The following shows the correspondence between the functions provided by PRIMEQUEST 2000 series and interfaces A 2 1 System information display TABLE A 8 System information display Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI PSA Web PSA CLI Web Ul UI SVS CLI System status display Supported Error Warning System event log SEL Supported display System event log SEL Supported download MMB Web UI C
12. Main Menu 140 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging rA fig file g iSCSI Data anning for Los QConvergeConsole CLI 3 Select the device of the same type of target FC card in Adapter Information C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging QConvergeConsole CLI 8 E 4 Confirm PCI Bus Number of PCI card and look for the device which has same bus number you confirmed in step 1 E QConvergeConsole CLI b Confirm WWN and port number of target device WWN is the information described as WWPN of target FC card in Adapter Information 142 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging c Confirm firmware version of target device QConverge Console GUI and select device name of target FC card in left pane and see Port Info The firmware version is the information described as BIOS Version in Port Attribute Name n abet Ha ros Widows Server 2012 Datacenter 64 tat n armes RIDIOS MAGS Warn Bit 2 1009 Down fF QU RIDI 701711249 Ware d Close QConverge Console CLI GUI 3 Open ETERNUS Multipath Manager and place all the devices to be replaced offline 143 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging
13. 1 3 Management LAN FIGURE 1 3 Management LAN configuration MMB o0 Active MMB 1 Standby Processor 1 3 Switching hub Processor 2 If either USER port fails the interface redundancy function switches to the other port in the MMB to ensure continuous service If a failure occurs in the active MMB itself the Virtual LAN channels become unusable Then the standby MMB inherits the virtual IP address from the active MMB to ensure continuous service The following interfaces are available with a configured management LAN Interfaces available to the system administrator Web Ul interface using HTTP HTTPS CLI interface via telnet SSH Partition and console operations through the video redirection function Interface available to system management software RMCP and RMCP interface Remarks The restrictions on management LAN interfaces other than Virtual LAN channels are described below TABLE 1 4 Restrictions on the management LAN Channel name RMCP connection Web UI connection CLI connection UDP http https telnet ssh Virtual LAN channel Possible Possible Possible Physical LAN channel Active MMB Possible Not possible Possible Physical LAN channel Standby MMB 1 Possible with Possible with restrictions 2 3 Not possible restrictions 4 1 Only PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E can have two MMBs PRIMQUEST 2800B can have only one MMB 2 The connec
14. EDIT N NH HB A A lala Partial L L E E A A A A Mirror E A A A A O O A A L a e e A A Spare O O A A zi E o A A O O A A B L e e A A 1 See TABLE G 14 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 2CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition when a Partition includes 4SBs with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or DR is enabled in a Partition 234 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM TABLE G 11 DIMM mounting order at 1CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition CPU 0 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO 0B3 0CO 0C3 ODO OD3 Slot 0A1 OA4 OB1 0B4 OC1 OCA OD1 0D4 0A2 0A5 OB2 OBS 0C2 0C5 OD2 OD5 Normal 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 Perfor 5 5 7 7 6 6 8 8 mance 9 9 11 11 10 10 12 12 Fullor 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Partial 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 Mirror 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 Spare 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 TABLE G 12 DIMM mounting order at 2CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition CPU 0 CPU 1 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO OB3 OCO 0C3 ODO OD3 1A
15. G 7 G 8 Legacy BIOS Compatibility CSM The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series uses the UEFI which is firmware that provides the BIOS emulation function Currently the following legacy BIOS restrictions are known Option ROM area restriction The number of PXE enabled cards that can operate as boot devices is restricted to four O space restriction In a legacy BIOS environment I O space is required on a boot device Note In a CSM environment I O space must be allocated to a boot device Rack Mounting For details on installation in a 19 inch rack see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO04EN Installation Environment For details on the environmental conditions for PRIMEQUEST 2000 series installations see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO04EN NIC Network Interface Card Note the following precautions on mounting of a NIC network interface card Notes We recommend specifying the members of teaming between LANs of the same type We recommend teaming between cards of the same type in the onboard LAN If the teaming is specified with different types of LAN the scaling function on the receive side may be off because of differences in the scaling function Consequently the balance of receive traffic may not be optimized but this is not a problem for normal operation Depending on the Intel PROSet version used at the time of teaming configuration a war
16. Start to record Video redirection window The video is preserved into terminal PC in avi format Stop Record Stop to record Video redirection window Settings Perform setup for record of Video redirection such as record time and save location Exit Close video redirection Keyboard Hold Right Ctrl Key Hold down right Ctrl key RCTRL button turns red Hold Right Alt Key Hold down right Alt key RALT button turns red Hold Left Ctrl Key Hold down left Ctrl key LCTRL button turns red Hold Left Alt Key Hold down left Alt key LAL T button turns red Left Windows Key Hold Down Hold down Windows key Press and Release Press Windows key Right Windows Key Hold Down Hold down Windows key Press and Release Press Windows key Ctrl Alt Del Press Ctrl key Alt key and Del key simultaneously Context Menu Open Context Menu shortcut menu Hot Keys Add Hot Keys Set Hot keys shortcut key Host Physical Keyboard Auto Detect Set to Auto Detect Physical keyboard type is detected automatically English United States Set to English United States French Set to French German Germany Set to German Japanese Set to Japanese Spanish Set to Spanish SoftKeyboard English United States Set to English United States
17. f mdadm dev mdO fail dev fiob mdadm dev mdO remov dev fiob Power off the partition For details on the powering off the partition see 7 1 2 Powering off partitions in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Replace the faulty PCI Express card Power on the partition For details on powering on the partition see 7 1 1 Powering on Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Initialize the replaced PCI Express card The executing procedure is as follows a fio detach Disconnecting the device from the operating system b fio format Low level formatting of the device c fio attach Making the device available on the operating system Example fio detach dev fct1 fio format dev fct1 fio attach dev fctl Remarks The work of adding the device will trigger the rebuild operation Example mdadm dev md0 add dev fiob In SWAP configuration 1 Delete the swap entry of the faulty PCI Express card Example swapoff dev fioal Confirm the serial number of the faulty PCI card Delete the serial number of the failed PCI card from the pre allocate memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf Note Before replacing the PCI card delete the serial number of the faulty PCI card from the pre allocate memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf For details on the procedure see Using the Device as S
18. 0000 06 10 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 06 11 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 0a 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 0a 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 0d 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 0d 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 10 00 0 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 0000 10 00 1 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 0000 27 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 01 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 04 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 05 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 08 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 09 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 0c 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 0000 28 0d 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8764 rev aa 2 Make the configuration file for being able to use added resources on OS Example making the configuration file for the interface to use onboard NIC on IOU 74 C122 E175 01EN
19. CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 5 OU hot remove 4 5 OU hot remove The description of the flow of the preparation is as follows Note f iSCSI NIC is mounted on an IOU hot replacement of the IOU can be performed only if all of below conditions are satisfied DM MP Device Mapper Multipath or ETERNUS multi driver EMPD is used for storage connection Multiple path is made with a NIC on the IOU to be replaced and a NIC on an IOU other than the IOU to be replaced ANIC on the IOU to be replaced makes an interface independently Example of single interface f FC card used for SAN boot is mounted on an IOU to be replaced hot replacement of the IOU cannot be performed 4 5 1 Preparation for IOU hot remove The description of the flow of the preparation is as follows Note When the disk connected via the IOU to be removed is used as the dump saving area if kdump the dump environment is changed to enable the use of another disk 1 When the IOU is removed the PCI Express card which is mounted on the IOU is also removed Confirm that there is no software where the PCI Express card is used and implement any of the following measures a Before removing stop the software in which the PCI Express card to be removed is being used b The PCI Express card is to be outside the software operation target To confirm the resources mounted on the target IOU execute opt FJSVdp u
20. English United Kingdom Set to English United Kingdom Spanish Set to Spanish French Set to French German Germany Set to German Germany Italian Set to Italian Danish Set to Danish Finnish Set to Finnish German Switzerland Set to German Switzerland Norwegian Norway Set to Norwegian Portuguese Set to Portuguese Swedish Set to Swedish Hebrew Set to Hebrew C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use Virtual Media Wizard Menu Bar Description French Belgium Set to French Belgium Dutch Belgium Set to French Russian Russia Set to Russian Japanese QWERTY Set to Japanese QWERTY Japanese Hiragana Set to Japanese Hiragana Japanese Katakana Set to Japanese Katakana Turkish F Set to Turkish F Turkish Q Set to Turkish Q Mouse Show Cursor Display cursor Mouse Calibration Perform calibration of mouse location Show Host Cursor Display host cursor Mouse Mode Absolute mouse mode Set a mouse to Absolute mode A mouse pointer in Video redirection window is adjusted to absolute value of a mouse pointer in terminal PC Relative mouse mode Set a mouse to Relative m
21. FIGURE F 6 PCI Box LED mounting locations FIGURE Fai MIB tree SIUCIUIG ree iui ta uci de cie Qui Du nece iei aAa aS Erian FIGURE J 1 Boot Manager front page 1 eeesessesessesessesesseseeesseeesesseseeseseeneseensseeseseeneseeneseensseeseaeeueseeneaeeneseensaeeasseensatesatesateneatenes FIGURE J 2 Boot Manager front page 2 ssssssesee essent tete tentent tenente tente tente tente tente tenete tette tenete neni FIGURE J 3 Boot Manager meu necesse etie recs ect etse sente he RU Ens E eese eH vete ente eec e ectetur FIGURE J 4 Driver lit iet ett o co et eet den t eie teet den tete ecc lee re ederet eredi ee FIGURE J 5 drivers command of UEFEShell 5 re ertet cette Het e e eds c ee rein FIGURE J 6 dh command of UEFI Shell 1 eseas are eie recette est se recs dieere stb oett ptos FIGURE J 7 selection of EFI WebBIOS EFI CLI esses nete tente tenter tenente tente ten tete te tente te teen tenente nin FIGURE J 8 Adapter Selection window of WebBIOS 1 esses nennen tete tnte tnter tnter FIGURE J 9 Adapter Selection window of WebBIOS 2 seseseeeeneete netten ntn tete tete tete tnte tnter FIGURE J 10 HOME window of WebBIOS sss FIGURE J 11 Controller Properties window of WebBIOS xviii C122 E175 01EN Preface FIGURE J 12 General tab in the ServiewView RAID Manag
22. For details on how to read agent log messages see Chapter 3 PSA Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN The Message Reference lists the meanings of messages and corrective actions in order of event IDs The Partition Event Log or the Agent Log window lists event IDs and message details to inform you of problems Remarks For VMware 5 Seg Bus Dev Func is displayed for Unit on the Partition Event Log window Example 0 0 25 0 For details on the method of identifying the Unit in this case contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative FIGURE 10 10 Partition Event Log window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active IMB 0 co Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 3C12450016 Status AWarning Partition Event Log Severity DateTime _ PartitionNo Unt EventID Description There are no Event Logs CJ C CJ CJ p CJ L Checking into errors in detail Check the details of messages to take appropriate action According to the message ID in the displayed log check the message details in the list of messages in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Then take appropriate action System event messages detected by the MMB Chapter 2 MMB Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Messages detected by the partition Chapter 3 sadump Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 20
23. Please replace PCI Box40 PCIC 1 When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previous Next View Configuration Note Do NOT click Next until replacing the PCIC 8 After replacing the particular PCIC and powering on the particular PCIC slot click Next For how to power on the PCIC slot see Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail It is the administrator of your system who power off the PCI Express slot 85 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first If you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI Box PCIC 1 When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previous I Next View Configuration Note Ask the administrator of your system to power on the PCI Express slot 9 The window updating status appears Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active IMB 0 _ Part Number MCXXXXXXX m FUJITSU Serial Number JC12450010 Under Maintenance Status Normal Partition 2 System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance
24. Relative mode where next position is calculated by previous action or Absolute mode which is orthogonal coordinates Special key Send key operation of Ctrl Alt and Windows key Lock key holds down the Ctrl Alt or Windows key Power Power on power off or re start a partition The following shows a diagram of the connection configuration for video redirection USB 2 0 Processor Video memory No Description rim 2 Video redirection USB keyboard emulation and mouse emulation FIGURE 1 5 Connection configuration for video redirection 1 gt USB Mass Storage emulation 2 Video redirection The following shows the operating sequence of video redirection Terminal C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use FIGURE 1 6 Operating sequence of video redirection PRIMEQUEST 2000 series 1 Login from MMB Java 2 Download of Java applet applet for video redirection jajdde ener PC terminal In the diagram 1 to 5 indicates the following operations 1 Log in to the server from the terminal 2 Display the window and start video redirection 3 You can perform partition operations from the Video Redirection window by using the keyboard and mouse 4 You can perform partition operations through the Java applet for video r
25. Removing this adapter will leave just one adapter in the team Do you want to continue 6 Disable target NIC in Device manager Disable NIC with step 2 b at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 7 Stop target NIC by using safely remove devices from computer Stop NIC with step 3 at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 8 Replace NIC by using MMB Maintenance Wizard FE s work Replace NIC with step 4 at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 9 Confirm the replaced card by using Device Manager After replacement open Device Manager and confirm that the target device is recognized correctly 10 After completing the replacement open the Device Manager and open the properties dialog box of the NIC to be incorporated into teaming 136 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 3 NIC Hot Plugging UCI9 X A le Action View Help 0 8 oo ie Gis hag ws08xe6 gE Computer E Disk drives AK Display adapters 1 5 Emulex PLUS QA Human Interface Devices E Keyboards f Mice and other pointing devices B Monitors Ej Network adapters X Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection X Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 X Intel R 825
26. 1 Port to 4098 4098 4098 IOU 1 1 Port to 4099 4099 4099 IOU 2 1 Port to 4100 4100 4100 IOU 3 1 SB 1 Port to 4113 4113 4113 IOU 0 1 Port to 4114 4114 4114 IOU 1 1 Port to 4115 4115 4115 IOU 2 1 Port to 4116 4116 4116 IOU 3 1 SB 2 Port to N A 4129 4129 IOU 0 1 Port to N A 4130 4130 IOU 1 1 Port to N A 4131 4131 IOU 2 1 214 C122 E175 01EN Appendix D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers D 2 Mounting location Slot number decimal number Board Slot PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E Port to N A 4132 4132 IOU 3 1 SB 3 Port to N A 4145 4145 IOU 0 1 Port to N A 4146 4146 IOUsH 1 Port to N A 4147 4147 IOU 2 1 Port to N A 4148 4148 IOU 3 1 IOU 0 PCIC O 2 2 2 PCIC 1 3 3 3 PCIC 2 4 4 4 PCIC43 2 5 5 5 IOU 1 PCIC O 18 18 18 PCIC HI 19 19 19 PCIC 2 20 20 20 PCIC S 2 21 21 21 lOU 2 PCIC O 34 34 34 PCIC H1 35 35 35 PCIC 2 36 36 36 PCIC 3 2 37 37 37 IOU 3 PCIC O 50 50 50 PCIC 1 51 51 51 PCIC 2 52 52 52 PCIC 3 2 53 53 53 PCIl_BOX 0 PCIC O 65 65 N A 3 PCIC 1 66 66 N A PCIC 2 67 67 N A PCIC 3 68 68 N A PCIC 4 69 69 N A PCIC 5 70 70 N A PCIC 6 71 71 N A PCIC 7 72 72 N A PCIC 8 73 73 N A PCIC 9 74 74 N A P
27. 1 for EFI WebBIOS FIGURE J 7 selection of EFI WebBIOS EFI CLI Press 1 for EFI UebBIOS 2 for EFI CLI or any other key to return 10 WebBIOS starts up The list of mounted RAID controller is shown in Adapter Selection window Type shows the name of RAID controller 245 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card FIGURE J 8 Adapter Selection window of WebBIOS 1 11 Select relevant RAID controller by Adapter No radio button and click Start button FIGURE J 9 Adapter Selection window of WebBIOS 2 Adapter Selection Adapter No Bus No Device No 1 Firnuare Pkg Version 0 66 0 qaRA amp ID Sas 51 RAIDC D3116C 12 Click Controller Properties in HOME window of WebBIOS FIGURE J 10 HOME window of WebBIOS RO MegaRAID BIOS Config Utility Virtual Configuration a fj e 13 Check current version of firmware Firmware Version or FW Package Version shows the firmware version 246 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 2 How to confirm firmware version of SAS card FIGURE J 11 Controller Properties window of WebBIOS LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CU 8e Serial Number V eco een FRU SubUendorID x Drive Securitit Canahle SubDeviceID HostInterface NVANNOIZe Firmware Version 3 220 125 2420 Memory Size FW Package Version e Min S
28. 3 1 Partiton GConfigur lions iter i e e rd autc ench rir bic tits recd e taut 28 3 1 1 Patton Configuration PPAR a araa aAa AA AEE rA A KARE AEAEE AEE AEAEE A ERTAS 28 3 1 2 Setting procedure of partition in MMB Web Ul essent nnne nnne tnnt tenerte tenete tnter nnns 31 3 2 High availability configurator s icesc sccsiec cect ceceseesececeiseseseceiebevsevecencherseuecesyierevescdbervbendeovteresabyebesdesrteepiesurerivsteberdiupteeuteseseeweereeerd 31 3 2 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR esee nennen tenente nnne tnnt nente tenerent nennen tenete tenens 31 3 2 2 ReSeived SB tachi nuoto Livre aita atomi veto meto etait dette Gianna eR URS 36 3 2 3 Memory Operation Mode 2 2 2 niinc rnc tct cr tute nna ie CER Ce Ec Ee EY t D dod 43 3 24 Les Aou 44 32 5 Hardware RAID 3 0 od eed HER dere ie e eR etd e ira ee ERAS 47 3 2 6 Server View AL DE 47 3 2 7 Cluster configuration tonto ive Sie tee e ern Da t te ia i Pe n Pe c nn seeds 47 3 3 lazo e Meieontoopg ge 47 3 3 1 Replaceable comiporierits cte tr rti e ret in pn Hi ep EH ERR EHE Rp HERE RH pone redes 48 3 3 2 Component replacement conditions eese esses eese nente tentettnte tnnt tnnt tete ttete tete tette tete tee tete tenentes 48 3 3 3 Replacement procedures in hot maintenance esee nennen nnne tnmen nennen nennen entere 49 3 3 4 Replacement procedures in cold
29. 3 2 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR This section describes the hot maintenance by DR For details on the hot maintenance see CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Function Overview The DR function is intended for adding or removing hardware resources such as CPU memory and l O without stopping the partition system Units for adding and removal are the partition configuration components of SB and IOU including the PCI Box The DR functions for various configuration elements are as follows SB hot maintenance SB hot add SB hot remove It is a function for adding the CPU and memory resource to the SB unit without stopping the partition System The following functions are provided Enable the expansion of the CPU and the memory resources of a system that is running Enable the hot maintenance of SB where a suspected fault was detected Redistribute the SB resources across partitions in accordance with the load 31 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration FIGURE 3 3 SB hotadd Partition n Home No Description 1 Dynamic addition of SB operated by the operator FIGURE 3 4 SB Hot remove Disconnecting a faulty SB Partition n Partition n Home SB 0 2 No Description 1 Fault suspected 2 Dynamic disconnection of SB operation by operator 3 Repl
30. 800 Detected SB hot add Dec 17 00 15 33 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 801 Added SB3 Node6 7 Dec 17 00 15 33 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 807 Execute 1 user programs at ADD PRE timing Dec 17 00 15 34 xxx dp util 4457 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart INFO start Dec 17 00 15 34 xxx dp util 4457 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart INFO result O0 Dec 17 00 15 34 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 808 Executed user programs at ADD PRE timing If INFO 808 Executed user programs at ADD PRE timing is not output pre process of the collaboration program is delayed Check which collaboration program takes a lot of time by seeing var log messages and collaboration program name log made in opt FJSVdp util var log directory if any The developer of the collaboration program can be confirmed by below rpm command Ask the developer about the cause of its delay Example Checking the developer of the collaboration program 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart rpm qif opt FJSVdp util user command 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart Rebooting the partition is recommended because SB hot add process has been imperfect state 2 Checking the time for activating added resources Process of below messages in var log messages is the process of activating added resources Dec 17 00 15 34 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 802 Add CPUS30 59 total 30 Dec 17 00 15 34 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 804 Add MEM9
31. 822 855 G JOU26 JOU21 IOUs2 0Us3 s DUs DUs1 o OPL MMB 0 MMB 1 PCL Boxe PCI Bex 1 PCL Boxe PCI Boxe3 4djSow e GAI OSpedfed CPU DIMM Chipset Vokage Temperate Other 5 Sort by DateTime New event first O Old even first 6 Start DateTime First event O Specified Time IE DENEN CNN ru io T End Dare Time Last evert O Specified Time zn E ma E DE ru S Number of events to display Max 3000 100 6040 Fenn E71 BE ETIN 187 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data FIGURE 10 14 System Event Log Filtering Condition window in PRIMEQUEST 2800B Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number pees Status Normal ministration Network Configuration Maintenance Logout sl System Event Log Filtering Condition Help a Select the filtering conditions and click the Apply button to take effect 2 Note The followings are AND conditions a a 1 Severity v Error v Warning v Info o 2 Unit All O Specified PSUs Fans a SB 0 SB 1 SBs2 SBs3 LJ IOUs0 IOUs1 1OU 2 IOUs3 J DU 0 IDU 1 5 OPL a MMB 3 Source AI O Specified CPU DIMM Chipset Voltage Temperature Other 4 Sort by Date Time New event first O Old event first 5 Start Date Time First event O Specified Time EE mE LE DM D o 6End Date Time Lastevent O Specif
32. Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address Execute below command checking the correspondence between the interface name and the hardware address Example ethO for a single interface cat sys class net eth0 address 2c d4 44 1 44 0 Example ethO for a bonding interface cat proc net bonding bondY Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver Slave interface eth0 Permanent HW addr 2c d4 44 1 44 f0 You can use this procedure only when the bonding device is active If the bonding device is not active or the slave has not been incorporated use the same procedure as for a single interface Also the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address is automatically registered by the system in the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Confirm that the ATTR address and NAME items have the same definitions as in the above output Example ethO grep eth0 etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 2c d4 44 1 44 0 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME ethO0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed You can always obtain the correct hardware address from the description in etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules regardless of whether the interface is incorporated in bonding Confirm the har
33. Details Resources General LinkSpeed Advanced Power Management Aju InteR 1350 Gigabit Network Connection Ae SUMMAM Device type Network adapters Manufacturer Intel Location PCI Slot 4 PCI bus 96 device 0 function 0 b Disable replaced PCI card with Device Manager Select target identified device in step a and disable it by using Device Manager 122 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards so Device Manager Fie Action View _Help 9 0O E ass Ei ge WIN XEKPAUSVIO ME Computer ca Disk drives a Display adapters Ei DVD CD ROM drives Ca IDE ATAJATAPI controllers We Monitors Network adapters T EE aaan X Intel R 1350 Gk Update Driver Software a Intel R 1350 Gg X Intel R 1350 Gk Inte 1350 Gig rri dag d inen 1350 x Scan for hardware changes InteKR 1350Gic Properties X Intel R 1350 E lt gt Storage controllers S 1 System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Follow dialog will be opened and click Yes Intel R 1350 Gigabit Network Connection x Disabling this device will cause it to stop functioning Do you really want to disable it No 3 Stop target PCI card by using safely remove devices from computer a Click Icon of Safely remove devices from computer at information zone in lower right of desktop display b Clic
34. MemTotal 65169992 kB MemFree 63382120 kB Buffers 30034 kB The size of memory can be seen by the line of MemTotal 4 2 3 DR operation in SB hot add This section describes the operation of the DR for performing SB hot add 1 Log into the MMB Web UI using Administrator privileges 2 Execute hotadd command Example When adding SB2 in partition 1 hotadd partition 1 SB 2 quiet 61 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 2 Hot add of SB 4 2 4 How to deal with when timeout occurs while OS is processing SB hot add If OS does not finish the process of SB hot add within predetermined time timeout message DR sequence timeout SB hot add OS failure is shown on MMB CLI It means that DR completion message from OS does not arrive at MMB In such case some collaboration programs may hang though DR process is still running on OS Rebooting the partition is recommended because it is difficult to estimate when the process will be completed The process of SB hot add by OS can be mainly divided into three parts Check var log message analyzing which process takes a lot of time Pre process of collaboration program Activating added resources Post process of collaboration program 1 Checking pre process of collaboration program Process of below messages in var log messages is pre process of the collaboration program Dec 17 00 15 33 xxx dp util 4457 INFO
35. No Description 1 SW redundancy 2 Redundancy by teaming GLS or equivalent 3 Disabled on the standby side The following table lists the external networks The letters A B and C correspond to those in FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration TABLE 1 1 External network names and functions Letter External network name Function A Management LAN MMB Web UI CLI operations Operations management server Video redirection PRIMECLUSTER linkage Systemwalker linkage ServerView linkage REMCS connection B Maintenance LAN FST CE terminal connection 1 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 1 External Network Configuration Letter External network name Function REMCS connection C Operation LAN production LAN For job operations Connect a LAN cable for User Port and a LAN cable for REMCS Port to different HUB each other or divide them by using VLAN The following diagram shows the functions of external networks for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series FIGURE 1 2 External network functions 5 mpm Integrated management software Server integration linkage e g Systemwalker management SVS Dial up router switch p Switch LAN PC Web browser terminal software PRIMEQUEST 2000 serires FST Web browser terminal software Units modules SB CPU DIMM IOU etc Production LAN 2 C122 E1
36. On yellow 1 218 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs E LED Type 1 If Alarm LED is turning on orange the FANM with the particular LED fails Even though Alarm LED remains off SEL may be displayed which indicates the FANM error due to detecting not enough fan rotation by preventive fan monitoring function 2 There is a CSS LED on an OPL not a PSU F 1 3 FANU The FANU comes equipped with the following LED TABLE F 4 FAN LED LED type Color Function FANM 0 Alarm Orange Indicates state of FANM O0 Power Alarm Green Indicates power state of PSU supplying power to FANU FANM 1 Alarm Orange Indicates state of FANM 1 TABLE F 5 Power status and FANU LED display Status FANM 0 Alarm Power Alarm FANM 1 Alarm OPL CSS 2 PSU AC input is off Off Off Off Off AC input is on and the PSU is off Off Blinking in green Off Off AC input is on and the PSU is on Off On green Off Off FANU temperature error is predicted Off On green Off On yellow FANU temperature error is detected or Off Blinking in green Off On yellow the power system error in a PSU is redicted The power system of a FANU failed Off On yellow Off On yellow FANM ZO error occurs Off or On Orange Off Off On yellow 1 FANM 1 error occurs Off Off Off or On Orange On yellow 1 1 If Alarm LED is turning on orange the FANM with the particular LED fails Even tho
37. Operations Manager Quick Manager in a Linux environment Installation Linux ServerView Suite ServerView Describes the installation procedure using ServerView None Installation Manager Installation Manager ServerView Suite ServerView Provides an overview of server monitoring using None Operations Manager Server ServerView Operations Manager and describes the user Management interface of ServerView Operations Manager ServerView Suite ServerView Describes RAID management using ServerView RAID None RAID Management User Manager Manual viii C122 E175 01EN Preface Title Description Manual code ServerView Suite Basic Describes basic concepts about ServerView Suite None Concepts ServerView Operations Describes installation and update installation of None Manager Installation ServerView Linux Agent ServerView Agents for Linux ServerView Operations Describes installation and update installation of None Manager Installation ServerView Windows Agent ServerView Agents for Windows ServerView Mission Critical Describes the necessary functions unique to None Option User Manual PRIMEQUEST notification via the MMB hot replacement command and ServerView Mission Critical Option SVmoo which is required for supporting these functions ServerView RAID Manager Describes the installation and settings required to use None VMware vSphere ESXi 5 ServerView RAID Manager on the VMware vSphere I
38. See also F 1 2 PSU On Error at FANM 0 FANM 1 Orange 1 Off Normal status in Alarm FANM 1 On Error at FANM 1 See also F 1 2 PSU FANU Power Green 1 Off PSU AC input off or no Alarm DC output to FANM Blinking PSU AC input on and PSU off See also F 1 3 FANU On PSU AC input on and any of PSU in system on See also F 1 3 FANU FANM 0 Orange 1 Off Normal status in Alarm FANM 0 See also F 1 3 FANU On Error at FANM 0 FANM 1 Orange 1 Off Normal status in Alarm FANM 1 On Error at FANM 1 See also F 1 3 FANU SB Power Green Off SB power off On SB power on Alarm Orange Off SB normal On Error in SB Location Blue Off On Identify SB HDD SSD Access Green Off Non active On Active Alarm Orange Off HDD SSD normal On Error in HDD SSD Blinking low Rebuilding array in RAID speed 1Hz High Indicate location speed 3Hz 225 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs F 3 LED list TABLE F 28 LED list 2 3 Component LED type Color Quantity Status Description IOU Power Green Off IOU power off On IOU power on Alarm Orange Off IOU normal On Error in IOU Location Blue Off On or Blinking Component location LAN Link Act Green Off Network not link IOU 1GbE Blinking in green Network active On green Network link Speed Green Off 10Mbps Orange On
39. UDP161 Agent From B snmp toA trap Duplex SERVER VIEW RM TCP UD P 3172 Duplex PING Used Used Not used Used ICMP Duplex SMTP Not Not Not used Used SMTP Server used used TCP UD P 25 Duplex PostgreS Not Not Not used Used PostgreS QLDB used used QL TCP UDP921 2 Duplex MS SQL Not Not Not used Used MS SQL DB used used S TCP U DP1433 MS SQL M TCP U DP1434 208 C122 E175 01EN Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers This appendix describes the physical mounting locations of components and shows MMB and IOU port numbers B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components This section describes the physical mounting locations of components FIGURE B 1 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 2400E 1 2 My PSU 0 No _ Explanation 2 ie 777 ae Front 2 Rear 209 C122 E175 01EN Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components FIGURE B 2 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 2800E 2800B 1 2 rem RS 0 MMB H MMB O o o D o USB 0 o o PSU 0 VGA No Explanation 1 Front 2 Rear FIGURE B 3 Physical mounting locations in the DU HDD HDD 210 C122 E175 01EN Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers
40. Version VMware Version Server installation environment LAN WAN system configuration Hardware configuration Installed option types and locations Occurrence date and time Year Month Day Hour Minute Frequency Constantly o Intermittently Unknown times per Triggered by Symptom Working before failure occurred o Yes Current situation Work details Work affected o Yes a No Hanging Slowdown Reboot OS panic stop OS startup not possible Communication unavailable No Other Error message System event log Agent log Driver log OS message Other Status of various lamps Supplementary information Yes No 260 C122 E175 01EN Appendix M Information of PCI Express card L 1 Failure Report Sheet Appendix M Information of PCI Express card This appendix includes the information of PCI Express card For components which cannot be identified by Vendor ID and Device ID see also Subsystem ID and Subsystem Vendor ID TABLE M 1 Information of PCI Express card Name Vendor ID Device ID Subsystem Subsystem ID Vendor ID Single Channel 8Gbps Fibre Channel Card 10DF F015 Dual Channel 8Gbps Fibre Channel Card 10DF F100 Single Channel 8Gbps Fibre Channel Card 10
41. automatic rebooting The status after the partition reboot is checked in the Partition Configuration window System Status window SB x window of the MMB Web UI Immediately after switching to a Reserved SB and the partition has started booted the status will be as follows The Reserved SB is incorporated in the partition in place of the faulty SB The setting of Reserved SB for multiple partitions cancelled if the Reserved SB that was incorporated in the partition in place of the faulty SB had been the Reserved SB for multiple partitions before the incorporation The faulty SB is disconnected from the partition configuration and freed Processing after replacement of a faulty SB This section describes how to reconfigure a Reserved SB after replacement of a faulty SB Perform the settings as needed considering the current configuration and the operating status After switching to the Reserved SB and partition reboot the following Procedures of 1 and 2 are required The process for partition configuration is required except when continuing the operation without setting a new Reserved SB 1 Restore the Reserved SB that was incorporated in the partition to replace the faulty SB to a Reserved SB again 2 Setthe replacement SB as a Reserved SB This section describes the operation of procedure 1 noted above 1 From the log analyze all the partitions where the Reserved SB hereafter referred to as the source Reserve
42. disk is removed When executing the DR in a cluster configuration the execution is performed after disconnecting the relevant machine from the cluster group For details see PRIMECLUSTER Installation and Administration Guide J2UZ 5274 08Z0 f power control such as power off reset and power cycle or error occurs during SB hot add partition configuration differs depending on whether test phase process which is check process of SB prior to SB add process is completed or not If test phase process is not completed partition configuration is the same one as before SB hot add The partition does not include an added SB If test phase process is completed partition configuration changes to the configuration specified by DR operation The partition includes not only current SBs but also an added SB Hot add or hot remove of an IOU which is connected a DU cannot be performed DR operation cannot be performed if memory operation mode is Performance mode Error of IO and memory cannot be sometime detected during SB hot add and SB hot remove Legacy OS cannot be started up since a partition with DR mode enabled forcibly starts up in UEFI mode If you start up Legacy OS disable DR mode For IOU hot add or IOU hot replacement PCI bus address which is allocated to PCI device on relevant IOU just after IOU hot add or replacement may differ at next partition boot Error of added IO may not be detected during hot adding
43. green 100Mbps On orange 1000Mbps LAN Link Act Green Off Network not link IOU 10GbE Blinking in green Network active On green Network link Speed Green Off 100Mbps Orange On green 1000Mbps On orange 10Gbps DU Power Green Off DU power off On DU power on Attention Orange Off HDD SSD Access Green Off Non active On Active Alarm Orange Off HDD SSD normal On Error in HDD SSD Blinking low Rebuilding array in RAID speed 1Hz High Indicate location speed SHz MMB Location Blue Off On Specify the MMB Ready Green Off MMB not initialized Blinking MMB initialization in progress On MMB initialization complete normal MMB operating status Active Green Off Blinking in green Active MMB location Alarm Orange Off On Error in MMB LAN Link Act Green Off Network not link 1000BASE T 1 Blinking in green Network active MMB On green Network link Speed Green Off 10Mbps Orange On green 100Mbps On orange 1000Mbps LAN Link Act Green Off Network not link 100BASE TX Blinking in green Network active MMB On green Network link Speed Green Off 10Mbps Orange On 100Mbps 1 Since MMB does not close its LAN port explicitly the state where LAN port is disabled is not displayed 226 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs F 3 LED list TABLE F 29 LED list 3 3 Component LED type Color Quantity St
44. in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 4 Set the environment of the added PCI Express card Remarks For details on the environmental setting procedure see PCle SSD 785GB PCle SSD 1 2TB ioMemory VSL x x x User Guide for Linux x x x is the version number In a SWAP configuration 3 5 1 Power off the partition For details on powering off see 7 1 2 Powering off Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 2 Add the PCI Express card 3 Power on the partition For details on powering on the partition see 7 1 1 Powering on Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 4 Set the environment of the added PCI Express card Remarks For details on the procedure of setting the environment see PCle SSD 785GB PCle SSD 1 2TB ioMemory VSL x x x User Guide for Linux x x x is the version number 5 Restart the partition operating system Process after switching to the Reserved SB and Automatic Partition Reboot This section describes the processes after switching to the Reserved SB and the partition has automatically rebooted example status check and re configuration 53 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 5 Process after switching to the Reserved SB and Automatic Partition Reboot 3 5 1 3 5 2 Checking the status after switching to a Reserved SB and
45. user programs at ADD POST timing If INFO 808 Executed user programs at ADD POST timing is not output post process of the collaboration program is delayed Check which collaboration program takes a lot of time by seeing var log messages and collaboration program name log made in opt FUSVdp util var log directory if any The developer of the collaboration program can be confirmed by below rpm command Ask the developer about the cause of its delay Example Checking the developer of the collaboration program 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart rpm qif opt FJSVdp util user command 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart Rebooting the partition is recommended because SB hot add process has been imperfect state 4 2 5 Operation after SB hot add This section describes the process and operations after SB hot add After completing DR command operation check that the quantity of added resources is correct by opening below files as doing before SB hot add CPU proc cpuinfo Added CPU information is added grep c processor proc cpuinfo 180 Memory proc meminfo Added memory size is reflected to MemTotal cat proc meminfo MemTotal 98724424 kB MemF ree 96825552 kB Buffers 30804 kB If below command keeps to be executed added resources are not reflected Re execute the command in order to reflect added resources Sar jostat mpstat 63 C122 E175 01EN
46. 0D4 DIMM 1B4 DIMM 1D4 DIMM 0B5 DIMM 0D5 DIMM 1B5 DIMM 1D5 Since the memory mirror group having a failure suspected DIMM operates in the Non Mirror the status would be Partial Memory Mirror 44 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration Since half the number of DIMMs having a failure suspected DIMM in a Partial Mirrored memory group will not be incorporated the memory capacity seen from the operating system will be maintained The memory incorporation status before and after a partition restart is shown below FIGURE 3 14 Status when there is an error in the memory mirror maintenance mode m om rs SUM a O NENNEN O i01 HN muwnp a numer muweca a a i 3 il musa LC E mua a Ce a MW X4 uM x3 muweA2 MM AT a ELI OS a m ELI 02 Mob o BELL CS sume LCS ELLA mamec i aco a SUMA Ea mmm SUMA E O i SMMU XS _ Omas MM XI muumaz Oma WM AU 45 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remov
47. 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 1 See TABLE G 11 DIMM mounting order at 1CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition when a Partition includes 4SBs with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or DR is enabled in a Partition TABLE G 8 DIMM mounting order at 2CPU 1SB 1 CPU ZO CPU 1 DIMM OAO OA3 OBO OB3 OCO 0C3 ODO OD3 1A0 1A3 1BO 1B3 1CO 1C3 1DO 1D3 Slot 0A1 0A4 O0B1 OB4 OC1 OC4 OD1 OD4 1A1 1A4 1B1 1B4 1C1 1C4 1D1 1D4 0A2 0A5 OB2 OB5 0C2 0C5 OD2 OD5 142 145 1B2 1B5 1C2 1C5 1D2 1D5 Normal 1 1 4 4 2 2 6 6 1 1 5 5 3 3 7 7 Perfor 8 8 12 12 10 10 14 14 9 9 13 13 11 11 15 15 mance 16 6 20 20 18 18 22 22 7 21 21 19 19 23 23 Fullor 1 1 2 2 2 2 Partial 4 6 6 6 6 Mirror 8 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 2 2 6 6 2 2 6 6 1 2 2 6 6 1 1 1 See TABLE G 12 DIMM mounting order at 2CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition when a Partition includes 4SBs with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or DR is enabled in a Partition 1 1 1 1 4 5 8 9 1 1 1 1 olo Spare A A A oo A AJA A oo 4 ajajoon aan co w w N N 232 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Cond
48. 2 have simultaneously failed SBwo SBs SBa SB 3 retten Dl K O Partitions p R 1 No Description 1 No switching to the Reserved SB FIGURE 3 22 Example 2 When multiple SBs have failed within a partition SBs o SBs SB 3 Partition O X 1 No Description 1 No switching to the Reserved SB FIGURE 3 9 Example 3 Example when multiple free SB 2 3 is set as Reserved SBs in Partition 0 n m se In example 4 since SB 1 and SB 2 of a powered off partition are available the SB with the highest number is selected as the switching destination 39 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration SB E23 C Partitions ror gt lt R R monte dL e Partitions3 Pan FIGURE 3 10 Example 4 where Reserved SBs 1 2 3 of Partition 0 belong to other partitions In example 5 since the is no SB in a powered off partition among SB 1 SB 2 and SB 3 in the powered on partitions SB 43 having the highest SB number is selected as the switching destination FIGURE 3 11 Example 5 Example where the Reserved SBs 1 2 3 of Partition 0 belong to other SBm SBs2 SB43 Partiti R R Partitions Pan R R artitionu Pon O R Partition 3 Pon O Description of handling the Home SB when switching to the Reserved SB is as follows When the Home SB is
49. 4 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a partition ee 230 TABLE G 5 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a cabinet eene 230 TABLE G 6 DIMM mounting order and DIMM mixed mounting condition in each configuration essss 231 TABLE G 7 DIMM mounting order at 1CPU A SB 1 sse eene tete tente tente tente ttn tette tente tente tente ttn tetas 232 TABLE G 8 DIMM mounting order at 2CPUA SB 1 sese eeete tete tente tentent tette tente ttn tette tente ten tet 232 TABLE G 9 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 1 CPU 1SB 1 sse tentent tentent tete tettn teens 233 TABLE G 10 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 2CPU 1SB 1 234 TABLE G 11 DIMM mounting order at 1CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sackets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition sse nente te tenete tenente tnnt tttm tn tn entrent rete retenta teretes 235 TABLE G 12 DIMM mounting order at 2CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled ina Partition ninine erie eiiiai ice tete tete tee tete Roto sedato d apro ic aora ea Pres sa 235 TABLE G 13 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 1 CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a
50. ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 co Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number JC12450016 Status d Warning User Administration Network Config Partition gt Partition 1 gt ASR Control ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Click the Apply Button to apply all changes ASR 5 w Stop rebooting and Power Off v Boot Watchdog O Enable Disable E Software Watchdog O Enable 9 Disable lt gt 2 Set the automatic restart conditions The setting items of the ASR Control window are listed in the table below TABLE 8 7 ASR Control window display setting items Display Items Setting Items Contents Number of Restart Tries Set the generation of Timeout and the number of retries to start the operating system using Boot Watchdog and SVmco Software 0 to10 times can be set When 0 is specified there is no retry The default is five times Action after exceeding Restart Tries Set the action to be performed in Watchdog Timeout in case Restart is repeated and exceeds the above note retry frequency There are following items are available as Action Stop rebooting and Power Off Stops the reboot and powers off the partition Stop rebooting Stops the rebooting and stops the partition Diagnostic Interrupt assert Stops the reboot and instructs for NMI interrupt for the partition Tries to collect data du
51. CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU This section describes the hot replacement of the IOU There are two cases in hot replacement of the IOU Replacing IOU itself due to trouble of IOU itself or trouble of onboard NIC Replacing expanding or removing PCI Express card installed in IOU For replacing expanding or removing PCI Express card IOU itself does not need to be replaced However it is needed that the IOU has to be removed from the cabinet for a moment Then there is the same impact as that of replacing IOU It is needed to take the same steps as those of replacing IOU Note If IOU itself is hot replaced onboard NIC of the IOU is replaced Note that MAC address of onboard NIC is changed after replacing IOU PCI address bus address of PCI Express card on IOU may change after hot replacement of IOU This change may be occurred for replacing expanding or removing PCI Express card If iSCSI NIC is mounted on an IOU hot replacement of the IOU can be performed only if all of below conditions are satisfied DM MP Device Mapper Multipath or ETERNUS multi driver EMPD is used for storage connection Multiple path is made with a NIC on the IOU to be replaced and a NIC on an IOU other than the IOU to be replaced ANIC on the IOU to be replaced makes an interface independently Example of single interface f FC card used for SAN bo
52. DU Attention Button Although there is the Attention button in DU it is not used Nothing happens if you push this button PCI Box switch You can set 0 to 3 to PCI Box as PCI Box number by switch of PCI Box If multiple PCI Boxes are connected in a partition be sure to set different number to each PCI Box so that the number of a PCI Box is not same as that of other PCI Boxes Below PCI Box numbers can be used in each model TABLE F 30 Usable PCI Box number and models 228 PCI Box Model number 2400E 2800E 2800B 1 0 Usable Usable Not usable 1 Usable Usable Not usable 2 Usable Usable Not usable 3 Usable Usable Not usable 1 PCI Box cannot be used in PRIMEQUEST 2800B C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions This appendix describes the mounting conditions of components for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series G 1 CPU This section describes the number of CPUs that can be mounted and the criteria for mixing different types of CPU CPU mounting criteria SB with one CPU is allowed in only single SB partition 1 SB with two CPUS is allowed in single SB partition Only SB with two CPUS is allowed in multiple SB partition CPUs must be mounted starting from CPU 0 on the SB If CPU mounting order is wrong SB becomes to be error An SB with no CPU mounted on it will cause an error 1 For PRIMEQUEST 2800B only SB with two CPUS i
53. E170XA Getting Started Guide access important information after unpacking the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server This manual comes with the product PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Contains important information required for using the C122 E171XA Safety and Regulatory PRIMEQUEST 2000 series safely Information vii C122 E175 01EN Preface Title Description Manual code PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Provides errata and addenda for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 C122 E182EN Errata and Addenda series manuals This manual will be updated as needed PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Describes the functions and features of the C122 B025EN General Description PRIMEQUEST 2000 series SPARC Enterprise Provides the necessary information and concepts you C120 H007EN PRIMEQUEST Common should understand for installation and facility planning for Installation Planning Manual SPARC Enterprise and PRIMEQUEST installations PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Includes the specifications of and the installation location C122 H007EN Hardware Installation Manual requirements for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Describes how to set up the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series C122 E174EN Installation Manual server including the steps for installation preparation initialization and software installation PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Describes how to use the Web UI and UEFI to assure C122 E176EN User Interface Operating proper operation of th
54. E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 3 NIC Hot Plugging This section describes the hot plugging procedure for a NIC incorporated into teaming Note Be sure to perform hot plugging after removing the card If the card is not removed the operating system may stop There are some precautions on teaming with Intel PROSet R For details on the precautions see G 8 NIC Network Interface Card 1 Confirm physical location segment number and bus number of NIC to be replaced Confirm the physical location segment number and bus number with step 1 at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Note In case of multi function card there are some cards that have same segment number same bus number and different function numbers In this case please perform Step 2 to Step 7 of follows respectively 2 Confirm target NIC in Device Manager Confirm NIC with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 3 Select the interface in Device Manager and open Properties Device Manage zox Fie Action View Help gmiE Bm d El gga WS08X86 EE Computer Disk drives By Display adapters Ll Emulex PLUS R Human Interface Devices H Keyboards i n Mice and other pointing devices jM Monitors Ea Network adapters x Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection x Intel R 82576 Gig
55. FIGURE 4 5 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface sese 111 FIGURE 7 1 Backup BIOS Configuration window FIGURE 7 2 Restore BIOS Configuration window xvii C122 E175 01EN Preface FIGURE 7 3 Restore BIOS Configuration window partition selection eene tnnt 155 FIGURE 7 4 Backup Restore MMB Configuration windOw esee nennen netten tentent teen FIGURE 7 5 Restore confirmation dialog BOX esee ianei iieaoe ainera teen aeiia ia eria FIGURE 8 1 System Power Control windOW esses tenete tette tete ntnte tette tete tatnen etna tete ntn tentes FIGURE 8 2 Power Control windOw sese sese neee aiaiai titani FIGURE 8 3 Power Contro WIDCOW 2 1 eth eer e oe epit either e ipei titm plaid eiecti FIGURE 84 Information WIDdOW 5 25 22 rid peccet red iet rdi qe te re doc see pe ie pe Doe pe don cele pede gt FIGURE 8 5 Power Control WindOW 2 1 tcrtio tette tec nier ihn teet etes n Pe Hebreo a e eene pisode FIGURE 8 6 ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window esses nennen tentent tenente Figure 8 7 Simplified help for the shutdown command essent tnte tete ntnte tnter te tete ternera teatri FIGURE 10 1 REMCS linkage sess FIGURE 10 2 Troubleshooting
56. FJSVdp util DOC README ja_JP SJIS txt FJSVdp util DOC README ja_JP UTF 8 txt FJSVdp util DOC README txt FJSVdp util INSTALL sh FJSVdp util UNINSTALL sh lt When installing gt Install FJSVdp util RHEL6 x x x x noarch rpm using the following procedure 1 Become super user su 2 Execute INSTALL sh in the FJSVdp util directory Depending on the status the rpm package will be installed or uninstalled FJSVdp util INSTALL sh 3 Restart the system sbin shutdown r now lt During uninstallation gt Perform the uninstallation using the following procedure 1 Becomes super user su 2 Execute UNSTALL s in the FJSVdp util directory FJSVdp util UNINSTALL sh 3 Restart the system sbin shutdown r now 4 2 Hot add of SB This section describes the hot add of SB 4 2 4 Preparing for SB hot add The preparation flow is described below 1 Estimate the following capacities Resources to be added CPU DIMM Number of CPUs and DIMMs to be added 2 Arrange the SBs to be added 3 Check if the volume of resources estimated in arranged SBs to be added have been mounted 4 Confirm the installation of the DR function using the following procedure 59 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 2 Hot add of SB a Check if the size of the dump disk save area is sufficient for the memory capacity to be adde
57. Gi Full Virtual Console access granted by MMB2PILOT2 user with IP address EE 19 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use FIGURE 1 13 Popup for Allow only video in second terminal PC INFORMATION Partial access only video granted by MMB2PILOT2 user with IP address BENEEEEEREENI Message a Access Denied Closing the Viewer FIGURE 1 15 Popup for TIMEOUT in first terminal PC P o Full access privilege to Virtual Console received due to request timeout from MMB2PILOT2 user with IP address BEBE Display in third terminal If you try to open video redirection in third terminal PC the dialog box instructing that connect again after closing other video redirection since the number of connection reaches the maximum of permitted number for video redirection FIGURE 1 16 Popup for reaching maximum number of connection in second terminal PC x Maximum number of allowable sessions reached Please close other sessions and try again Console redirection PRIMEQUEST 2000 series provides console redirection to route serial output from partitions via a LAN Console redirection conforms to the specifications of IPMI v2 0 SOL Serial Over LAN When you perform console command with the partition specified on MMB CLI console output to the COM port on the partition is redirected Input from the terminal is reported to the COM port on the partition Connec
58. Home SB cannot be changed to another SB while the partition is running The DR function hot add hot remove is manually operated using the DR operation of the MMB command of the command interface CLI There will be no automatic processing in conjunction with proactive monitoring DR operation is not possible in the maintenance mode When using the DR function the same type of DIMMs must be arranged in the system Even in case of SB hot add the DIMM to be added must be the same type of DIMM When increasing the number of CPUs in a DR operation hot add additional CPU licenses must be purchased for the software that is running in the relevant partition Two CPUs must be mounted on the SB intended for hot add Two CPUs must be mounted on SBs in the partition where SB hot add is intended to be performed 34 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration Forthe partition with DR mode enable memory size within PPAR must be 1TB or less When hot adding SB total memory size within the PPAR must be 1TB or less after adding a SB Do not perform DR operation when high load is applied to the partition since TIMEOUT may occur if DR operation is performed when high load is applied to the partition n case you intend to perform hot add of SB or IOU DR operation will not be possible if there is a warning or error in the SB or IOU to be added The TSC Time Stamp
59. LAN port Port No direction B No Terminal Duplex MMB Used Used Not used Not used telnet Change software TCP23 able Duplex ssh TCP Change 22 able Video Duplex MMB Used Used Not used Not used VNC Redirection BMC TCP80 Virtual media FST Duplex MMB Used Used Not used Not used telnet Change TCP23 able Duplex ssh TCP Change 22 able Duplex RMCP UDP623 REMCS From B MMB Used Used Used Not used SMTP Change Center toA able NTP server Duplex MMB Used Used Not used Not used NTP clock client UDP123 device Web Duplex MMB PS Used Used Not used Not used http https Change browser A TCP able 8081 SVOM Duplex MMB Used Used Not used Not used telnet Change TCP23 able Duplex ssh TCP Change 22 able Duplex snmp Change UDP161 able From B snmp Change toA trap able UDP 162 207 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 3 Management Network Specifications Component Communi Compon USER CE REMCS Partition Protocol Port A cation ent port port port LAN port Port No direction B No Duplex RMCP UDP623 TABLE A 21 Management network specifications Component Communi Compon USER CE REMCS Partition Protocol Port A cation ent port port port LAN port Port No direction B No SVOM Duplex ServerVi Not Not Not used Used snmp ew used used
60. Location LED LED type Color Function Power Alarm Green Orange Indicates the power status of the component Indicates whether there is an error in the component Location F 1 2 PSU Blue Identifies the component location Can be arbitrarily set to blink or turned off by the user Indicates the component undergoing maintenance when Maintenance Wizard is running The PSU comes equipped with the following LED TABLE F 2 PSU LED LED type Color Function Power Alarm FANM 0 Alarm Orange Yellow Green Indicates state of FANM O0 Indicates whether there is AC input to each PSU whether there is an error in the PSU and the PSU on off status FANM 1 Alarm Orange Indicates state of FANM 1 TABLE F 3 Power status and PSU LED display Status FANM 0 Alarm Power Alarm FANM 1 Alarm OPL CSS 2 PSU AC input is off Off Off Off Off AC input is on and the PSU is off Off Blinking in green Off Off AC input is on and the PSU is on Off On green Off Off PSU temperature error is predicted Off On green Off On yellow PSU temperature error is detected or Off Blinking in green Off On yellow the power system error in a PSU is predicted The power system of a PSU failed Off On yellow Off On yellow FANM O0 error occurs Off or On Orange Off Off On yellow C1 FANM 1 error occurs Off Off Off or On Orange
61. Partial Mirror 1 Reduction 1 1 Switches to the Reserved SB when a Reserved SB has been set Therefore the system returns to the status before the reboot Memory Mirror conditions The conditions of Memory Mirroring are as follows The DIMM is mounted following the G 2 1 DIMM mounting sequence The condition for the hardware is to have the same capacity as that of the mirroring DIMM group Memory Mirroring 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 3 Memory Mirroring is executed in the memory on the same SB Hardware RAID The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series supports Hardware RAID Hardware RAID is a RAID function that performs operations using the SAS array controller card The SAS array controller card is a PCI Express card having a dedicated RAID controller chip and firmware and which can control the array faulty HDD disconnection incorporation LED control RAID levels supported in the hardware RAID are RAIDO RAID1 RAID5 RAID6 RAID1E RAID10 RAID50 and RAID60 However RAID level supported in the HDD SSD on the SB and DU are RAIDO RAID1 RAID5 RAID6 RAID1E and RAID10 For details on the hardware RAID setting see Server View RAID Management User Manual For details on the HDD SSD replacement of the hardware RAID configuration see 5 3 Replacing HDD SSD when active replacement is not possible Note The hardware RAID and the Software RAID GDS are mutually exclusive in the same partition When
62. Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI Express card to be replaced 2 Obtain the slot number of the mounting location Check the table in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers and obtain the slot number that is unique in the cabinet and assigned to the confirmed mounting locations 81 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards This slot number is the identification information for operating the slot of the PCI Express card to be replaced Note The four digit decimal numbers shown in Slot number in D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers have the leading digits filled with zeroes The actual slot numbers do not include the zeroes in the leading digits Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot For the partition with Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp stat pcie command on the shell of OS After the list of the power status of PCI Express slots is shown see the power status of the slot with the slot number which you confirmed at Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot Example opt FJSVdp util sbin dp stat pcie pcie20 online pcie21 offline pcie22 empty Forthe partition without Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Using the PCI Express slo
63. Power off FIGURE 8 3 Power Control Window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00E Actice MMBA Part Number MCNXXNNXN Fujitsu Serial Number SUES Status Non wn ad gt Peetition gt Power Control Power Control Retesh Hap Select a Power Control option for one ce more parttions then cick the Apply button to take effect Piot speeches Piot spectied For the details on the contents and setting items of the Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control Window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 8 2 8 Checking the Partition Power status by using the MMB This section describes the procedure by which power status of partition is confirmed 1 Log in MMB Web UI gt The MMB Web UI window appears 2 Click Partition Partition x Information from menu of Web UI The Information window appears 161 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 2 Partition Power on and Power off FIGURE 8 4 Information window Active MIMB 0 PRIMEQUEST 2800E Part Number MCF3AC111 Serial Number JC12450006 Status dh Warning Model The power status of the partition is displayed in Power Status For details on the contents and setting items of the Information window see 1 3 8 Partition x menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Powering off a partition by using the MMB This section describes
64. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface FIGURE 4 5 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC removal procedure This section describes the procedure for hot plugging only a network card Note When removing multiple NICs be sure to remove them one by one If you do this with multiple cards at the same time the correct settings may not be made 1 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface Confirm the interface mounting location through the configuration file information and the operating system information First confirm the bus address of the PCI slot that has the mounted interface to be removed ls l sys class net eth0 devic lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth0 device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Excluding the rest of the directory path check the part corresponding to the file name in the symbolic link destination file of the output results In the above example the underlined part shows the bus address 0000 0b 01 in the example Next check the PCI slot number for this bus address grep il 0000 0b 01 sys bus pci slots address sys bus pci slots 20 address Read the output file path as shown below and confirm the PC
65. Select a power control acbon then cbck the Appt burton Power Os all partition Power OE al partiticei al pertiica wil be mtomascaly claedoun Force Power OF a L s O Syste LJ L LJ LJ a o lt lt PETENSUR For details on the System Power Control window see 1 2 8 System Power Control window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Partition Power on and Power off This section describes various procedures of power on and Power off for the partition and explains the method of checking power supply Various Methods for Powering On the Partition There are three methods for powering on the partition which are as follows 1 Operation through the MMB Web UI or MMB CLI The partition can be powered on through the MMB Web U or MMB CLI operation In this method power on can be specified for all the partitions or specified in the partition unit 2 Scheduled operation Automatic operation according to a set schedule A partition can be powered on by a scheduled operation Automatic operation function A partition unit can be powered on automatically by recording the time of power on in advance by the scheduled operation function 157 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 2 Partition Power on and Power off 3 Wake On LAN WOL The partition can be power on with WOL In this method power on can be specified for the relevant partiti
66. The MMB is the standby MMB Off The MMB is the active MMB On The MMB is being located On F 1 10 LAN The LAN port comes equipped with the following LEDs LAN ports in an IOU and LAN ports in a MMB have same LEDs TABLE F 16 LAN LEDs LED type Color Function Note 100M LAN Green Indicates the Link status and Activity status of Mounted only on the MMB Link Act a 100M LAN 100M LAN Green Indicates the communication speed of a 100M Mounted only on the MMB Speed LAN GbE LAN Green Indicates the Link status and Activity status of Mounted only on the MMB Link Act 1 a GbE LAN and IOU GbE LAN Green Orang Indicates the communication speed of aGbE Mounted only on the MMB Speed 1 e LAN and IOU 10GbELAN Green Indicates the Link status and Activity status of Mounted only on the MMB Link Act 1 a 10GbE LAN and IOU 10GbE LAN Green Orang Indicates the communication speed of a Mounted only on the MMB Speed 1 e 10GbE LAN and IOU 1 It is not enough to confirm the Link state by only checking that Link LED is turning on You can confirm that the LAN port is Link state by not only checking that Link LED is turning on but also checking that the particular LAN port is Enabled by MMB Web UI TABLE F 17 LAN LED and Linkup Speed NIC Speed 10M 100M 1G 10G GbE Off Green Yellow 10GbE Off Yellow Green 221 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks wit
67. Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI Disk 1 Port 2 Bus 0 Target 0 LUN 0 Volume path names E Legacy device name PhysicalDrivet W mpiodisk amp ven fujitsu amp prod e2000 amp rev 000031 aj Configure Multipath IO MPIO To configure the MPIO policy for a selected device dick MPIO MPIO Device interface name Information On iSCSI Device Details 6 5 2 Disconnecting MPD This section describes the procedure for disconnecting MPD ik 2 Start ETERNUS Multipath Manager Confirm the address value recorded in step 10 in 6 5 1 Confirming the incorporation of a card with MPD Then place the target device offline For a multifunction card it is necessary to place more than one device offline ETERNUS Multipath Manager File Tools Help Fault list 0 Status Machine name Note In case of multi function card there are some cards that have same segment number same bus number and different function numbers In this case please perform Step 3 to Step 5 of follows respectively Confirm target NIC in Device Manager Confirm NIC with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Disable target NIC in Device manager Disable NIC with step 2 b at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Stop target NIC by using safely remove devices from computer Stop NIC with step 3 at 6 2 1 Rep
68. access to the interface as follows Stop the application that was confirmed in step 2 as using the interface or exclude the interface from the target of use by the application 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 2 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations These operations precede deactivation of the physical interface sbin ifdown ethX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the interface under bonding If the bonding device is operating in mode 1 use the following steps for safety purposes on the SLAVE interface to be removed to exclude it from operation In any other mode removing it immediately should not cause any problems Confirm that the SLAVE interface is the interface currently being used for communication cat sys class net bondY bonding active slave If the displayed interface name corresponds to the SLAVE interface to be removed execute the following command to switch to communicating now with the other SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethZ ethZ bondY configured interface not subject to hot replacement Finally remov
69. address Execute below command checking the correspondence between the interface name and the hardware address Example ethO for a single interface cat sys class net eth0 address 2c d4 44 1 44 0 Example ethO for a bonding interface cat proc net bonding bondY Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver Slave interface eth0 Permanent HW addr 2c d4 44 f1 44 f f0 You can use this procedure only when the bonding device is active If the bonding device is not active or the slave has not been incorporated use the same procedure as for a single interface Also the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address is automatically registered by the system in the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Confirm that the ATTR address and NAME items have the same definitions as in the above output 66 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU Example ethO grep eth0 etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 2c d4 44 1 44 0 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME ethO0 The Y at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed You can always obtain the correct hardware address from the description in etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules regardless of whether the interface is incorp
70. addresses in TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB are assigned to the NICs network interface controllers on the MMBs Each NIC is connected to an SB or an external network port of the MMB through the switching hub on the MMB The MMB firmware uses the IP addresses The standard configuration has one MMB For a dual MMB configuration which has two MMBs assign a common virtual IP address to both MMBs In addition to the virtual IP address assign one physical IP address to each MMB TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB Name NIC Type IP address Description setting method Management LAN IP address MMB Virtual Physical IP address This IP address is used for communication when the MMB is connected to the management LAN The physical IP address is assigned to the NIC of the user port of each MMB and the virtual IP address is assigned commonly to the duplicated MMBs The virtual IP address is used for access from PC etc on the management LAN The virtual IP is inherited by an active MMB Virtual IP MMB Virtual IP Set it from The PC connected to the management LAN Address common address the MMB uses this IP address to communicate via the 1 CLI or MMB Web telnet etc with the active MMB The Web Ul PC user need not be aware of which MMB is active MMB 0 or MMB 1 MMBZO IP MMB 0 1 Physical Se
71. an IOU Do not enable DR function and TXT TPM function together 35 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration 3 2 2 Reserved SB In the Reserved SB function a spare SB is mounted in the chassis in advance the faulty SB is automatically disconnected the spare SB is incorporated and the partition is restarted The spare SB intended for switching when there is a fault is called the Reserved SB All models in the PRIMEQUEST2000 series support the Reserved SB function Using a Reserved SB function has the following advantages when a hardware error occurs in the SB Quick recovery is possible without reduction in SB resources na partition with one SB recovery is possible even if the SB fails SB degradation In addition in the 2000 series PRIMEQUEST Series SB in a running partition can be also specified as a Reserved SB A Reserved SB can be used very effectively by using this function An SB in a running partition can be also used as a Reserved SB In this case the SB will be referred to as Active Reserved SB The example below shows the operation wherein the SB of a partition in the test system being used as a Reserved SB If there is an SB failure in a partition of the production system the firmware issues a shutdown instruction to the partition of the test system After the shutdown is completed the partition is incorporated as the SB of the production
72. below Reference Reference Getting the number of running process P The number of running process P can be got by below command grep procs_running proc stat procs_running 1 Getting the number of CPU before SB hot add C grep c processor proc cpuinfo 120 Estimating the time when each collaboration program will take to finish process Check the developer of the collaboration program in opt FJSVdp util user command by below rpm command Ask the developer about the time for the process of the collaboration program rpm qif opt FJSVdp util user command 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart Below scripts will finish both their pre process and post process for around one minute 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart 89 FJSVdp util irqbalance restart 90 FJSVdp util detect passthrough dev 2 Confirming the size of resources before SB hot add Confirm the status of the SB before SB hot add to compare the state after SB hot add with the state before SB hot add The number or sizes of resources before SB hot add can be confirmed by checking below files CPU proc cpuinfo proc cpuinfo outputs information of each CPU recognized by OS at the time when this file is opened The number of CPU can be obtained by below command grep c processor proc cpuinfo 120 Memory proc meminfo proc meminfo outputs size of memory recognized by OS at the time when this file is opened cat proc meminfo
73. browser setting For Internet Explorer 1 Select Tools Internet Options Connection tab LAN Settings Proxy Server Advanced 2 Uncheck Use the same proxy server for all protocols 3 Clear the Socks field For FireFox 1 Select Tools Options Network tab Connection Settings 2 Check Manual proxy configuration 3 Uncheck Use this proxy server for all protocols 4 Clear the SOCKS field Window may be maximized when you attempt to establish a video redirection connection or during video redirection connection In such cases change to window size suitable for environment of your terminal Maximum number of connections The following lists the maximum number of connections using the remote operation BMC function TABLE 1 7 Maximum number of connections using the remote operation function Video redirection Up to 2 users can be connected concurrently However only 1 user can perform operations The other user can only refer to information Virtual Media Up to two devices can be connected for floppy CD or DVD Hard disk drive independently The operating conditions for BMC installation of individual BMC functions is described below Operating environment settings You need to make the appropriate settings for video redirection and virtual media for your network environment In the Console Redirection Setup window of the MMB Web UI set the IP address and subnet mask and set enable
74. conditions for automatically restarting the partition 1 3 8 Partition x menu ASR Automatic Server Restart Control Starts video redirection 1 3 8 Partition x menu Sets various modes for the partition 1 3 8 Partition x menu Displays information on the currently registered user 1 4 1 User List window account Changes the password of the currently logged in user 1 4 2 Change Password window Displays a list of users connected to the MMB via 1 4 3 Who window Serial Telnet SSH and Web UI Sets the MMB date and time 1 5 1 Date Time window Sets the IP address and other values for MMB access 1 5 2 Network Interface menu Sets Speed Duplex of each port on the MMB board 1 5 3 Management LAN Port Configuration window Sets the network protocol of the MMB 1 5 4 Network Protocols window Configures automatic update for Web UI windows 1 5 5 Refresh Rate window whose status changes Makes settings related to SNMP 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu Sets an SNMP trap destination 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu Sets the Engine ID and makes user settings specific to 1 5 6 SNMP Configuration menu SNMP v3 Creates a secret key and the corresponding CSR 1 5 7 SSL menu signature request Retrieves the secret key or CSR signature request 1 5 7 SSL menu stored on the MMB Imports the signed electronic certificate sent from the 1 5 7 SSL menu certificate authority
75. display Eco related status display Cabinet power consumption display FAN speed display PSU DDC power on status display Temperature display Eco status acquisition from higher level software 201 C122 E175 01EN Maintenance Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series operation Minor item Description SNMP Log Hardware error processing Log type Expand contents and enhance history information of MMB collected log System event log Hardware and UEFI error log Power control and factor information Network setting and log MMB operation log login record Firmware version Mounting unit information Partition configuration and setting Sensor information Various firmware log dumps Log download Batch download of MMB collected logs SEL download Fault location Faulty component indication WHEA support Support of Windows Hardware Error Architecture A 1 4 Maintenance TABLE A 4 Maintenance functions operation Minor item Description Component replacement Replacement target Cold replacement non hot hot system hot maintenance Hot maintenance support by the hot plug Replacement target component indication Replacement target component indicated by SEL or LED Hot Plug PCI Express card HDD SSD Replacement SB by DR FRU management FRU management FRU information manag
76. ds 4 5 2 DRoperation of OU hotfrermowve 2 ecitultet teet e te tet te eei tee tent it Ce Ee Pec t b dtd 4 5 3 Operation after IOU hot removes essesessecessecessecessesessecesseeeeseesseesseeeseeueseeneseeseseeseseeaeseeseseeneseeaeseeaeseeaeseeeseeasseeeseeeaeeaeaeens 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards sese ieese setenta tenete teet tette te tete teta storien aetas peores raki 4 6 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for PCI Express cards sese 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 4 6 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure 4 6 4 Network card replacement procedure es 4 6 5 Hot replacement procedure for iSCSI NIC Waa w ale 47 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards 4 7 1 Common addition procedures for all PCI Express cards 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail 4 7 3 FC card Fibre Channel card addition procedure 4 74 Network card addition procedure eee 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards seen 4 8 1 Common removal procedures for all PCI Express cards 4 8 2 PCI Express card removal procedure in detail 4 8 3 FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure 4 8 4 Netw
77. end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Do this editing for all the interfaces listed 7 Reflect the edited rules in udev in the table created in step 2 udevd reads the rules described in the rule file at its start time and then retains the rules in memory Simply changing the rule file does not mean the changed rules are reflected Take action as follows to reflect the new rules in udev udevadm control reload rules iSCSI NIC on the IOU If replace iSCSI NIC on the IOU you have to take not only the same steps of NIC on the IOU including Onboard NIC but also takes below steps in step 3 of that 1 Perform the work for suppressing access to the iSCSI connection interface Confirm the state of multiple path by DM MP 1 or EMPD 2 Use the iscsiadm command to log out from the path iqn through which the iSCSI card to be replaced is routed and disconnect the session Example which confirms the state of session before disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage syst dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 m eternus tcp 2 192 168 2 66 3260 3 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage syst dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 m eternus Example which logout path going through a NIC to be replaced sbin iscsiadm m node T iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage 68 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterpri
78. first Tf you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI_Box 0 PCIC 1 When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previous fi Next View Configuration Note Ask the administrator of your system to power on the PCI Express slot 9 The window updating status appears 103 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wi Maintenance Wizard Waiting for status update Status Updating PCI_Box PCIC status Maintenance Wizard Post Maintenance View Check PCI Box PCIC O status and then click Next button 11 Confirm that maintenance mode has been released with information area of MMB Web UI not gray out and click Next 104 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST Active IMIB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status Normal gt Maintenance gt Mamtenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Completion PCI _Box 0 PCIC amp 1 replacement operation complete Please click OK button x 4 7 3 FC card Fibre Channel card addition procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being added Notes The FC card used for SAN boot doe
79. front panel of the device also has the MMB Ready LED The MMB Ready LED stays on in green when the device is operating normally To start the MMB select System MMB on the Web UI when the MMB Ready LED is off Select Enable in Enable Disable MMB in the MMB window Then click the Apply button MMB Web UI window As shown in the following figure you can use the MMB Web UI window to check for any problems 178 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FIGURE 10 5 System status display in the MMB Web UI window Modol PRIIEQTEST SNE Acho MARD Port Sunber MCXNNNNXX FU Serial Nantor cs pa wa System Status Retesh rei Ck o link below o view detailed foonadon ibo rock wait No Description Status in information area Displays the system status The MMB Web UI window always displays the information area Status in the information area displays the system status The following table lists the Normal Warning and Error status indicators You can view the details of a message about a trouble spot by clicking the displayed icon to jump to the System Event Log window TABLE 10 3 Icons indicating the system status Status Display color Icon Normal Green None normal status Warning Yellow A black mark in a yellow triangle warning status Error Red critical status A white x mark in a red c
80. in Each port is connected to a network outside the cabinet The C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 3 Management LAN LAN port IP address setting Description method mounted in PCI each partition ports in the relevant partition must have IP addresses Assign Express slot in IOU IP addresses to the ports used for actual operation or PCI Box 1 3 1 3 1 1 The default IP address 172 30 0 partition number 2 is assigned during installation of SVS The default IP address can be used unless it is in conflict with the one in the other subnet Remarks The NIC in PCH on the Home SB is used as the NIC of the partition for internal LAN The network device name is not defined uniquely The NIC in PCH on the Home SB is searched by using the bus number device number and function number assigned to NIC Even if the Home SB is switched by Reserved SB function Internal LAN is kept communicating MMB writes over the MAC address of the NIC in PCH on the Home SB and keeps the same MAC address as that before the SB was switched For this MAC address a unique value is assigned to each partition and managed as system FRU information so that it is unique per cabinet Only AutoNego is supported as setting of GbE port speed in IOU 10GbE Management LAN This section describes the configuration of the management LAN for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Overview of
81. interface perform the following a Confirm the state of multiple path by DM MP 1 or EMPD 2 b Use the iscsiadm command to log in to the path iqn through which the replacement iSCSI card is routed and reconnect the session Example which confirms the state of session before connecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 Example which login path going through a NIC to be replaced sbin iscsiadm m node T iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage System eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 p 192 168 2 66 3260 login c Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been activated Example which confirms the state of session after connecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0pO tcp 3 192 168 2 66 3260 3 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 d You can confirm the activation of sessions on multipath products using DM MP or ETERNUS multidriver 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session activation Example of DM MP display before connecting path sbin multipath 11 72 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 4 Hot add of IOU mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNU
82. interface configuration file Execute the below command for all the interface names including interfaces which are not actually replaced on the IOU confirmed in step 1 Example ethO sbin ifconfig eth0 down Confirm the correspondence between the interface names before and after the NIC replacement According to the table with the interface information about before and after the NIC replacement in steps 2 of 4 3 1 Preparation for IOU hot replacement and step 1 in this section confirm that the relation between the interface name and location is correct When switching interface name occurs before and after IOU replacement make the correspondence between interface name and location into the correspondence before IOU replacement by below procedure Note For the interface which name does not change before and after IOU replacement this procedure does not need Here shows the procedure to change the interface name of eth2 and eth3 change eth to eth3 eth3 to eth2 as a specific example a Edit the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules modifying the target interface name to desired name In this example change eth2 to eth3 eth3 to eth2 Example of descriptions in the file before editing PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 SUBSYSTEM net igb ACTION add DRIVERS 70 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot
83. list fidapter Selection 2 Emulex Adapter Configuration Main Menu window appears FIGURE J 32 Emulex Adapter Configuration Main Menu window Confirming version of FC card 1 Select Display Adapter Info in Emulex Adapter Configuration Main Menu window and press Enter key 2 Controller Information window appears Check firmware version and UEFI driver version 257 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 33 Controller Information window Controller Information UEFI Driver Version Note Press Esc key sometimes and go back to top menu 258 C122 E175 01EN Appendix K Software Link J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card Appendix K Software Link For details on bundled software and drivers supplied with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series hardware see Chapter 3 Software Configuration in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series General Description C122 B022EN 259 C122 E175 01EN Appendix L Failure Report Sheet L 1 Failure Report Sheet Appendix L Failure Report Sheet This appendix includes the failure report sheet Use this sheet to report a failure L 1 Failure Report Sheet Configuration information UEFI Setup Utility settings Model name PRIMEQUEST OS Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version Windows Sever
84. ls l sys class net device grep 0000 89 00 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Aug 27 16 06 2013 sys class net eth0 device gt 0000 89 00 0 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed In this case ethO is the interface name which is correspondent to PCI bus address 0000 89 00 0 Note You will use the bus address obtained here in steps 2 and procedure after IOU replacement Record the bus address so that you can reference it later Next check the PCI slot number for this PCI bus address Execute ethtool p command making the LED of NIC blinked Check IOU or PCI box connected to the IOU checking in which slots the NIC is mounted e g PCI 0 Example Blinking the LED of the NIC corresponding to interface ethO for ten seconds sbin ethtool p eth0 10 Make a table with information including interface name hardware address and PCI bus address of NIC mounted on IOU to be replaced Make a below table with information of IOU to be replaced within information which is got by step 1 TABLE 4 1 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names Interface name Hardware address Bus address Location ethO 0000 89 01 0 Onboard 0 eth1 0000 89 01 1 Onboard 1 eth2 0000 8c 00 0 PCI 0 Note When recording a bus address include the function number number after the period Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware
85. maintenance esee nennen nene 49 3 3 5 Replacing the battery backup unit of the uninterrupted power supply unit UPS sss 49 3 3 6 Replacing the POL SSD Card etn RERUM ERR IUS 49 34 Expansion Of COrnponerits 3r cii ec EO Hie o Se Cie d iei i Po ee DE HER Pere D Hec te eed 51 3 4 1 Procedure of expansion in hot maintenance eese ener nennen nennen nene 52 3 4 2 Procedure of expansion in cold maintenance essssseeeeeene nennen tnnt nennen tenente nennen 52 3 43 Expansion of POISSDi gardi iesirea ieaie reete dec eo sh eod ean te ttd eia n 53 3 5 Process after switching to the Reserved SB and Automatic Partition Reboot sse 53 3 5 1 Checking the status after switching to a Reserved SB and automatic rebooting sss 54 3 5 2 Processing after replacement of a faulty SB esee tenete tenente tentent tentent 54 3 5 3 Checking the source partition configuration information when switching to a Reserved SB 55 3 6 ine zt eR ineM wciadi og 56 CHAPTER4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 sess eese nennen tnnt tnne tnn 58 4 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DB d e RR ERR RERUM RHEIN Eaa TE EAE Eaa tA 58 4 1 1 DR function configuration setting esent nennt nnne nennen tenente nennen nennen 58 4 1 2 dp Command Packa
86. of mounted memory plus 1 MB or more About 1 5 times the size of the mounted memory is recommended Enter a value in Maximum size Be sure to specify a value larger than or equal to Initial size The same size as lnitial size is recommended Save the settings Click Set in Paging file size for selected drive This saves the settings Paging file size in Drive displays the entered values Click the OK button to close the Virtual Memory dialog box Click the OK button to close the Performance Options dialog box Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box Restart the partition After the partition restart the settings take effect Acquiring data for investigation RHEL If a problem occurs in RHEL data on the situation is required for ensuring a prompt and correct investigation For details on setting of dump environment contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 197 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 5 Configuring and Checking Log Information 10 4 5 sadump If a problem occurs in the partition which is operating on RHEL memory dump is acquired as shown 10 4 4 Acquiring data for investigation RHEL However acquiring memory dump sometimes fail In such cases memory dump is acquired by sadump in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E PRIMEQUEST 2800B does not support sadump Below ste
87. or by making a phone call to the Microsoft customer Service center Hot add procedure for HDD SSD For details on the hot add procedure for HDD SSD see CHAPTER 5 Replacement of HDD SSD Changing the firmware when expanding components The firmware may be required to be changed when expanding a component Use the same firmware version number of the FC Fiber Channel card within the same partition FC card PCI Express card Use the same version number as the firmware version number that is currently in use How to confirm the firmware number After adding a card and the partition is started use the following procedure to confirm the firmware version number How to confirm the FC card firmware version number To confirm the version number see 1 2 14 IOU menu or 1 2 18 PCI Box menu in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Changing the firmware If the firmware version numbers are not identical change the firmware The information on the firmware and the procedure are provided in the following website Download of drivers and the bundled software of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Remarks In the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series the customer will change a part of the firmware 3 4 1 Procedure of expansion in hot maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after expansion in hot maintenance Procedure before expansion Stop the relevant partition referring to 7 1 2 Powering off Partitions i
88. or disable for video redirection and virtual media For details on setup by MMB Web UI see 1 3 6 Console Redirection Setup menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Video redirection With the video redirection function users can access windows for the partition side from a remote location When a user starts video redirection from the Console Redirection window of the MMB Web UI a Java applet is sent to the user s terminal Through the Java applet the terminal displays VGA output sent to the LAN User input with the mouse or keyboard on the terminal is routed through the LAN to the partition List of video redirection function is shown below TABLE 1 8 List of video redirection function Function Description Note Window Perform operation of screen display such as pause zoom in 13 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use Function Description Note zoom out and language selection Keyboard Operate keyboard by keyboard of terminal PC Special key cannot be used directly Virtual keyboard Display and operate virtual keyboard Mouse Operate mouse by mouse of terminal PC A mouse pointer in a partition and a mouse pointer in a terminal PC run simultaneously Display of mouse in a terminal PC can be set to enable or disable Position of mouse can be set to
89. potentially dangerous situation that is likely to result in death or serious This indicates a hazardous situation that could result in minor or moderate personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly This also indicates that damage to the product or other property may occur if the user does not perform the procedure correctly Important This indicates information that could help the user use the product more efficiently Alert messages in the text An alert statement follows an alert symbol An alert statement is indented on both ends to distinguish it from regular text Similarly one space line is inserted before and after the alert statement Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must not perform these tasks under any circumstances Otherwise electric shock injury or fire may result Newly installing or moving equipment Removing the front rear and side covers Installing and removing built in options Connecting and disconnecting external interface cables Maintenance repair and periodic diagnosis and maintenance The List of important alert items table lists important alert items List of important alert items This manual does not contain important alert items Warning labels Never remove the warning labels Warning label location the main cabinet top iii C122 E175 01EN Preface C
90. replacement of IOU ATTR address 2 00 19 99 d7 36 21 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth2 PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 19 99 d7 36 22 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth3 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 19 99 d7 36 21 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth3 PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS 2 Y ATTR address 00 19 99 d7 36 22 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth2 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed b Execute below command reflecting the edited rules udevadm control reload rules C Assert uevent to target interfaces in this case eth2 and eth3 Note to specify the interface name before changing at this time For example assert uevent with specifying eth2 when changing eth2 to eth10 echo add gt sys class net eth2 uevent echo add gt sys class net eth3 uevent Interpret properly eth2 or eth3 to appropriate name d Check whether the interface name is changed to desired name 4 Editthe saved interface configuration file Write a new h
91. routed and reconnect the session Example which confirms the state of session before connecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0pO Example which login path going through a NIC to be replaced sbin iscsiadm m node T iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage System eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 p 192 168 2 66 3260 login 98 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards 4 7 4 7 1 g Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been activated Example which confirms the state of session after connecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0pO0 tcp 3 192 168 2 66 3260 3 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 h You can confirm the activation of sessions on multipath products using DM MP or ETERNUS multidriver 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session activation Example of DM MP display before connecting path sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw XY round robin 0 prio 1 active XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready Example of DM MP display after co
92. session has been disconnected Example which confirms the state of session after disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 d You can confirm the disconnection of sessions on multipath products using DM MP or ETERNUS multidriver 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session disconnection Example of DM MP display before disconnecting path f sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 2 active XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready A4r0 0 0 sde 8 32 active ready Example of DM MP display after disconnecting path sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 1 enabled XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux 114 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards 115 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 5 Replacement of HDD SSD 5 1 Hot replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware RAID configuration 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 CHAPTER 5Replacement of HDD SSD This chapter describes how to replace Hard Disk Drives HDD or Solid State
93. set to the free status in 2 mentioned above select the reserved target partition and click the Apply button When reserving multiple partitions select them at the same time and click the Apply button 54 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 5 Process after switching to the Reserved SB and Automatic Partition Reboot 7 Startthe partition Click Partition Power Control In the Power Control window select Power on from Power Control of the relevant partition and click the Apply button The partition will start When setting the maintenance replaced SB as a Reserved SB Perform the following procedures for the replaced SB 1 From the log analyze all the partitions where a Reserved SB that was incorporated in a rebooted partition place of a faulty SB For details on the analysis procedure see 3 5 3 Checking the source partition setting information when switching to a Reserved SB 2 Check the status Click System System Status Confirm the status in System Status window 3 Confirm the configuration status of the partition Click Partition Partition Configuration Check the configuration status of the partition in the Partition Configuration window 4 Setthe replaced SB as the Reserved SB a Click Partition Reserved SB Configuration Reserved SB Configuration window appears b Check the check box of the SB replaced for maintenance Select reserv
94. setting Supported MMB management LAN setting Supported Supported Internal LAN setting Supported Maintenance LAN setting Supported Supported MMB LAN port setting Supported MMB network protocol setting Supported Supported SNMP setting Supported Supported SNMP setting V3 Supported SSL setting Supported SSH setting Supported Supported Remote Server Management user setting Supported RMCP Access control setting Supported Alarm E Mail setting Supported MMB network status display command Supported 206 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 3 Management Network Specifications A 2 12 Maintenance TABLE A 19 Maintenance Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI Batch firmware update Supported Supported MMB configuration information save and Supported restore BIOS configuration information save and Supported restore Maintenance wizard Component Supported Replacement Maintenance wizard Maintenance mode Supported setting and cancellation SB hot addition Supported IOU hot addition Supported A 3 Management Network Specifications The following lists the management network specifications of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series TABLE A 20 Management network specifications Component Communi Compon USER CE REMCS Partition Protocol Port A cation ent port port port
95. slot b Correct the interface name that is not the same before and after the NIC replacement in the entries of the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Make the interface name the same as before the NIC replacement Example of descriptions in the file before editing 4 PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME eth1 PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME eth0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing eth1 the name after replacement has been corrected to ethO the name before replacement PCI device Ox 0x e1000 95 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards 16 17 18 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 X K ERNEL eth NAME eth0 PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 ATTR type 1 X K ERNEL eth NAME ethl
96. ten tenens 207 Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers seseeeeeeennn tenente nennt nennen entente nennen 209 B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components eese nete nente tnnt tnnt tntettntettnte tete tente tne tnte tete ntntin 209 B2 Port Numbers nee E Ehe DERI RR GRO aaa aa dane ae eden ieee 211 Appendix C Lists of External Interfaces Physical esses nenne nnne ntn ntete tenerte tnter tete retenti retener nns 213 C 1 List of External System Interfaces nsise laete nies ostsp d inte ese due reot rece eve st eade ne i vese ut 213 C2 List of External MMB Interfaces 1 i cerent eren trend ier ei ec cl ped da et ed ate cia 213 Appendix D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers 214 D 1 Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Internal I O Controllers of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series 214 D2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers sese 214 Appendix E PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Cabinets Link essent tente tnnt tnnt tnnt tenete tnt 217 Appendix F Status Checks with LEDS esses eese eene tente tnnt ttn ttes ttt tete tete tene tete tete tenete tete tease tears 218 F 1 LED TYP6 D 218 F1 1 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED e
97. the file after editing In the example ethO was deleted and eth1 is commented out PCI device Ox 0x e1000 4 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS 2 Y ATTR address 2 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME eth1 The Y at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Do this editing for all the interfaces listed in the table created in step 2 Reflect the edited rules in udev udevd reads the rules described in the rule file at its start time and then retains the rules in memory Simply changing the rule file does not mean the changed rules are reflected Take action as follows to reflect the new rules in udev udevadm control reload rules Power on the PCI Express slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Check whether there is an error in added FC card by MMB Maintenance Wizard This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system For details on the operation of replacement see step 8 to 11 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Collect the information associated with an interface on the replacement NIC An interface ethX is created for the replacement NIC at the power on time Make a table with information about each interface created for the replacement NI
98. the powering off procedure using the MMB Web UI window Log into the MMB Web UI gt The MMB Web UI window appears Click Partition Power Control from the menu of the Web UI gt The Power Control window appears 162 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 3 Scheduled operations FIGURE 8 5 Power Control window Model PRIMEQUEST2900E Active MMBA0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FU Serial Number oom 8 3 8 3 1 Status Vou we ad Power Control Reveah Heip Select a Power Control option foe one ce more partons then cick the Apply button to take effect The column has the partition number For details on the Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 3 Set the Power Control of the partition number to be powered off to Power Off and click the Apply button gt The specified partition will be powered off Remarks In Windows Server View Agent is required when shutdown is executed from the MMB Web UI For details on the method of setting the Server View Agent see the description of System shutdown tab in the Server View Operations Manager Installation Server View Agents for Windows In VMware shutdown cannot be performed by VMware Perform shutdown on VMware Scheduled operations This section describes scheduled operations Powering on a part
99. to perform PCI hot plug Operation by using sysfs Operation by using dp commands You can perform the operation by using dp commands if Dynamic Reconfiguration utility is installed in the partition If not be sure to use the operation by using sysfs Although you can perform the operation by using Sysfs even if Dynamic Reconfiguration utility is installed in the partition it is recommended to perform the operation by using dp commands to prevent wrong operation Hereafter description about the operation by using dp commands starts at For the partition with Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed and description about the operation by sysfs starts at For the partition without Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Notes If you replace PCI Express cards on an IOU see 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU Remarks For details on the card replacement procedures not described in this chapter see the respective product manuals Overview of common replacement procedures for PCI Express cards This section provides an overview of common replacement procedures for all PCI Express cards 1 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI Express card type 2 Powering off a PCI slot 3 Replacing a PCI card This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 4 Powering on a PCI slot 5 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card
100. type Note This chapter provides instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card addition removal and replacement with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations Step 3 is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail This section describes how to replace a PCI Express card Preparing the software using a PCI Express card When a PCI Express card is replaced or removed there must be no software using the PCI Express card For this reason before replacing the PCI Express card stop the software using the PCI Express card or make the software operations inapplicable Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot When replacing adding or removing a PCI Express card you need to manipulate the power supply to the appropriate slot through the operating system First use the following procedure to obtain the slot number from the mounting location of the PCI Express slot for the card It will be used to manipulate the power supply 1 Identify the mounting location of the PCI Express card to be replaced See the figure in B 1
101. using the hardware RAID consider either of the following conditions to protect the customer s data in the event of a power failure An FBU is mounted Ensure stable AC power by redundant power mechanism dual system reception mechanism and UPS Server View RAID For details on the Server View RAID see Server View RAID Management User Manual Cluster configuration For inter cabinet clustering clustering with only PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is supported The inter cabinet clustering with cabinets other than PRIMEQUEST 2000 series is not supported Forinter cabinet clustering clustering with only the same models is supported The inter cabinet clustering with different models such as clustering with PQ2400E and PQ2800E is not supported Replacing components Components to be replaced can be identified from the replacement board and OPL LED display For details on the LED display see Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs 47 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 3 Replacing components 3 3 4 Replaceable components Replaceable components and replacement conditions are listed in the table below TABLE 3 10 Replaceable components and replacement conditions Component name AC power off Device stop AC power on status All partitions off status hot maintenance AC power on target partition off hot maintenance AC power on target partition on hot mainten
102. 0 1A3 1BO 1B3 1CO 1C3 1DO 1D3 Slot 0A1 0A4 OB1 OB4 0C1 0C4 OD1 OD4 1A1 1A4 1B1 1B4 1C1 1C4 1D1 1D4 0A2 0A5 OB2 OB5 0C2 0C5 OD2 OD5 142 145 1B2 1B5 1C2 1C5 1D2 1D5 Normal 1 1 4 4 2 2 6 6 1 1 5 5 3 3 7 7 Perfor 8 8 12 12 10 10 14 14 9 9 13 13 11 11 15 15 mance 16 16 20 20 18 18 22 22 17 17 21 21 19 19 23 23 Fullor 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 Partial 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 Mirror 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 11 1 1 4 4 2 2 6 6 1 1 5 5 3 3 7 7 Spare 1 1 4 4 2 2 6 6 1 1 5 5 3 3 7 7 1 1 4 4 2 2 6 6 1 1 5 5 3 3 7 7 235 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM TABLE G 13 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 1CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition CPU 0 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO OB3 0CO 0C3 ODO 0D3 Slot OA1 OA4 OB1 0B4 OC1 0C4 OD1 0D4 OA2 0A5 OB2 0B5 OC2 0C5 OD2 OD5 Normal O O A x x Perfor O O A A mance ueque cS DAE quee ue Full or Partial Mirror O O A A Ww Spare O O A A O O A A Ww TABLE G 14 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 2CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Addres
103. 00 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Remarks Be sure to write down the message ID and message details because they will be needed when you contact a field engineer or your sales representative Ifthe list of messages in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN does not include the displayed message contact a field engineer or your sales representative 183 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting 10 2 7 Problems related to the main unit or a PCI Box This section describes problems related to the main unit or a PCI Box It also describes how to correct the problems An LED on the main unit does not go on or the orange LED is on Cause The main unit may have failed Corrective action Contact your sales representative or a field engineer Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit An error message appears on your display Cause An error occurred in the device Corrective action Confirm the error message and take action according to the description of the error The keyboard and mouse do not work Cause The cables are not correctly connected to the USB ports of the Home SB Corrective action Connect the cables correctly to the USB ports of the Home SB Part Number or Serial Number in the MMB Web UI displays Read E
104. 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FIGURE 10 2 Troubleshooting overview Occurrence of system problem As indicated by LED on OPL Notified via MMB Web U window Notified by e mail Alarm LED On orange Status displayed in information area Finding out about abnormal conditions Investigating abnormal conditions trouble spots MMB Web UI window Examine the following logs according to the displayed status and displayed configuration 1 System event log Investigate malfunctioning components Checking into errors in detail See this manual Check for the Event ID of the message on the message list Taking appropriate action depending on the message Contac ng your sales representative or a fied engineer i Operation continues Solved 114 Collecting data for maintenance 7 2 data for a detailed investgation Maintenance completed If a problem occurs in this product troubleshoot the problem according to the displayed message If the error recurs contact your sales representative or a field engineer Before making contact confirm the unit source part number event ID and description of the error as well as the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit 76 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FI
105. 1 Select the radio button of the partition for which to back up the configuration information Then click the Backup button The save destination dialog box of the browser appears 2 Select the save destination path Then click the OK button Download of the file begins The default BIOS Configuration file name for the backup is as follows Partition number save date BIOS version dat Restoring UEFI configuration information From the Restore BIOS Configuration window restore BIOS configuration information 154 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 7 Backup and Restore 7 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information FIGURE 7 2 Restore BIOS Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 co Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 3C12450016 Status d Warning Restore BIOS Configuration Select a BIOS Configuration file ERJ lt gt 1 Select the backup BIOS Configuration file stored on the remote PC Then click the Upload button File transfer to the MMB begins The following window appears when the file transfer is completed FIGURE 7 3 Restore BIOS Configuration window partition selection Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 co Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number JC12450016 Status Warning System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Backup Restore Configuration gt Restore BIOS Configuration Restore BIOS Configuration Se
106. 15 DU menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Replacement of HDD SSD in case hot replacement cannot be performed In below cases hot replacement of the failed HDD or SSD cannot be performed Case where multiple deadlock occurs Multiple deadlock occurs when more than one hard disk fail to be recognized at the same time The HDD or SSD is RAIDO configuration and it is not mirror configuration by PRIMECLUSTER GDS If a HDD or SSD fails in this case it is required to reconfigure the Hardware RAID after replacing HDD or SSD Recover from back up data because data in failed HDD or SSD is not guaranteed When replacing the HDD or SSD it is has to be done with the partition power off The workflow is described below Remarks Step2 is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 1 2 3 4 5 Turn off the power to the partition Replace the HDD or SSD Restart the partition and then start WebBIOS from the Boot Manager front page Create the array configuration with WebBIOS Restore the data for backup 119 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 1 Overview of Hot Maintenance 6 1 CHAPTER 6PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows This chapter describes the hot plugging procedure for PCI Express cards in Windows Hot plugging is supported only in Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 This procedure is for the PRIMEQUE
107. 1600000 Status System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Notice Maintenance screen can only be used by one user at time Select the type of maintenance activity to perform C Enter Maintenance Mode Sets only Maintenance mode when Maintenance excludes Replace are performed C Exit Maintenance Mode Cancels Maintenance mode when Maintenance excludes Replace are finished C Raid Drive Maintenance Mode Replace failure physical drives or recover degraded logical drives 3 Check PCI Box PCIC button and click Next button 129 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB50 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number JC12450010 Warning System Partition User Ad ration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Maintenance Wizard Unit Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on DUPCISIot 1OUPCIC C MP PCI Box IO FANTO PSU C PCI Box PEXU SB BATIERY CPU DIMM Mezz PCISlot FBU 4 Check the button of the target PCI Box number and click Next button For this example it is a procedure of hot addition of a PCI card at PCIC 1 mounted in PCI Box Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMBSI Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1
108. 174 stop the relevant partition following the 3 3 4 Replacement procedures in cold maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after replacement in cold maintenance Procedure before replacement Stop all the partitions Procedure after replacement Start the relevant partition 3 3 5 Replacing the battery backup unit of the uninterrupted power supply unit UPS This section describes the procedure for replacing the battery backup unit of the UPS The UPS battery is regularly replaced and the life cycle is monitored by the RAS support service RAS support service monitors the life cycle and notifies the message as shown below TABLE 3 11 Replacement notification messages RAS support service UPS Start time for notifying messages for advance Replacement message notification of replacement notification time About 1 year and 9 months from the start of use or After about 2 years replacement of the batter For details on the RAS support service see RAS Support Service User Guide 3 3 6 Replacing the PCI SSD card This section describes the procedure for replacing the PCI SSD card Note The PCI SSD card does not support hot replacement Stop the partition before replacing 49 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 3 Replacing components In a RAID configuration Linux software RAID 1 Place the faulty PCI Express card offline and remove the card Example
109. 1CPU 1SB 2CPU 1SB Partition Disable Bus 1SB 1CPU 1 TABLE N A TABLE G 9 N A G 7TABLE G 7 DIMM mounting order at 1CPU 1SB j 1SB 2CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 2SB 4CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 3SB 6CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 4SB 8CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 Segment 1SB 1CPU 1 TABLE G 7 N A TABLE G 9 N A 1SB 2CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 2SB 4CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 3SB 6CPU N A TABLE G 8 N A TABLE G 10 4SB 8CPU N A TABLE G 12 N A TABLE G 14 Enable Bus 1SB 1CPU 1 N A N A N A N A 1SB 2CPU N A N A N A N A 2SB 4CPU N A N A N A N A 3SB 6CPU N A N A N A N A 4SB 8CPU N A N A N A N A Segment 1SB 1CPU 1 TABLE G 11 N A TABLE G 13 N A 1SB 2CPU N A TABLE G 12 N A TABLE G 14 2SB 4CPU N A TABLE G 12 N A TABLE G 14 3SB 6CPU N A TABLE G 12 N A TABLE G 14 4SB 8CPU N A TABLE G 12 N A TABLE G 14 N A Not available 1 PRIMEQUEST 2800B is excluded 231 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM TABLE G 7 DIMM mounting order at 1CPU 1SB 1 CPU 0 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO OB3 0CO 0C3 ODO OD3 Slot OA1 OA4 OB1 0B4 OC1 OCA OD1 0D4 0A2 0A5 OB2 OBS 0C2 0C5 OD2 OD5 Normal 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 Perfor 5 5 7 7 6 6 8 8 mance 9 9 11 11 10 10 12 12 Fullor 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Partial 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 Mirror 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 Spare 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 1
110. 200 A 1 1 AHON snein aa aa e 200 A 1 2 Operation ERE 200 A 1 3 Monitoring and reporting functions esee esent AEAEE TAAA tn tnnt tarn tente then thee ATEA A enn 201 A 1 4 Maintenance a A 202 A 1 5 Redundancy functions ct te ta e Dn ia tne ede rte rcd e De D e a vinden ate ed 203 A 1 6 External linkage functions 208 A 1 7 Security TINCHONS ite diem ee iones 208 A2 Correspondence between Functions and Interfaces 204 A2 1 System information display sees 204 A2 2 System settings Ideni ideni edes 204 A23 System operation DN 204 A24 Hardware status display eereennnen 204 A25 Display of partition configuration information and partition status 205 A 2 6 Partition configuration and operation setting A 2 7 Partition operation sse mi es m 205 A 2 8 Partition power control 206 A 2 9 OS boot settings s s tes ee 206 A 2 10 MMB user account control jus zs PM 206 A 2 11 Server management network settings 206 A 2 12 Maintenance ee d su is 207 A3 Management Network Specifications eese ee isse isse sete eete nte tente te tette tente ten teen teen toten tt tente te nto
111. 2GB is created For 64 bit windows dump file of up to 8TB is created The size varies depending on the situation The system can store only one dump at a time The new file will overwrite an existing dump file at the specified storage location Minimum memory dump A minimum memory dump records the minimum required data to identify the problem It requires 128 or 256KB of free space With this option the dump function creates a new file each time the system stops unexpectedly Automatic memory dump This type of dump is available beginning with Windows Server 2012 Automatic memory dump is the default setting in Windows Server 2012 An automatic memory dump records the same information as a kernel memory dump It differs from a kernel memory dump as follows The default setting of the paging file size is a smaller value f all kernel space information could not be recorded the paging file size is automatically expanded at the next start time However if all kernel space information could not be recorded memory dump acquisition may fail TABLE 10 7 Memory dump types and sizes Memory dump type Memory dump file size Complete memory dump Physical memory size 300 MB 1 Overwrite 2 Kernel memory dump Depends on memory space during system Overwrite 2 operation 32bit windows max 2 GB 64bit windows max 8 TB 191 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Proc
112. 4 53 S26113 E531 V32 E531 EE A sni 086F0602 2014 01 17 11 33 36 2014 01 17 11 33 36 micor mue ess n m RUNE ina 2 01 17 2 J 2 2014 01 1 PSU PSU 086F0601 11 33 35 PSU Redundancy 090B03FF Non redundant Sufficient Resource Detail 2014 01 17 Clear All Events Download Filter Configuration error Detail 19 joi or 1E n DL IRL IL IRL IL EL EH IRE IRL IL IRL o o Configuration error Detail a xs 112941 ig 2 Confirm the displayed contents Click the Download button to download the event data stored in the SEL Alternatively click the Filter button to filter the events to display Click the Detail button of an event to display details of the event Click the Cancel button to clear settings and restore their previous values Note 186 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data Be sure to check with a field engineer before clearing events stored in the SEL Remarks fa problem occurs during operation e mail notification is sent For details on how to specify whether to use e mail notification and how to set the error level and e mail destination for e mail notification see 1 5 11 Alarm E Mail window in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Foran explanation of display items in the
113. 400000 Status Normal System Partition User Admin gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI_Box PCIC Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on Le PCLBossogCICs 1 OK o on PCI Box 1l PCIC 0 11 Not present PCI _Box 2 PCIC 0 11 Not present S PCI Box 3 PCIC 0 11 Not present 5 Check button of target PCIC number for adding and click Next button 130 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number Status Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Selection Select the unit to perform maintenance on LC eel XB fore B0B6 1529 o Sandy nor Standby Not present Not present C4 Standby Not present Not present e7 Standby Not present es Standby Not present n s Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status gt Maintenance 7 Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Maintenance System State Help Select the maintenance system mode Maintenance System Mode Hot System Maintenance arget unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partitions Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breakers on
114. 472 1 S qe ge Sx 1 cod 3 3 A 3 i oh d i hd 909 6969 CX 99 C4 C9 C99 CX C0 C9 C2 3 If you connect to other partition perform step 1 and step 2 again after closing current console redirection To close the console redirection perform either of below operation Press ESC key and then press key Press key and then press key Forced disconnection of console redirection Note Only one user at a time is permitted to use the console redirection function 1 Ifa user attempts to connect using the function while another user is using it the message Console Redirection already in use appears The window appears as follows 21 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use FIGURE 1 19 Forced disconnection of console redirection 1 Tera Term VT File Edit Setup Control Window Help Administrator gt Administrator gt console 2 Are you sure to connect to BMC Y N v onsole redirection already in use If needed the current user can be disconnected Do you really want to force disconnect current user Y N vl 2 lf you disconnect the console redirection of other user who has been already used enter yes You can use console redirection in place of current user The terminal software of the disconnected user displays the following window FIGURE 1 20 Forced disconnection of console redirec
115. 7 Execute dh command and check the controller number of LSI MegaRaid SAS Control Shell dh d 126 In below example the controller number is 125 244 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card FIGURE J 6 dh command of UEFI Shell 1 1 6200e Matrox Graphics UEFI Driver FuFile 961578FE B6 1 Intel R PRO 1600 5 5 19 PCI E FuF i le EDB39419 A4 gt Intel R 10GbE Driver 3 6 16 x64 FuF i le EDB39419 A4 Network Device Shadow Driver LegacyNetworkShadowD xe 126 06000300 B X X 2 LSI EFI SAS Driver Offset 141 06000300 B X X 2 EFI SAS Driver Uffse Shell gt dh d 126 126 Image Offset OxDAOO Ox149FF ImageDevPath 0x0 Offset 0xDAOO 0 DriverBinding Diagnostics Diagnostics2 ComponentMame ComponentName2 Conf igurati on Configuration2 Driver Nane LSI EFI SAS Driver Image Name Offset OxDAGO 0x149FF Driver Version 06000300 Driver Type BUS Configuration YES Diagnostics YES Managing Ctrl 125 LSI MegaRAID SAS 9286CU 8e Child 220 Logical Channel Child 221 Physical Channel Shell _ 8 Execute the drvcfg s XX YY command Specify the following for XX and YY XX UEFI driver number confirmed in step 2 YY Controller number confirmed in step 3 Shell gt drvcfg s 126 125 9 The window where you select either EFI WebBIOS menu or EFI CLI menu appears Select
116. 75 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 2 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN 1 2 1 2 1 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server must be connected to the following three types of external networks The respective external networks are dedicated to security and load distribution See FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN Note Be sure to connect management LAN production LAN and maintenance LAN to different subnet each other This section describes the IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses used in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server Each of the SB IOU and MMB units in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server has network interfaces Each port of these network interfaces must be assigned an IP address To the ports assign IP addresses appropriate to the external network environment of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server The following describes the IP addresses assigned to the ports TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB lists the IP addresses that are set from the MMB TABLE 1 3 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server set from the operating system in a partition lists the IP addresses that are set from the operating system The IP
117. 76 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 X Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 X Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapta X Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Uptake Driver sorters Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapte PSable X TEAM Team 0 Uninstall TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Scan for hardware changes I Other devices Se eee H Storage controllers E System devices m System management devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Opens property sheet for the current selection 11 On the Teaming tab check Team this adapter with other adapters select the team into which the adapter was incorporated before the replacement and click the OK button Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 10 Properties EJ E3 General Link Speed Advanced Power Management Teaming VLANs Boot Options Driver Details Resources inte Adapter Teaming v Team this adapter with other adapters New Team Team Select a team Properties Select a team Team 0 Team with other adapters Allows you to specify whether a network connection will participate in a team For an overview of teaming click here If not checked this adapter is not part of a team TN 12 In the Device Manager confirm that the NIC is incorporated into
118. 77 2532 015C 1077 Dual Channel 8Gbps Fibre Channel Card 1077 2532 015D 1077 Single Channel 16Gbps Fibre Channel Card 10DF E200 E207 10DF Dual Channel 16Gbps Fibre Channel Card 10DF E200 E208 10DF Dual Channel 1000BASE T Card 8086 1521 11CF 8086 Quad Channel 1000BASE T Card 8086 1521 11D1 8086 Dual Channel 1000BASE T Card 8086 1521 00A2 8086 Quad Channel 1000BASE T Card 8086 1521 00A1 8086 Dual Channel 10G BASE T Card 8086 1528 z Dual Channel 10G BASE Card 8086 10FB Dual Channel FCoE card 10Gbps 19A2 0704 FCoE 0700 Ethernet a y S Conole RR Single channel 40Gbps Infiniband HCA card 15B3 1003 11EE 15B3 Dual channel 40Gbps Infiniband HCA card 15B3 1003 11EF 15B3 Single channel 56Gbps Infiniband HCA card 15B3 1003 0022 15B3 Dual channel 56Gbps Infiniband HCA card 15B3 1003 0020 15B3 261 C122 E175 01EN co FUJITSU
119. 8 Firmware version number 3 kar phil od FIshROM size 4 M8 of RAID controller 695555 RAM size 32 KB 2 SAS Port 9 Firmmare package version 1101 0008 SAS Port 4 Timers Verse Wee ey B SAS Port Firmware build time Feb 6 2009 140052 SAS Port BIOS version 20600 E SAS Port Driver name mias2k3 If multiple MegaRAID SAS RAID controller is mounted click Controller Selection in HOME window Go back to step 3 and check firmware version of remaining MegaRAID SAS RAID controller by taking same steps J 2 How to confirm firmware version of SAS card Below steps show how to confirm firmware version of dual channel SAS card PCI Express card 1 Select Device Manager in menu and press Enter key 247 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 2 How to confirm firmware version of SAS card FIGURE J 13 Menu window 2 Select LSI SAS2 MPT Controller SAS2008 from Device List in Device Manager window FIGURE J 14 Device List in Device Manager window Device Matiayer Note If LSI SAS2 MPT Controller SAS2008 is not shown firmware version is below value Firmware version 05 00 13 00 EFl driver version 04 30 03 00 3 Check version of EFI driver in LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration window 248 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 2 How to confirm firmware version of SAS card FIGURE J 15 EFI driv
120. 8304 98559 114688 114943 total 67108864 kiB Dec 17 00 15 47 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 809 Added SB3 If INFO 809 Added SBX is not output process of activating added resources is delayed Check that the process of adding CPU or memory is performed by executing below command at several seconds Checking the number of CPU grep c processor proc cpuinfo 30 Checking the size of memory cat proc meminfo grep MemTotal 62 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 2 Hot add of SB MemTotal 65271964 kB In case that the number of CPU or the size of memory keeps increasing It is expected that cause of the delay is the load of the partition The process of SB hot add can be completed sooner by reducing the load of the partition In case that the number of CPU or the size of memory does not increase though they does not reach expected quantity 3 Checking post process of collaboration program Process of below messages in var log messages is post process of the collaboration program Dec 17 00 15 47 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 807 Execute 1 user programs at ADD POST timing Dec 17 00 15 48 SB hotplug dp util 4457 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart INFO start Dec 17 00 15 49 SB hotplug dp util 4457 10 FJSVdp util kdump restart INFO result 0 Dec 17 00 15 49 xxx dp util 4457 INFO 808 Executed
121. AID configuration For replacement of a HDD or SSD included in a DU Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 15 DU menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN If set a spare disk A rebuild has been already automatically performed to the HDD or SSD set as a spare disk The replaced HDD or SSD automatically becomes a spare disk The Alarm LED of the HDD or SSD goes out Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Hot spare by MMB Web UI How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a SB Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Hot Spare by System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a DU Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Hot Spare by System DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 15 DU menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN 5 2 Preventive replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware RAID configuration This section describes how to perform the preventive replacement of Hard Dis
122. AN IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Management LAN Port Configuration Management LAN port settings Specifies the NIC on the MMB of the Internal PCH to MMB LAN The default is Enable and the specified IP Address value The MMB blocks communication between partitions Speed Duplex for MMB 0 Specifies a Speed Duplex value for the MMB 0 MMB 1 LAN ports Port MMB 1 1 USER Port Maintenance Port Setting value Auto default 1G Full 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full 10M Half The MMB USER port is duplicated The speed of 1 Gbps can be specified only for the USER ports The possible 7 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 3 Management LAN Display Setting item Description settings for the respective ports depend on the MMB hardware configuration Network Protocols Network protocol settings HTTP HTTPS telnet SSH Specifies whether to enable or disable a protocol the port number and the SNMP Timeout time SNMP Configuration SNMP related settings SNMP Community Specifies SNMP System Information and Community User values System Information Specifies System Location and System Contact values for SNMP It also displays the system name specified from System System Information Community Can specify up to 16 Community User items Each Community User item includes the access permitted IP address SNMP version access permission
123. AUTION ATTENTION iv C122 E175 01EN Preface Waming label location the main cabinet left Sm tt A CAUTION ATTENTION A CAUTION ATTENTION jy n3 CAUTION ATTENTION AS GREER SD SRTSanNYSoss SHHTEMT ORK BBY aP Veneers RIMUSRMESATSCS acie r o5unmuii c mnguc HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES SERVICE ENGINEER ONLY TOUCH THE INSIDE INSTALLING THIS UNIT LI GLLLUSLAMLELTJ LOG Lis ls er 2E FAM S IE Los d RH RH SARAH EMA BARNSE2H MAMARE TENSIONS DANGEREUSES VOIR LE MANUEL D INSTRUCTIONS AVANT CIRCUITS SENSIBLES A L ELECTRICITE STATIQUE SEUL UN INGENIEUR PEUT VERIFIER L INTERIEUR D INSTALLER CET UNITE Warning label location PCI Box Es CAUTION su wa CAUTION HBtHQ o BI v 37VERCCEAO LE es 42 2i rd MES RR SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE INSTALLING THIS UNIT v C122 E175 01EN Preface Notes on Handling the Product About this product This product is designed and manufactured for standard applications Such applications include but are not limited to general office work personal and home use and general industrial use The product is not intended for applications that require extremely high levels of safety to be guaranteed referred to below as safety critical applications Use of the product for a safety critical application may present a significant risk of personal injury and or death Such applications include
124. B 2 Port Numbers FIGURE B 4 Physical mounting locations in the PCI Box PCiCso Peca PCH Peca PCK PCICas LIPCicer PCC PCC o PCiC amp n LNKCe I0 PSUso I0 _PSU No Explanation 1 Upper side 2 Front 3 Right side 4 Rear B 2 Port Numbers This section shows the numbering policy of each MMB and IOU port Remarks The character strings used in numbering are the port numbers as viewed from firmware These port numbers differ from the character strings in the port identification printed stamped or otherwise marked on units FIGURE B 5 MMB port numbers shows MMB port numbering FIGURE B 7 IOU_1GbE port numbers and FIGURE B 8 IOU 10GbE port numbers shows MMB port numbering FIGURE B 5 MMB port numbers USER porti REMOTE LOCAL USER port 0 COM roy A ACT D CY d TT ome He e EG Bm g 211 C122 E175 01EN Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers B 2 Port Numbers FIGURE B 6 IOU 1GbE port numbers USER port 1 PCI 3 PCl 2 PCI PCI 0 ESL ECL ih ABER USER port 0 FIGURE B 7 IOU 10GDbE port numbers PCI 2 PCI 1 PCI 0 USER port 1 USER port 0 212 C122 E175 01EN Appendix C Lists of External Interfaces Physical List of External MMB Interfaces C 2 C 1 C 2 Appendix C Lists of External Interfaces Physical This appendix describes the external inte
125. B 64 GB 8 GB Supported Supported Not supported Not supported 16 GB Supported Supported Not supported Not supported 32 GB Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported 64 GB Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported TABLE G 5 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a cabinet DIMM size 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 8 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported 16 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported 32 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported 64 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported 230 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM DIMM mounting order and DIMM mixed mounting condition The order of DIMM installation and the condition of DIMM mixed installation are shown below In tables of DIMM mounting order DIMMs are installed in order from one with small number In tables of DIMM mixed mounting condition the same symbol indicates the same DIMM DIMM mounting order and DIMM mixed mounting condition are decided depending on CPU number per the partition whether PCI address mode is Segment or Bus and whether DR is enabled or disabled Below table shows which tables you should see in each case TABLE G 6 DIMM mounting order and DIMM mixed mounting condition in each configuration DR PCI address SB Number DIMM mounting order DIMM mixed mounting mode CPU number condition per 1CPUASB 2CPU 1SB
126. C Such information includes the interface name hardware address and bus address Use the bus address confirmed in step 1 and the same procedure as in step 2 TABLE 4 8 Example of interface information about the replacement NIC Interface name Hardware address Bus address Slot number eth1 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 0000 0b 01 0 20 ethO 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 0000 0b 01 1 20 94 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards 13 14 Confirm that a new hardware address is defined for the bus address Also confirm that the assigned interface name is the same as that before the NIC replacement Also confirm that the relevant entries in the above described table were automatically added to the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Note The correspondence between the bus address and interface name may be different from that before NIC replacement In such cases just proceed with the work This is explained in step 13 Deactivate each newly created interface The interfaces created for the replacement NIC may be active because power is on to the PCI Express slot In such cases you need to deactivate them before changing the interface configuration file Execute the following command for all the interface names confirmed in step 11 Example ethO sbin ifconfig eth0 down Confirm the correspondence betwe
127. C card made by Emulex Displaying Device Manager 1 Select Force boot into EFI Boot Manager by Boot Selection in Power Control window of MMB Web UI Partition is powered on and logo of FUJITSU appears 254 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 27 Boot Manager front page 1 2 Select Device Manager and press Enter key FIGURE J 28 Boot Manager front page 2 3 Device Manager window appears Stating HBA setup utility 1 Select Emulex Configuration Utility Ver x xxxx in Device Manager window and press Enter key 255 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 29 Device Manager window Device Manager Configuration lt HELP 2 Emulex Configuration Utility window appears Select Emulex Configuration Setup Utility and press Enter key FIGURE J 30 Emulex configuration Utility window Enulex Configuration Utility Uer 4 13a5 oni iquration 3 Alist of HBA appears Selecting HBA 1 Select HBA in Adapter Selection window and press Enter key 256 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 31 Adapter Selection window HBA
128. CIC 10 75 75 N A PCIC 11 76 76 N A PCI Box PCIC O 81 81 N A 3 PCIC 1 82 82 N A PCIC 2 83 83 N A PCIC 3 84 84 N A PCIC 4 85 85 N A PCIC 5 86 86 N A PCIC 6 87 87 N A PCIC 7 88 88 N A PCIC 8 89 89 N A PCIC 9 90 90 N A PCIC 10 91 91 N A PCIC I1 92 92 N A PCl_BOX 2 PCIC O 97 97 N A 3 PCIC 1 98 98 N A PCIC 2 99 99 N A PCIC 3 100 100 N A PCIC 4 101 101 N A PCIC 5 102 102 N A PCIC 6 103 103 N A PCIC 7 104 104 N A PCIC 8 105 105 N A 215 C122 E175 01EN Appendix D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers D 2 Mounting location Slot number decimal number Board Slot PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E 2800B PCIC 9 106 106 N A PCIC 10 107 107 N A PCIC 11 108 108 N A PCI Boxt3 PCIC 0 113 113 N A 3 PCIC 1 114 114 N A PCIC 2 115 115 N A PCIC 3 116 116 N A PCIC 4 117 117 N A PCIC 5 118 118 N A PCIC 6 119 119 N A PCIC 7 120 120 N A PCIC 8 121 121 N A PCIC 9 122 122 N A PCIC 10 123 123 N A PCIC 11 124 124 N A N A Not applicable 1 If DR is Disabled the slot number is not allocated 2 OU_10GbE does not have PCI Slot 3 3 PCI Box can be available for only PRIMEQUES 2400E and 2800E 216 C122 E175 01EN Appendix E PRIME
129. Corrective action Enable the LAN port Cause 2 The MMB console PC is not correctly connected to the MMB USER port Corrective action Connect them correctly Cause 3 The browser version is not supported Corrective action The MMB supports the following browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer version 8 or later Mozilla FireFox version 20 or later Cause 4 JavaScript is not enabled in the browser Corrective action The MMB Web UI uses JavaScript Enable JavaScript in the browser 184 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 3 Notes on Troubleshooting 10 2 9 Problems with partition operations 10 3 10 4 10 4 1 Status in the information area of the MMB Web UI changes to Error when Power Off Reset or Force Power Off is executed on the partition or when the partition is shut down from the operating system Also the MMB Web UI displays Read Error in Part Number and Serial Number of each component Cause Hardware may have failed Corrective action Contact your sales representative or a field engineer Do not execute Reset or Force Power Off on the partition until the problem is solved Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit During the partition power on sequence from the beginning of power on until execution of the reset process if another partition is powered on
130. Counter of added SB by SB hot add does not synchronize with the running system The settings of the Reserved SB are deleted after the Reserved SB is incorporated into the partition by hot add n case of hot remove of the Reserved SB that belongs to a partition the Reserved SB setting is not canceled DR operation SB hot add SB hot remove IOU hot add IOU hot remove hot add of PCI Express card or hot remove of PCI Express card can t be performed in parallel at the same time in the chassis SB hot add or SB hot remove operation cannot be specified at the same time for multiple SBs DR operation cannot be performed on the EFI Shell The DR operation takes several minutes and the execution cannot be canceled When DR is enabled a HDD SSD on the non Home SB cannot be used n case of hot addition of SB with the memory mirror mechanism enabled the DR operation may fail if the SB to be added does not meet the mirror mode setting conditions of the target partition The sadump function does not work during the SB hot plug operation Do not perform DR operation to a component mounting dump device or a component which is connected to dump device f hot remove of SB is implemented when allocating a process to a specific CPU using CPU binding the relevant process will be moved to another CPU which is not intended For IOU hot remove the kdump or sadump will not function if an IOU having a kdump disk or a sadump
131. DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 15 DU menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Too Reference C122 E177EN For non mirror configuration replacement with the partition power off If HDDs or SSDs are not mirror configuration preventive replacement of a HDD or SSD has to be performed with the partition power off Remarks 117 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 5 Replacement of HDD SSD 5 2 Preventive replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware RAID configuration If HDD or SSD other than target HDD or SSD for preventive replacement fails in step3 field engineers in charge of your system replace the failed HDD or SSD Step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 1 Back up data in all HDDs or SSDs connected to the RAID controller card to which the target HDD or SSD for preventive replacement is connected 2 Confirm the HDD or SSD which S M A R T has predicted to fail by MMB Web UI checking mounting location How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU When S M A R T predicted to fail a HDD or SSD included in a SB A HDD or SSD which S M A R T has predicted to fail is a HDD or SSD with its status SMART error in System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Too Reference C122 E177EN When S M A R T predicted to fail a HDD or SSD included i
132. Displays the ID 8 digit hexadecimal value that identifies the event details For details on Event ID assignment see Chapter 2 MMB Messages in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN Description Displays the details of the event or error If the sensor recorded data other than Trig Offset in Event Data this item also displays that Event Data For example the R and T values recorded by the sensor are displayed as the Reading Value and Threshold Value at the event occurrence time However for an event related to the mounting or removal of a board this item displays the part number and serial number of the board Parti Displays the Part value stored in the SEL If no Part value is stored this item displays Serial Displays the serial number of the component where the event occurred Event Data Displays Event Data values in hexadecimal 10 4 2 Collecting data for investigation Windows If a problem occurs in Windows data on the situation is required for ensuring a prompt and correct investigation This section describes frequently required investigation data and how to acquire the data Software Support Guide and DSNAP SSG and DSNAP are support tools for collecting the data necessary for investigation of software problems If a problem occurs in your system SSG and DSNAP enable your Fujitsu certified service engineer to correctly determine the system software configuration This le
133. Drives SSD Hot replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware RAID configuration This section describes how to replace Hard Disk Drives HDD or Solid State Drives SSD with Hardware RAID configuration Hot replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAIDO configuration This section describes the workflow of hot replacement of HDD or SSD with RAIDO configuration when one HDD or SSD fails Remarks Hot replacement of HDD or SSD can be performed only when HDDs or SSDs are mirror configuration by using software such as PRIMECLUSTER GDS Step1 and Step2 are performed by field engineers in charge of your system 1 Replace HDD or SSD with the Alarm LED on by using MMB Maintenance Wizard 2 Create a logical drive with RAIDO configuration by using MMB Maintenance Wizard 3 Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by MMB Web UI How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a SB Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a DU Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For
134. E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration This section describes the workflow of preventive replacement of HDD or SSD with RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration Remarks From step1 to step6 are performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 1 Make data consistent by MMB Maintenance Wizard to make the HDD or SSD no error Turn on Alarm LED of the HDD or SSD which S M A R T predicted to fail by MMB Maintenance Wizard Confirm the location of the HDD or SSD tuning off the Alarm LED by MMB Maintenance Wizard Make the target HDD or SSD offline by MMB Maintenance Wizard Confirm that Status of the target HDD or SSD is Failed Offline or Available Replace the HDD or SSD of which you confirmed in step2 that Alarm LED turns on o o FF wo DN 118 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 5 Replacement of HDD SSD 5 3 Replacement of HDD SSD in case hot replacement cannot be performed 5 3 7 Confirm whether a rebuild of the HDD or SSD has been already completed by using the below steps depending on whether a spare disk is set or not If not set a spare disk A rebuild is automatically performed to replaced HDD or SSD Then the Alarm LED of the HDD or SSD starts blinking Confirm whether a rebuild of replaced HDD or SSD has been already completed by MMB Web UI How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a SB Confi
135. E 1 23 Image file selection windOw sss ttnte tnnt ttnte tente ttn te tnter tn tette ttn tette tne ttnas 25 FIGURE 1 24 Virtual Media window 2 ciet deka dead tere reden tette ere i He fe d de tee es 26 FIGURE 3 1 Conceptual diagram of the partitioning function PRIMEQUEST 2400E eene 29 FIGURE 3 2 Conceptual diagram of the partitioning function PRIMEQUEST 2800E esent 30 FIGURE 3 3 SB holadd 52 rtr n baila adnan deni ure ede e ain bien eve e if e e a o pu qut 32 FIGURE 3 4 SB Hot remove Disconnecting a faulty SB essent tente tnnt tnter tnter tnte nenas 32 FIGURE 3 5 e UlsIe i e CC 33 FIGURE 3 6 IOU hot remove removal of failed IOU sees tnter tnter tette te ttn te tente tente tnte nenas 33 FIGURE 3 7 Example 1 a Example where two SBs are set as Reserved SBs in two partitions when SB 0 and SB 1 have simultaneously falld Dx 38 FIGURE 3 8 Example 1 b Example when one SB is set as the Reserved SB in two partitions SB 0 and SB 2 have simultaneously falled 2 ttt tte evt tret n s EC ee DR EE iR DE Te eL ed MEAE DRE eere ede 39 FIGURE 3 9 Example 3 Example when multiple free SB 2 3 is set as Reserved SBs in Partition 80 39 FIGURE 3 10 Example 4 where Reserved SBs 1 2 3 of Partition 0 belong to other part
136. E175 01EN Appendix D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers D 2 D 1 Appendix D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in I O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers This appendix shows the correspondence between the physical locations and BUS numbers of built in I O in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server It also shows the correspondence between PCI slot mounting locations and slot numbers Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Internal I O Controllers of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series The following table shows physical location and BUS numbers of SB internal I O controllers TABLE D 1 physical locations of SB internal I O controllers and BUS numbers Internal I O BUS DEV FUNC Remarks Home SB USB EHCI controller 00 1A 0 USB Port 0 USB Port 1 00 1D 0 USB Port 2 USB Port 3 Video redirection Virtual media D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers The following table shows the correspondence between PCI slot mounting locations and slot numbers TABLE D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Mounting location Slot number decimal number Board Slot PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST 2400E 2800E SB 0 Port to 4097 4097 4097 IOU O
137. EST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Maintenance method Maintenance is performed with the Maintenance Wizard on the MMB Web UI from a terminal such as a PC connected to the MMB in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server The MMB provides a dedicated Maintenance LAN port for field engineers To perform maintenance using the Maintenance Wizard a field engineer connects an FST PC used by the field engineer to the Maintenance LAN port of the MMB of the maintenance target system Note Field engineers perform the maintenance on the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server Below settings are required for maintenance by the field engineers Video redirection and virtual media are available For details on this setting see 1 3 6 Console Redirection Setup window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Telnet or SSH is available For details on this setting see 1 5 4 Network Protocols window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Maintenance modes The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series has several maintenance modes Only field engineers are allowed to execute operations related to power control such as power off and power on in maintenance mode which can prevent error during this operations The maintenance modes provide the following advantages They prevent someone other than the field engineer from executing operations related to power control so that the system does not change to unexpected st
138. GURE 10 3 Label location P A pL ee NI jo t No Description 1 Model name 2 Serial number 10 2 2 Items to confirm before contacting a sales representative Before contacting your sales representative confirm the following details Print the sheet in Appendix L Failure Report Sheet and enter the necessary information tems to confirm Model name and type of the main unit You can confirm the model name and type with the MMB Web UI You can also confirm them from the label affixed to the main unit Hardware configuration types and locations of the supplied built in options Configuration information BIOS setup utility settings OS used LAN WAN system configuration Symptoms e g what happened at the time message displayed Sample messages System event log See FIGURE 10 8 System event log display Occurrence date and time Server installation environment Status of various lamps 10 2 3 Sales representative contact Contact your sales representative in the following cases For a repair not under any support service contract 177 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting Forarepair under warranty during the warranty period Forarepair not under any support service contract after expiration of the warranty period Our authorized service engineer will repair the product on site The servi
139. How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card J 3 1 How to confirm firmware version for FC card made by Qlogic Confirming UEFI driver version and firmware version 1 Select Force boot into EFI Boot Manager by Boot Selection in Power Control window of MMB Web UI Partition is powered on and logo of FUJITSU appears Note For a FC card made by Qlogic you can confirm the firmware version only when a partition starts up FIGURE J 19 FUJITSU logo window FUJITSU Start boot option PETTITT 2 UEFI driver version and firmware version is shown FIGURE J 20 Confirmation of UEFI driver version and firmware version QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter driver 2 24 firmuare 5 07 000 QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter driver 2 24 firmware 5 07 000 ts oo Note Window goes next automatically 3 Boot Manager front page appears 251 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 21 Boot Manager front page 1 This selection uil direct 1 Confirming UEFI driver version 1 Select Boot Manager and press Enter key FIGURE J 22 Boot Manager front page 2 2 Boot Manager window appears Select EFI Internal Shell and press Enter key 252 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC c
140. I slot number sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt address Notes If the above file path is not output it indicates that the NIC is not mounted in a PCI slot e g GbE port in the IOU With the PCI slot number confirmed here see D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers to check the mounting location and see also B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to identify the physical mounting location corresponding to the PCI slot number You can confirm that it matches the mounting location of the operational target NIC Confirm each interface on the same NIC If the NIC has multiple interfaces you need to remove all of them Confirm that all the interfaces that have the same bus address in a subsequent command ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net X eth0 device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 09 26 sys class net eth1 device gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 1 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed As the above example shows when more than one interface is displayed they are on the same NIC 111 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards 3 Execute the higher level application processing required before NIC removal Stop all
141. IC on the IOU including onboard NIC The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration For bonding multiple NIC by using PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services GLS see PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Service Configuration and Administration Guide Redundant Line Control Function J2UZ 7781 Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface Notes To perform hot replacement in a system where a bonding device is installed design the system so that it specifies ONBOOT YES in all interface configuration files the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth files and the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg bond files regardless of whether the NIC to be replaced is a configuration interface of the bonding device An IP address does not need to be assigned to unused interfaces This procedure is for preventing the device name of the replacement target NIC from being changed after hot replacement If ONBOOT NO also exists the procedure described here may not work properly Confirm where the NIC is mounted Confirm the correspondence between PCI Address and interface name of NIC mounted in the IOU which is confirmed by above dp show IOU command Example When PCI Address is 0000 89 00 0 ls l sys class net device grep 0000 89 00 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1
142. IOU_1GbE IOU_10GbE Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable 2 PCI Express card Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable DU Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable PCI Express card Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable FBU z HDD SSD Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable MMB 3 Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable OPL 51 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 4 Expansion of components Component name AC power off AC power on AC power on AC power on Device stop All partitions off Target partition Target partition hot off hot on hot maintenance maintenance maintenance MP PDB PCI Box 3 Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable IO PSU Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable IO FAN PEXU PCI Express Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable 1 card Outside the expansion target 1 PCI hot plug function is required 2 DR function is required 8 For only PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E Perform the license authentication following the Windows window instructions Windows license authentication When starting Windows click the balloon for license authentication that is displayed in the task tray Click Product Key Input and enter the product key found on the COA label belonging to the enable kit License authentication can be performed via the Internet
143. LI operating Supported log display System information display Supported P N S N Firmware version display Supported Supported A 2 2 System settings TABLE A 9 System settings Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI Primary and secondary power feed Supported Supported Power on setting at power recovery Supported Supported Start delay time at power recovery Supported Supported Installation altitude Supported Supported PSU redundancy setting Supported Supported It sets it to Reserved SB at the maximum Supported waiting time until Force Power Off of Partition including correspondence SB at the switch is begun Effective and invalid setting of Power Supported Saving function as the entire System Power consumption threshold Limit value Supported setting of the entire System A 2 3 System operation TABLE A 10 System operation Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI System power control On Off Force P off Supported Supported A 2 4 Hardware status display TABLE A 11 Hardware status display Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI LED status display Supported LED operation on clear blinking Supported 204 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 2 7 Partition operation Mezzanine RAID slot HDD SDD Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI PSU power supply unit power on count Supported and status display System power consumption display Supported FAN status monitoring a
144. MB configuration information For details on the backup and restore windows see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Backing up and restoring UEFI configuration information Users can perform the following processes with the backup and restore functions for UEFI configuration information Backing up all items that are set in the UEFI window Backing up the specified UEFI configuration information in a UEFI window for one partition from the MMB This backup information can be applied to other partitions Restoring backed up UEFI configuration information during replacement of a faulty SB Restoring and copying the configuration information saved on a certain partition to another partition A remote terminal can store the saved information The data saved to the remote terminal can be restored In the Backup BIOS Configuration window of the MMB Web UI back up UEFI configuration information to the PC running your browser The procedure is as follows 153 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 7 Backup and Restore 7 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information FIGURE 7 1 Backup BIOS Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 eo Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number JC12450016 Status AWarning o 1 cannotboot 5 o 2 cannotboot O 3 lm lt gt Backing up UEFI configuration information
145. MB Web UI using Administrator privileges 3 Execute hotremove command Example When removing IOUS from partition1 4 hotremove partition 1 IOU 3 quiet 4 5 3 Operation after IOU hot remove This section describes the process and operation after IOU hot remove IOU removed from the partition has become free state where it does not belong to any partition You can perform below operations Pull up the IOU from the cabinet physically Integrate the IOU into other inactive partition Hot add the IOU into other active partition Perform the necessary post processing such as re starting an application for the operations performed for the higher level applications in 4 5 1 Preparation for IOU hot remove NIC on the IOU including onboard NIC 1 Restart the application which is stop at preparing for IOU hot replacement FC Card 1 Restart the application which is stop at preparing for IOU hot replacement 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards This section describes the following methods of PCI Express card replacement with the PCI Hot Plug PHP function Common replacement operations for all PCI Express cards such as power supply operations Specific operations added to procedures to use a specified card function or a driver for installation 80 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards 4 6 1 4 6 2 There are two ways
146. P in place of the faulty SB a restarted and it starts operating Partition Q is not affected Partition R stops and SB c is removed from the configuration SB c which was set as a Reserved SB in 1 is cleared of this status The resulting status shown in Partition setting after switching and Reserved SB setting after switching After the SB switches to the Reserved SB MMB changes its settings as shown in the table below TABLE 3 17 Partition setting after switching Partition SB a b C Partition P O Partition Q O Partition R O Shows the partition setting status TABLE 3 18 Reserved SB setting after switching Partition SB b C Partition P Partition Q Partition R O Indicates the setting status of the Reserved SB However all are blank When there was a switch to the Reserved SB as mentioned above MMB displays the following SELs SEL 1 SB a was replaced with Reserved SB c in Partition P SEL 2 Reserved SB 4c was removed from Partition Q SEL 3 Reserved SB c was removed from Partition R SEL 1 indicates that SB a of Partition P has been switched to Reserved SB c 3 6 The messages of SEL 2 and SEL 3 indicate that the Reserved SB setting for SB c has been canceled or SB c has been removed from the operating partition when there was a switch to the Reserved SB c The status is determined from the partition operation be
147. PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number Status Maintenance Wizard Maintenance System State Select the maintenance system mode x gt E X3 Maintenance System Mode Hot System Maintenance arget unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partitions Cold System Maintenance All partinons powered off breakers on Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breakers off Previous 7 Maintenance mode is set with information area of MMB Web UI gray out and then replacement instruction for the particular PCIC appears Replace it with this window displayed See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to confirm the location of the PCI Express card to be replaced Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 0 _ Part Number MCXXXXXXX M FUJITSU Serial Number Under Maintenance Status Partition 0 gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first IF you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window
148. PGI Box LED eie ete pop tiii etate pin tip ip atit bu ease ieteasit us 222 xxi C122 E175 01EN Preface TABLE F 21 PCI Box status and PCI Box LED display sssssssseeeeeeenete retener te tenerent ttn tette tentent 222 TABLE F 22 PCI Express card status and LED display esses entente tenente tette tentent tette tentent 222 TABLE F 23 IO PSU LED iie eR EU LUE i AM Ni 223 TABLE F 24 IO PSU status and LED display Siinses iieiea Dern icon EEVEE kee KEVSER a KaT 223 TABLE F 25 JO FAN ID em 223 TABLE F 26 10 FAN Stats and LED Gispla ys sccccssccteccssschssesecseeyesscctspiascdegsnsncicses ancucyebarazeyehscahepehascdajshiacsapesnchcyabarancyessedsopehaattezdp 223 TABLE F 27 EED liSECT 9 miin ct Rt HR RENDER ERU es 225 TABEEF 28 EED list 2 9 5 io ee PE EE AC E IRE o e 226 TABLE F 29 LED list 3 9 sae tr re eer eee i en iaa cri e e e aa e bean iia edi eh De e 227 TABLE F 30 Usable PCI Box number and models sss sene neentn tenente tenent tenete tette nene terere 228 TABLE G 1 Numbers of SBs and CPUS per partition sssssssseseeeeeetenne tette tentent tentent tenente tenentes 229 TABEE G2 DIMM increment iit 75 rero rrr PE aa a AE caeanaysseansanapeasanpisiaeatiasssaseasarasanssaansapapiaeamrasuneanancs 229 TABLE G 3 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within an SB eene 230 TABLE G
149. PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 84 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 02 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 08 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 09 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 10 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 11 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 89 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 89 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 8c 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 8c 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection 0000 8 00 0 Fibre LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 0000 8 00 1 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 NIC on the IOU including onboard NIC For replacing IOU itself replacement of onboard NIC or expanding replacing or removing NIC on the IOU not only common procedure of IOU replacement but also special procedure before and after powering on or powering off IOU is needed Here describes case of replacement of IOU itself otherwise add note The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also descri
150. Partition essent tette tette tenentes 236 TABLE G 14 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 2CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition ak Ni 296 TABLE G 15 Available internal I O ports and the quantities TABLE H 1 MIB file contents ssss TABLE M 1 Information of PCI Express card xxii C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 1 External Network Configuration CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation This chapter describes the external network environment and management tool installation for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series For an overview of the management tools used for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series see Chapter 8 Operations Management Tools in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series General Description C122 B022EN 1 1 External Network Configuration The following diagram shows the external network configuration for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration m E um CAN CAM Osbosrd LAN LAN A Management LAN card card GbE card card lt B Maintenance LAN IOU IOU C Operation LAN 1 Onboard 2 E Partition 3 m 3 MMB 0 Active MMB 1 Standby USER USER REMCS CE port port port port USER USER REMCS CE port port port port P FST Operations management server
151. Powering on a partition by scheduled operation 163 8 3 2 Power off a Partition by scheduled operation s 164 8 3 3 Relation of scheduled operation and power restoration function oes we 164 8 3 4 Scheduled operation support conditions seve wie w 164 8 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions ES 25 165 8 4 1 Setting automatic partition restart conditions 165 8 5 Power Restoration sss m zs ET 167 8 5 1 Settings for Power Restoration a ae E 167 8 6 Remote shutdown Windows x EC Ws 167 8 6 1 Prerequisites for remote shutdown se iu is 167 8 6 2 How to use remote shutdown se esessesesesesesseseeteeseeseseatenseeseseateneeeaeseateneeaesearenseeeseaneneeees wie 168 CHAPTER9 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 9 1 MMB Web UI 9 2 MMB CLI ies m ie ies es 93 WEE RR te ENESE A 9 4 ServerView Suite CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures e 172 10 1 Mise 172 10 1 1 Maintenance using the MMB niri tib EHE E PSEUD Cete Me Pied dcede 172 10 1 2 Maintenarice method 2 Pe ac eae ee a e eh ER Ee RES EA iawn aie 172 10 1 3 Maintenance modes anisini ea tec
152. Preface 10 2 9 Problems with partition operations sseeeeeeeeen eene nnne 185 10 3 Notes on Troubleshooting tienen iet tee denne dne de de i ecce dcn e a ete 185 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data re eva t tene edet ee Perte ORE D e ora Poe e e Po Rte o Dna e e ee o 185 10 4 1 Logs that can be collected by the MMB sese nene nennen nnne tnnt nennen enn 185 10 4 2 Collecting data for investigation Windows essent nnne nnne nnne nente tentent enters 190 10 4 3 Setting up the dump environment Windows sess tnter tenente tentent tette ten teen tenens 191 10 4 4 Acquiring data for investigation RHEL eese nennen nennen tenent tnter nnns 197 10 4 5 SACI rra eode et et RU ERE ERR 198 10 5 Configuring and Checking Log Information sees eene tente tnnt tnnt tne ttntettnte tne tente tenete tnte nenas 198 10 5 1 List of log Informations oho trt indt stt te rnnt te cn c scd de o A Ae t d ved 198 10 6 IBI RBecclcsm M 199 10 6 1 Notes On updating firmware 2 treten eee eese i be EL eC OH te Mete ienis 199 Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series essent nnne nter nter tenentes 200 AA FUNCUON LISt ED
153. QUEST 2000 Series Cabinets Link D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Appendix E PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Cabinets Link For details on PRIMEQUEST 2000 series cabinets and components and PCI Box cabinets and components see Chapter 1 Installation Information in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HOO4EN 217 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs E LED Type Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs This appendix describes the types of mounted LEDs for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series It also describes how to check the status with LEDs F 1 LED Type The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series has Customer Self Service CSS LED System Alarm LED and Location LED on front side of the cabinet CSS LED and System Alarm LED indicate faulty status of entire system Location LED indicates physical location of the system The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series also has Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED in components Power LED indicates power status in the component Alarm LED indicates whether there is an error in the component Location LED indicates the mounting location of the component Location LED can be set to on and off When you replace the component by using Maintenance Wizard Location LED helps your work F1 1 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED In principle each component for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series comes equipped with the following LEDs TABLE F 1 Power LED Alarm LED and
154. QUEST2800E Active MIMB 0 _ Part Number MCXXXXXXX S ITSU Serial Number JC12450010 Under Maintenance Status system Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Partition 2 ogout Maintenance Wizard Waiting for status update Status Updating PCI_Box PCIC status 10 Confirm status of target replaced PCI card and click Next button 127 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Maintenance Wizard Post Maintenance View Help Check PCI_Box 0 PCIC O status and then chck Next button 11 Confirm Maintenance Mode is released information zone non gray background and click OK button Model PRIMEQUEST AetiverMINIB O Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status Maintenance Wizard Completion PCI_Box 0 PCIC 1 replacement operation complete Please click OK button E 5 Confirm replaced PCI card by using Device Manager After replacement of target PCI card open Device Manager and confirm that the target device is recognized correctly Note As the follow right click target device in Device Manager if there are Enable in displayed menu check Enable In case of Disable this work is not necessary 128 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugg
155. ST 2400E 2800E 2800B Overview of Hot Maintenance The hot plugging procedure includes the common steps for all PCI Express cards and the additional steps required for a card function or driver This section describes both the operations required for all cards and the operations required for combinations with a specific card and specific software Overview of hot plugging You can add and replace cards by using the hot plugging supported by Windows Server 2008 R2 and 2012 This chapter describes the operating system commands required for card replacement together with the actual hardware operations For details on the overall flow see 6 1 1 Overall flow Common hot plugging procedure for PCI Express cards This chapter concretely describes the required tasks in the common replacement procedure for all PCI Express cards For details on the common hot plugging procedure for PCI Express cards see 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Hot plugging procedure for each type of card 6 1 1 This chapter describes procedures with the required additional steps for certain cards The section contains procedures for NICs network cards and FC cards Fibre Channel cards For details on NIC hot plugging see 6 3 NIC Hot Plugging For details on FC card hot plugging see 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging For the respective procedures required for cards other than the above cards see the related hardware and software manuals as well as this
156. S_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 1 active Y 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready Example of DM MP display after connecting path sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 2 enabled Y 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready S202 050 sdc 8 32 active ready 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux FC Card Restart the application which is stop at preparing for IOU hot replacement 4 4 Hot add of IOU This section describes the hot add of the IOU 4 4 4 Preparation for IOU hot add The description of the flow of preparations is given below 1 Arrange for the IOU for addition 2 Checkif number of IOU required for addition is available 3 Insert the IOU to be added into a free IOU slot Note Check if the I O device is normally operating in the free partition During addition I O pre diagnostic process is not executed 4 4 2 DR operation of IOU hot add This section describes the DR operation for IOU hot add 1 Log into the MMB Web UI using Administrator privileges 2 Execute the hotadd command Example When adding IOU1 in partition1 hotadd partition 1 IOU 1 quiet 3 Execute opt FUSVdp util sbin dp stat IOU command in the operating system shell The list of IOUs connected
157. Seg is segment number and Bus is Bus number in Seg Bus Dev information This segment number and bus number is the information to confirm by using Device Manager 121 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 co Part Number MCF3ACII11 FUJITSU Serial Number QAI7 Status Normal Partition User Administration 1 x Configuration Maintenance Logout gt System PCI Box gt PCI_Box 0 PCI _Box 0 Refresh Help Cable Connection 0 25 0 0 16 0 0 22 0 LEN NM M MM MNEMEMEMEMEMEM 0 19 0 0 31 0 0 151 0 0 148 0 0 139 0 0 145 0 Note In case of multi function card there are some cards that have same segment number same bus number and different function numbers In this case please perform Step 2 and Step 3 of follows respectively 2 Disable target PCI cards by using Device manager a Confirm target PCI card in Device Manager Open Device Manager and identify target device with confirmed segment number and bus number in step 1 b Select interface of the type of replaced PCI card and reference property Select General see Location and confirm that the segment number and bus number is corresponded to target device or not You need target device name in step 3 confirm it in advance Teaming VLANs BootOptions Driver
158. Series Administration Manual C122 E175ENEN If the error recurs contact your sales representative or a field engineer Confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the right front of the device and report it Also check any other required items beforehand according to 11 2 Troubleshooting in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175ENEN The system settings saved by the customer will be used during maintenance Manual How to use this manual This manual contains important information about the safe use of this product Read the manual thoroughly to understand the information in it before using this product Be sure to keep this manual in a safe and convenient location for quick reference Fujitsu makes every effort to prevent users and bystanders from being injured and to prevent property damage Be sure to use the product according to the instructions in this manual Manuals for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series The following manuals have been prepared to provide you with the information necessary to use the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series You can access HTML versions of these manuals at the following sites Japanese language site http p fujitsu com platform server primequest manual 2000 Global site htto Awww fujitsu com global services computing server primequest htto manuals ts fujitsu com Title Description Manual code PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Describes what manuals you should read and how to C122
159. Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows XP The management terminal to be shutdown should be connected to Windows through a network Firewall settings of the target Windows In the Exception settings of the firewall File and Printer Sharing check box must be checked 167 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 6 Remote shutdown Windows When target is work group environment The user name and password of the management terminal must match those of the target Windows to be shut down When the target is an Active Directory environment A user with administrative privileges for the Windows to be shut down must log in to the management terminal 8 6 2 How to use remote shutdown To perform remote shutdown log in to the management terminal and enter the shutdown command shutdown s m lt Server Name In Server Name specify the computer name of the Windows to be shut down For details on other options of the shutdown command see Help When the shutdown command is executed by using Option displays a simplified help Figure 8 7 Simplified help for the shutdown command 18 xl 168 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 9 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 9 1 MMB Web UI CHAPTER 9 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures This chapter descri
160. System Event Log window see 1 2 2 System Event Log window in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN To get the log of RAID card by downloading SEL it is required that the partition mounting the particular RAID card is power on state Downloading the event data stored in the SEL A Fujitsu certified service engineer needs the event data stored in the SEL to analyze the system status Therefore we may ask you to download the event data and submit it to a Fujitsu certified service engineer Procedure 1 Click the Download button in the System Event Log window A dialog box for specifying the storage file and path appears 2 Enter the pathname The event data stored in the SEL is downloaded to the PC displaying the Web UI window Filtering the events to display Procedure 1 Click the Filter button in the System Event Log window The System Event Log Filtering Condition window appears FIGURE 10 13 System Event Log Filtering Condition window in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMBsO Part Number MCXXXXXXX Fujitsu Serial Nember Sitseeertng Status arm ad a os System Event Log Filtering Condition Help a Select the fering conditions and click the Apply button to take effect Note The folosings are AND conditions LJ e DSeveriy Z Error 9 Warning Info 2 Partition All Specified 10 711 O2 Unit CAI OSpeofied PSUs Fans SBe0 Be
161. VE under bonding the file contents are partly different but the lines to be set are the same Example EVICE eth0 CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 ROADCAST 192 168 16 255 PADDR 192 168 16 1 ETMASK 255 255 255 0 ETWORK 192 168 16 0 BOOT yes PE Ethernet HOZZHWZUH K Do this editing for all the saved interfaces Restore the saved interface configuration file to the original file Restore the interface configuration file saved to the save directory to the original file by executing the following command cd etc sysconfig network scripts temp mv ifcfg ethX following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondX Activate the replaced interface The method for activating a single NIC interface differs from that for activating the SLAVE interfaces under bonding For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces 96 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards 20 sbin ifup ethX Also if the single NIC interface has a VLAN device and the VLAN interface was temporarily removed restore the VLAN interface If the priority option has changed set it again sbin vconfig add ethX Y sbin ifup ethX Y enter command to set VLAN option as needed F
162. VE interface to be replaced from operation In any other mode removing it immediately should not cause any problems Confirm that the SLAVE interface to be replaced is the interface currently being used for communication First confirm the interface currently being used for communication by executing the following command cat sys class net bondY bonding active slave If the displayed interface matches the SLAVE interface being replaced execute the following command to switch the current communication interface to another SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethZz ethZ Interface that composes bondY and does not perform hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX 5 Remove the interface configuration file Delete the configuration files of all the interfaces confirmed in step 2 by executing the following command rm etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethX 6 Delete the entries associated with the replaced NIC from the udev function rule file The entry to be removed is only onboard NIC for replacing IOU itself For replacing or removing PCI Express card the entry to be removed is the interface corresponding to the PCI Express card a Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address in the ta
163. Virtual media Supported Console redirection Supported UEFI shell Supported 205 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 2 11 Server management network settings A 2 8 Partition power control TABLE A 15 Partition power control Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI Power on Supported Supported Power off shutdown Supported Supported Reset Supported Supported NMI Supported Supported Forced power off Supported Supported sadump Supported Supported Diagnosis mode selection at power on Supported Scheduled operation Supported A 2 9 OS boot settings TABLE A 16 OS boot settings Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI OS boot device selection Supported OS boot priority setting Supported OS boot option setting Supported OS boot delay time setting Supported PXE iSCSI boot network device setting Supported Boot control boot setting override Supported A 2 10 MMB user account control TABLE A 17 MMB user account control Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI MMB user account setting and Supported Supported Display MMB login user display Supported Supported A 2 11 Server management network settings TABLE A 18 Server management network settings Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI Setting of MMB date time and time zone Supported Supported MMB time synchronization NTP
164. Wizard Maintenance Wizard Waiting for status update pum 16 Status Updating PCI Box PCIC status 10 Check the status of replaced PCIC and click Next 8 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards Maintenance Wizard Post Maintenance View Help Check PCI_Box 0 PCIC O status and then cick Next button On OK eh e 8086 150E Standby Not present 11 Confirm that maintenance mode has been released with information area of MMB Web UI not gray out and click Next Model PRIMEQUEST Active NINIB O Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status Normal gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Completion PCI_Box 0 PCIC 1 replacement operation complete Please click OK button od Post processing of software using a PCI Express card After replacing a PCI Express card restart the software stopped before the PCI Express card replacement or make the software operation applicable again as needed 4 6 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being replaced Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging Although you can hot replace FC card used for dump device of sadump collecting dump of memory fails until reconfiguring HBA UEFI or exte
165. a 8 GB and 16 GB DIMMs can be mounted in a single SB or partition 32 GB and 64 GB DIMMs cannot be mixed with DIMMs of other sizes in an SB or partition Identical DIMMs means those with the same size TABLE G 3 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within an SB DIMM DR PCI address SB Number DIMM increment unit mode CPU number 1CPUASB 2CPUASB per N M S N M S Partition 2SB 4CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 3SB 6CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 4SB 8CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 Segment 1SB 1CPU 1 2 4 6 N A N A N A 1SB 2CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 2SB 4CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 3SB 6CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 4SB 8CPU N A N A N A 8 16 24 Enable Bus 1SB 1CPU 1 N A N A N A N A N A N A 1SB 2CPU N A N A N A N A N A N A 2SB 4CPU N A N A N A N A N A N A 3SB 6CPU N A N A N A N A N A N A 4SB 8CPU N A N A N A N A N A N A Segment 1SB 1CPU 1 4 8 12 N A N A N A 1SB 2CPU N A N A N A 8 16 24 2SB 4CPU N A N A N A 8 16 24 3SB 6CPU N A N A N A 8 16 24 4SB 8CPU N A N A N A 8 16 24 DIMM size 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 8 GB Supported Supported Not supported Not supported 16 GB Supported Supported Not supported Not supported 32 GB Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported 64 GB Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported TABLE G 4 Relationship between DIMM size and mutual operability within a partition DIMM size 8 GB 16 GB 32 G
166. a separate local memory Memory 1 Home SB 2GB Quantity of Logical CPUs X100MB Memory capacity of the total system x0 03 Memory capacity of HugeTLB Excluding Home SB Nothing specific DR Function Enabled TXT TPM Function Disabled 1 In case of SB hot add the SB to be added should be a Free SB or a Reserved SB of the target partition The target of the DR function and supported operating systems are shown below 33 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration TABLE 3 3 DR supported list Component Function Windows Server VMware Red Hat SUSE Windows ESXi 5 or later Enterprise Enterprise 2008 R2 or later Linux RHEL6 4 Linux 11 or later SB Hot add Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported CPU 2 Hot remove Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported DIMM 2 1 Hot replace Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported IOU Hot add Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Hot remove Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Hot replace Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported PCI_Box 3 Hot add Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Hot remove Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Hot replace Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported 1 Hot remove of SB not possible 2 P
167. abit Dual Port Network Connection 10 x Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 x Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 4 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 9 TEAM Team 0 nm X TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Ad Update Driver Software fH gt Other devices Disable i s Processors Uninstall E Storage controllers E qi System devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers Scan for hardware changes lOpens property sheet for the current selection 4 Click the Teaming tab uncheck the Team this adapter with other adapters check box and click the OK button 135 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 3 NIC Hot Plugging TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Ada KA EG General Link Speed Advanced Power Management Teaming Boot Options Driver Details Resources intel Adapter Teaming Hew Team Team m T eam 0 z Properties Team with other adapters Allows you to specify whether a network connection will participate in a team For an overview of teaming click here If not checked this adapter is not part of a team Cancel 5 The following message appears Click the Yes button Adapter Teaming Property
168. ace more than one iSCSI card one card at a time will be replaced A single NIC is configured as one interface FIGURE 4 3 Example of single NIC interface Work to be performed before iSCSI NIC replacement For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below when performing Step 3 of the NIC replacement procedure in 4 6 4 Network card replacement procedure 1 Perform the work for suppressing access to the iSCSI connection interface a Confirm the state of multiple path by DM MP 1 or EMPD 2 97 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards b Use the iscsiadm command to log out from the path iqn through which the iSCSI card to be replaced is routed and disconnect the session Example which confirms the state of session before disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0pO tcp 2 192 168 2 66 3260 3 ign 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 Example which logout path going through a NIC to be replaced sbin iscsiadm m node T iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage System eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 p 192 168 2 66 3260 logout c Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been disconnected Example which confirms the state of session
169. aced NIC from the udev function rule file The entry to be removed is only onboard NIC for replacing IOU itself For replacing or removing PCI Express card the entry to be removed is the interface corresponding to the PCI Express card a Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address in the table created in step 2 b Edit the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules to delete or comment out the entry lines of all the interface names and hardware addresses confirmed in the above step a The following example shows editing of the udev function rule file Example of descriptions in the file before editing PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS ATTR address 2 2c d4 44 1 44 0 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME etho PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2c d4 44 1 44 f1 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth1 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing In the example ethO was deleted and eth1 is commented out 4 PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 ATTR address 2c d4 44 f1 KERNEL eth NAME eth1 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y 44 f1 ATTR type 1 The Y at the
170. acement IOU hot maintenance IOU hot add IOU hot remove Function that can incorporate an IOU into the system IOU hot add or disconnect an IOU from the system IOU hot remove without restarting the operating system Hot plug of PCI Box is not possible Hot plug of PCI card on the PCI Box is possible The following functions are provided Enabling the I O resource enhancement especially the resource enhancement that requires the addition of PCI Express slot in a running system Enables the hot swap of the failed IOU and the pre failed IOU Perform a redistribution of IOU resources across partitions in accordance with the load 32 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration FIGURE 3 5 IOU Hot add Partition n Home No Description 1 Dynamic addition of IOU operation by operator FIGURE 3 6 IOU hot remove removal of failed IOU Partition n Partition n Home Home SB 0 No Description 1 Fault suspected 2 Dynamic disconnection of IOU operator operation 3 Replacement Rules of DR The DR is set in the UEFI The DR applicable conditions are as follows TABLE 3 2 Applicable criteria Item Setting criteria IO mode Flexible I O mode PCI Address mode PCI segment mode SB At least one SB CPU At least one CPU configuration Each CPU must have
171. acement Procedure for iSCSI Quick Connect OK el Apply 152 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 7 Backup and Restore 7 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information 7 1 7 1 1 CHAPTER 7 Backup and Restore This chapter describes the backup and the restore operations required for restoring server data Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series has partitioning functions These functions provide the user with partitions acting as independent servers The user must configure the UEFI Unified Extensible Firmware Interface for each partition The user can make these settings with operations on the MMB The MMB has BIOS configuration information for each partition It also has backup and restore functions for the configuration information on the MMB Notes Configuration information on the server must be backed up ahead of time The backup enables restoration of the original information if the system becomes damaged or an operational error erases data on the server Be sure to periodically backup server configuration information in case of such events The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server cannot be connected to an FDD floppy disk for backup restore or other such operations To use an FDD connect it to a remote PC or another server connected to the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server This section describes the backup and the restore operations for UEFI configuration information and M
172. act a field engineer or your sales representative Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit Operation interrupt criteria The Alarm LED of the MMB is on The Active LEDs of MMB 0 and MMB 1 are both off You cannot connect to the MMB Web UI The Alarm LEDs of multiple boards in the device are on The MMB Web UI displays Read Error The System Status window of the MMB Web UI displays Not Present for the status of every unit 10 2 5 Investigating abnormal conditions Investigate trouble spots First check the component e g SB IOU and the partition where the problem occurred The corrective action varies depending on various factors including the location of the trouble spot error level and the system operation mode Finding out about a faulty component Investigate the entire system component configuration and the faulty component Select System System Status in the MMB menu window to display the window shown in the following figure You can find out the status of each component 180 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FIGURE 10 7 System status display Model PRIMEQUEST S00E Active MMBs6 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Fujitsu Serial Number COUTTS Status Nermal gt System gt System Status System Status Fres Hep Click a lick below to view
173. ads to a smooth investigation The engineer uses this information to determine how the system is configured and deployed It includes a list of installed software programs operating system settings and event logs SSG and DSNAP are executed from the administrator command prompt For details on how to use them see the following references DSNAP README JP TXT file in the operating system installation drive XY DSNAP folder SSG QSS acquisition tool Help for SSG Memory dump A memory dump is an exact copy of the memory contents at time of occurrence of a problem A memory dump is very useful in following cases The desktop screen is frozen Windows itself hangs during system operation For example the desktop screen freezes or you cannot operate the mouse or keyboard 190 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data 10 4 3 The responsiveness of the mouse or keyboard is too slow Performance deteriorates during system operation when the responsiveness of the mouse or keyboard is too slow For details on memory dump file settings see 10 4 3 Setting up the dump environment Windows To acquire memory dump select Partition and then the Power Control window of the MMB Web UI Specify NMI for the target partition Remarks Forced acquisition of a memory dump causes the server to stop Collection of a memory dump may take a lo
174. after disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 d You can confirm the disconnection of sessions on multipath products using DM MP or ETERNUS multidriver 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session disconnection Example of DM MP display before disconnecting path sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 2 active XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready X 4 0 0 0 ede 8 22 active ready Example of DM MP display after disconnecting path f sbin multipath 11 mpath1l 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 1 enabled XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux Work to be performed after NIC replacement For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below when Step 19 of the NIC replacement procedure in 4 6 4 Network card replacement procedure 2 To restore access to the iSCSI connection interface perform the following e Confirm the state of multiple path by DM MP 1 or EMPD 2 f Use the iscsiadm command to log in to the path iqn through which the replacement iSCSI card is
175. ailure Report Sheet ae LA Failure Report Sheet Appendix M Information of PCI Express card xvi C122 E175 01EN Preface Figures FIGURE 1 1 External network configuration essent nennen tentent ntnte tete tette tete tete tette tete tn tete te tete te antenas 1 FIGURE 1 2 External network functions esses nete nente tete tenente tente tente ten tete toten te tente te nte te nte te tete nte nente esten 2 FIGURE 1 3 Management LAN configuration eese entente tenete tette tentent tete te tete tete tete tete te tete te tatnen teea 6 FIGURE 1 4 Maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB eeessesessesesteseeeseeseeessesesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeeeseeteaeeneaeeteaseneaseneaeeteacens 11 FIGURE 1 5 Connection configuration for video redirection esses essent tnnt tnnt tnnt tnter terret nenas 14 FIGURE 1 6 Operating sequence of video redirection sees tnnt tnnt ttn tette tente tnte nenas 15 FIGURE 1 7 Video Redirection windOw eese esee entente nnne tnnt rnnt ttete tete teet te tete teet e teet te teens tina 15 FIGURE 1 8 Message of requesting access to Virtual Console in second terminal PC 19 FIGURE 1 9 Popup window of Virtual Console Sharing Privileges essent nnne tenentes 19 FIGURE 1 10 Popup for Allow Virtual Console in first termin
176. al PC sees tnnt nnne nnne tnnt 19 FIGURE 1 11 Popup for TIMEOUT in first terminal PC sess ntntn tnter tnte tne ttn teens tnnt 19 FIGURE 1 12 Popup for Allow Virtual Console in second terminal PC seen ttn 19 FIGURE 1 13 Popup for Allow only video in second terminal PC sees tentent tnnt nnne tnnt 20 FIGURE 1 14 Popup for Deny Access in second terminal PC essent nente tnnt nnne nnne tnnt nenas 20 FIGURE 1 15 Popup for TIMEOUT in first terminal PC essent tentent nnne ttntn tnnt tette ttn te tente tne nenas 20 FIGURE 1 16 Popup for reaching maximum number of connection in second terminal PC ees 20 FIGURE 1 17 Example of setting partition 3 1 sessista iiei tnte tente akira sike Kesir 21 FIGURE 1 18 Example of setting partition 3 2 sese nee nente ttn ttnte tnter tnnt tette tente ttn te tente tena 21 FIGURE 1 19 Forced disconnection of console redirection 1 sese ttt tnnt tnnt ntn nenas 22 FIGURE 1 20 Forced disconnection of console redirection 2 sees tne nenas 22 FIGURE 1 21 Configuration of virtual media connection sess ttt ntnte tnter tnte tnnt teen teens 23 FIGURE 1 22 Virtual Media window 1 nenne nente nnne treten tete treten tete tete tete retenti retenta 24 FIGUR
177. al network and Internal LAN inside the cabinet LAN Since 3 Internal LAN is closed to the outside of the cabinet the same subnet as that for Internal LAN in another cabinet can be used For the IP address to be assigned to Console redirection the same subnet as that assigned to 1 Management LAN must be used MMB uses the following subnets permanently for internal communication The following subnets cannot be specified 127 1 1 0 24 127 1 2 0 24 127 1 3 0 24 The PCH on an SB in each partition has a 100 Mb Ethernet port connected with the PCH to MMB communication LAN inside the cabinet The operating system assigns the IP address of the 100 Mb Ethernet port TABLE 1 3 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server set from the operating system in a partition LAN port IP address setting method Description 100 MbE port on SB NIC in PCH 1 Set it from the OS in each partition 100 MbE port connected to the Internal LAN This IP address and the IP address of the Internal LAN IP Address in TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB are in the same subnet An IP address must be assigned to each partition LAN port in IOU Set it from the OS in each partition This depends on the partition configuration Network card Set it from the OS
178. ance PSU P PSU S Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 Replaceable 1 FANM Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 Replaceable 1 FANU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable FANM Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable SB Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 5 CPU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable DIMM Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable Mezzanine Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable DIMM Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable PCI Express card Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable FBU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable HDD SSD Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 2 Battery Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable IOU_1GbE IOU _10GbE Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 5 PCI Express card Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable DU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable PCI Express card Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable FBU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable HDD SSD Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 2 MMB Replaceable Replaceable 3 Replaceable 3 Replaceable 3 OPL Replaceable Not replaceable Not replaceable Not replaceable MP PDB Replaceable No
179. and PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Note If driver list does not fall within window input drivers b Driver list is shown by a page n2 C1 Co C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 25 Driver list MTFTP6 Network Service Driver TCP Network S ice Driver UDP6 Network Service Driver UEFI PXE Base Code Driver Usb Ehci Driver Bus Driver jboard Driver gt age Driver UsbMassStorageDxe rage Device Select Driv UsbMassStorageDev ice Usb Mouse Driver UsbMouseDxe BIOS CINT10 Video Driver JiosUi SCINT1 lock Io Driver j FAT File stem Driver 1 6200e Matrox Graphics UEFI Driver 1 Intel R PR0 1000 5 5 19 PCI E t Intel R 1 Driver 3 6 16 x64 2 419 f4 Netuork Device Shadou Driver LegacyNetworkShadowD QLogic Fibre Channel Driver c Fibre Channel Driver I Pass Thru Driver Driver Shell _ 5 Check UEFI driver version Check version of QLogic Fibre Channel Driver Example 00000224 in version of UEFI driver means 2 24 FIGURE J 26 Confirmation of UEFI driver version service Driver Htftp6Dxe ruice Driver TcpDxe I Ud p6Dxe Uef iPxeB Offset Offset UX Offset Oxi Offset 0x UEFI Driver Version Note For a FC card made by Qlogic you can confirm the firmware version only when a partition starts up J 3 2 How to confirm firmware version for F
180. and IOU 3 are not included in the partition No partition can consist of only an SB and IOU 30 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration 3 1 2 Setting procedure of partition in MMB Web UI The procedure to set the partition in the MMB Web UI is described below 1 Power off the partition For details see PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tools Reference 1 3 1 Power Control window Add the SB and IOU into the partition For details see PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tools Reference 1 3 3 Partition Configuration window Set the Home SB If necessary set a Reserved SB For details see 1 3 5 Reserved SB Configuration window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tools Reference Set the name of the partition For details see 1 3 3 Partition Configuration window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tools Reference Set the various types of modes For details see the Mode window of the 1 3 8 Partition x Menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tools Reference Power on the partition For details see 1 3 1 Power Control window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tools Reference 3 2 M High availability configuration This section describes the following functions for realizing a high system availability of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series 3 2 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR 3 2 2 Reserved SB 3 2 4 Memory Mirror 3 2 5 Hardware RAID 3 2 6 Server View RAID
181. and Use FIGURE 1 24 Virtual Media window 2 a Virtual Media Floppy Key Media I Floppy Image Browse Connect Floppy Floppy Key Media II Floppy Image X Browse Connect Floppy CD DVD Media I amp CD Image x Disconnect Connected to Host CD DVD Device 0 aL Ji gt CD DVD Media II CD Image Browse Connect CDIDVD DE OF Hard disk USB Key Media I HD USB Image x Browse Connect Hard disk USB Key 2 PhysicalDrive1 G USB 2 PhysicalDrive0 C D Fixed Drive Hard disk USB Key Media I HOUSE Image Browse Connect Hard disk USB Key 2 PhysicalDrive1 6 USB O PhysicalDrive0 C D Fixed Drive Status Target Drive Connected To Read Bytes virtual Floppy 1 Not Connected Virtual Floppy 2 Not Connected virtual CD DVD 1 DiikikkawalOSWSO_Imag vitua CD DVD 2 Not Connected Close Retrying a connection after the Reserved SB is switched When changing the Home SB of the partition connect console and video redirection again 1 6 3 ServerView Suite ServerView Suite environment setup for Windows For details on the environmental settings of ServerView Suite for Windows see the ServerView Suite ServerView Installation Manager ServerView Suite environment setup for Linux For details on the environmental settings of ServerView Suite for Linux see the ServerVie
182. and authentication settings For settings specific to SNMP v3 use the SNMP v3 Configuration menu SNMP Trap Specifies SNMP trap destinations You can set up to 16 destinations Each trap destination item includes the Community User name destination IP address SNMP version and authentication level settings Test Trap button Sends a test trap to the specified trap destination SNMP v3 Configuration Settings specific to SNMP v3 Engine ID Specifies the Engine ID Enter the encryption hash function authentication passphrase and encryption passphrase for users SSL SSL settings Create CSR Creates a private key and a request for a signature CSR Certificate Signing Request SSL certificate status Displays the current status of SSL certificate installation Key length Length of the private key 1024 bits or 2048 bits Entered information on the owner specified for the CSR Country prefecture city town organization department server e mail address Create CSR button Displays a confirmation dialog box Clicking OK creates a new private key and a request for a signature After completion a dialog box appears Clicking OK registers the private key and causes a jump to the Export Key CSR window Clicking Cancel ives an instruction to discard the created private key and CSR Export Key CSR Exports an MMB private key CSR backup Export Key button Exports a private key Export CSR b
183. ansition of each partition is shown from 1 to 4 of the Partition status transition in the table below 55 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 6 Replacing the Home SB No TABLE 3 15 Partition status transition Partition Status transition Chronological Left to right 1 2 3 4 Partition P In operation Faulty Reset SB switching Power on In operation Partition Q In operation In operation In operation In operation Partition R In operation In operation Power off Power off Even if Partition P Partition Q or 1 in the table TABLE 3 16 Description of partition status transition Partition R is running the status of the partition will be as indicated in No Description the numbers correspond to the status transition 1 Partition P Partition Q and Partition R are in operation 2 SB a of Partition P becomes faulty 3 SB a of Partition P is disconnected and stopped Following this Partition R is powered off After that SB c is removed from Partition R configuration and the specification of Reserved SB of Partition Q is canceled 4 After being removed from the Partition Q configuration SB c is configured as the SB of Partition P Partition P is automatically powered on and the partition begins to operate In the status transition of 1 to 4 SB c is incorporated in Partition
184. anual unclear please take a moment to share it with us by filling in the form at the following webpage stating your points specifically and sending X C122 E175 01EN Preface the form to us https www s fujitsu com global contact computing PRMQST feedback html The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice nthis manual the Management Board and MMB firmware are abbreviated as MMB nthis manual IOU 10GbE and IOU_1GbE are collectively referred to as IO Units Screenshots contained in this manual may differ from the actual product screen displays ThelP addresses configuration information and other such information contained in this manual are display examples and differ from that for actual operation The PDF file of this manual is intended for display using Adobe Reader in single page viewing mode at 100 zoom This manual shall not be reproduced or copied without the permission of Fujitsu Limited Copyright 2014 FUJITSU LIMITED Xi C122 E175 01EN Preface Contents Preface icon SORORE SR ERR RR EE ROC ROGER RU R C ae i CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation essent terne tete tenente 1 1 1 External Network Configuration iesiri teet tete e ttt ibo DR ec ceat loea eed abc e DR Ree EE akea 1 1 2 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN sss 3 1 2 1 IP addresses u
185. ard FIGURE J 23 Boot Manager menu Boot Manager Boot Option Menu Legacy CD ROM Fujitsu Virtual CDROMO 1 00 Fujitsu Virtual CDROM1 1 00 EFI Fujitsu Uirtual CDROMO 1 EFI Fujitsu Virtual CDROM1 1 00 00 EFI USB Device 2 EFI USB Device 3 EFI USB Device 4 EFI USB Device 5 EFI SCSI Device EFI SCSI Device 1 FI Internal Shell Ti Move Highlight Enter gt Select Entry 3 UEFI Shell starts up Input below command on EFI Shell Shell drivers 4 List of driver appears FIGURE J 24 UEFI Shell EFI Shell version 2 31 0 38 Current running mode 1 1 2 Device mapping table jle BlockDevice Alias null Root 0x0 Pci Ox1A 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x0 Removable BlockDev ice Root 0x0 Pc i 0x1A 0x S ZUSB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x1 ckDeu ice 1 Pci Ox1A 0x 6 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x2 wckDev ice Pe Root 0x0 Pci 0x1A 0x0 l 0x0 x4 0x0 Unit 0x3 Renovable BlockDev ice PcieRoot 0x0 Pc i 0x18 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x4 r xckDev ice Pci 0x18 USB 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x5 vable E Dev ice Root 0x0 Pci 0x1C 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x0 Ctr 1 0x0 Scsi 0x1 0x0 jle BlockDevice Alias mull Root 0x0 Pc i Ox1C 0x0 Pci 0x8 0x0 Ctr 1 0x0 Scs i Ox2 0x0 Press ESC in 1 seconds to skip startup nsh any other key to continue Shell gt drivers_ For details on UEFI operation see PRIMEQUEST 2000 series User Interface Operating Instructions C122 E176EN
186. ard replacement procedure in detail 4 Physically add the target NIC by using MMB Maintenance Wizard For details on the operation of replacement see step 1 to 7 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 5 Power on the PCI Express slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 6 Check whether there is an error in added FC card by MMB Maintenance Wizard This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system For details on the operation of replacement see step 8 to 11 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail 7 Confirm the newly added interface name Powering on the slot creates an interface ethX for the added NIC Execute the following command Compare its results with those of step 1 to confirm the created interface name sbin ifconfig a 8 Confirm the hardware address of the newly added interface Confirm the hardware address HWaddr and the created interface by executing the ifconfig command For a single NIC with multiple interfaces confirm the hardware addresses of all the created interfaces Example eth1 is a new interface created for the added NIC sbin ifconfig a ethO Lin
187. ardware address to replace the old one In HWADDR set the hardware address of the replacement NIC in TABLE 6 4 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement or TABLE 6 5 Confirmation of interface names Also for SLAVE under bonding the file contents are partly different but the lines to be set are the same Example DEVICE eth0 NM CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 2c d4 44 1 44 d2 BROADCAST 192 168 16 255 IPADDR 192 168 16 1 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 NETWORK 192 168 16 0 ONBOOT yes TYPE Ethernet Do this editing for all the saved interfaces except for the interface with no change of hardware address 5 Restore the saved interface configuration file to the original file Restore the interface configuration file saved to the save directory to the original file by executing the following command cd etc sysconfig network scripts temp mv ifcfg ethX following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondX 6 Activate the replaced interface The method for activating a single NIC interface differs from that for activating the SLAVE interfaces 71 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU under bonding For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin if
188. ation Recovery by MMB or BMC reset continuous partition operation Ecological Power consumption Cabinet power consumption monitoring notification to operation management higher level software PSU power on count control PSU power on control only as needed FAN speed control Optimum control of FAN speed Dynamic Add Remove The configuration change is possible compared with Reconfiguration the partition OS s operating DR Time NTP client NTP client synchronization A 1 3 Monitoring and reporting functions TABLE A 3 Monitoring and reporting functions operation Minor item Description Hardware Hardware problem Hardware problem monitoring by MMB BMC UEFI monitoring and monitoring reporting Partition problem Watchdog Timer monitoring by MMB UEFI monitoring Power control problem Power control sequence problem monitoring monitoring oo FAN speed problem Fan speed problem monitoring monitoring Voltage problem Voltage problem monitoring monitoring Temperature problem Temperature problem monitoring monitoring Hardware proactive Proactive monitoring of CPU DIMM and HDD monitoring hardware failures External reporting External reporting by e mail SNMP or REMCS Event monitoring Sensor detected event monitoring Threshold monitoring Threshold monitoring of temperature power voltage and fan speed Status display LED display Display of MMB and system status Location display Location LED Faulty component
189. atus They prevent error reporting caused by a maintenance error or maintenance work The following table lists the maintenance modes and their functions Note that Operation mode is the normal operation mode and not a maintenance mode 172 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 1 Maintenance TABLE 10 1 Maintenance modes Mode Meaning Operation Normal operation Normal operation Hot System Maintenance For maintenance work performed while the system Active for work system power is on Hot Partition Maintenance For maintenance work performed while the target Active for work partition partition power is on Warm System Power Off For maintenance work performed while the system Partition stopped for maintenance power is on and the maintenance target partition power is off Cold System Maintenance breaker on For maintenance work performed while the system Stopped for work standby power is off and the AC power supply is on Cold System Maintenance breaker off For maintenance work performed while the system Stopped for work AC off power is off and the AC power supply is off TABLE 10 2 Maintenance mode functions Item Operation Maintenance mode mode Hot System Hot Warm Cold Cold Partition System System System breaker breaker on off Power Administr Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppres
190. atus Description OPL System Green Off Power off in all partitions Power On Power on in all partitions PSU on 12V feed System Orange Off Alarm On Error occurrence in cabinet System Blue Off Location On Identify cabinet ID CSS Yellow Off On Error in CSS component PCI Box Power Green Off PCI Box power off On PCI Box power on Alarm Orange Off PCI Box normal On Error in PCI Box Location Blue Off On Component location lO PSU Orange Off IO PSU normal CHECK Blinking Error in lO PSU 1 PCI Express Power Green Off PCI Express slot power slot off Blinking PCI Express hot replacement in progress On PCI Express slot power on Alarm Orange Off PCI Express slot normal Blinking PCI Express slot location On Error at PCI Express slot lO PSU AC Green Off AC off or 5V SB output stopped On AC on or 5V SB being output DC Green Off 12V output stopped On 12V being output CHECK Orange Off IO PSU normal On Error at lO PSU IO FAN Alarm Orange Off IO FAN normal On Error in lO FAN 1 OR output of two IO PSU CHECK LEDs If the CHECK LED of even one IO PSU goes on the IO PSU CHECK LED goes on 227 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs F 4 Button and switch F 4 Button and switch PRIMEQUEST 2000 series comes equipped with below buttons and switches OPL Location button When you push the Location button of OPL Location LED turns on Pushing this button again Location LED turns off
191. atus display TABLE A 12 Display of partition configuration information and partition status TABLE A 13 Partition configuration and operation setting DHT EN 205 TABLE A 14 Partition operation ees ures mi 205 TABLE A 15 Partition power control us Em ux 206 TABLE A 16 OS boot settings s gi 206 TABLE A 17 MMB user account control TABLE A 18 Server management network settings E I Zs 206 TABLE A 19 Maintenance eee ae eee eo 207 TABLE A 20 Management network specifications us m 207 TABLE A 21 Management network specifications x Wes je 208 TABLE C 1 External system interfaces TABLE C 2 External MMB interfaces essent T or 1 218 TABLE D 1 physical locations of SB internal I O controllers and BUS numbers ua we 214 TABLE D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers eee 214 TABLE F 1 Power LED Alarm LED and Location LED resedi an aaa aaa 218 TABLE F2 PSU LED re 218 TABLE F 3 Power status and PSU LED display essent tentent tenente tentent tente tenete tette tentes 218 TABLE FAA BEDS citet s ciet EE dudit imul Ui II EI 219 TABLE F 5 Power status and FANU LED display es
192. ault settings are as follows For other than Partition Operator All radio button For Partition Operator Specified radio button and target partition Unit Select the units to display Select the All or Specified radio button If you select All filtering by unit is not applied If you select Specified you can set filtering by unit Check the check box of a unit to display the events of that unit Even after a switch to All and back to Specified the window retains the selections made with the Specified check boxes 188 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data Item Description The default is All Sort by Date Time Select ascending or descending order for displaying events by using the radio buttons The default is New event first Start Date Time Select the first event or an event of the specified time by using the radio buttons If you select Specified Time you can enter the start time Even after a switch to First Event and back to Specified Time the window retains the time data entered in Specified Time The default is First event The default for Specified Time is 2013 01 01 00 00 00 End Date Time Select the last event or an event of the specified time by using the radio buttons If you select Specified Time you can enter the last time Even after a swit
193. bes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration For bonding multiple NIC by using PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services GLS see PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Service Configuration and Administration Guide Redundant Line Control Function J2UZ 7781 Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface rev 01 hannel Emulex Corporation Saturn X Q MASTER SLAVE interface interface Notes To perform hot replacement in a system where a bonding device is installed design the system so that it specifies ONBOOT YES in all interface configuration files the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth files and the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg bond files regardless of whether the NIC to be replaced is a configuration interface of the bonding device An IP address does not need to be assigned to unused interfaces This procedure is for preventing the device name of the replacement target NIC from being changed after hot replacement If ONBOOT NO also exists the procedure described here may not work properly 65 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU 1 Confirm where the NIC is mounted Confirm the correspondence between PCI Address and interface name of NIC mounted in the IOU which is confirmed by above dp show IOU command Example When PCI Address is 0000 89 00 0
194. bes functions for checking the configuration and status of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server The functions are broken down by firmware or other software and by tool 9 1 MMB Web UI The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series unifies server management via the MMB Web UI The following lists the functions provided by the MMB Web UI For details on the functions see the reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN TABLE 9 1 Functions provided by the MMB Web UI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Displays the status of the whole system 1 2 1 System Status window Displays the events stored in the SEL System Event 1 2 2 System Event Log window Log of the MMB Displays logs related to Web UI and CLI settings and 1 2 3 Operation Log window operations Displays hardware problem information REMCS 1 2 4 Partition Event Log window notification target message Displays information related to the PRIMEQUEST 1 2 5 System Information window 2000 series system Sets the name of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system cabinet Sets an Asset Tag asset management number Displays a firmware version 1 2 6 Firmware Information window Sets a system configuration 1 2 7 System Setup window Controls the system power 1 2 8 System Power Control window Displays the LED status 1 2 9 LEDs window Displays the PSU status 1 2 10 Power Suppl
195. ble created in step 2 b Edit the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules to delete or comment out the entry lines of all the interface names and hardware addresses confirmed in the above step a The following example shows editing of the udev function rule file Example of descriptions in the file before editing PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 2c d4 44 1 44 0 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME etho 4 PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb 78 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 5 OU hot remove SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 2c d4 44 1 44 f1 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth1 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing In the example ethO was deleted and eth1 is commented out PCI device 0x8086 0x1521 igb SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2c d4 44 1 44 f1 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME etnh1 The Y at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Do this editing for all the interfaces listed in the table created in step 2 7 Reflect the edited rules in udev udevd reads the rules described in the rule f
196. but are not limited to nuclear reactor control aircraft flight control air traffic control mass transit control medical life support and missile launch control Customers shall not use the product for a safety critical application without guaranteeing the required level of safety Customers who plan to use the product in a safety critical system are requested to consult the Fujitsu sales representatives in charge Storage of accessories Keep the accessories in a safe place because they are required for server operation Adding optional products For stable operation of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server use only a Fujitsu certified optional product as an added option Note that the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server is not guaranteed to operate with any optional product not certified by Fujitsu Maintenance Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must not perform these tasks under any circumstances Otherwise electric shock injury or fire may result Newly installing or moving equipment Removing the front rear and side covers Installing and removing built in options Connecting and disconnecting external interface cables Maintenance repair and periodic diagnosis and maintenance Only Fujitsu certified service engineers should perform the following tasks on this product and the options provided by Fujitsu Customers must n
197. cal location segment number and bus number of target NIC Confirm the physical location segment number and bus number with step 1 at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Note In case of multi function card there are some cards that have same segment number same bus number and different function numbers In this case please perform Step 2 to Step 7 of follows respectively Confirm target NIC in Device Manager Confirm NIC with step 2 a at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Record IP address of target replaced NIC Open Command Prompt command ipconfig all and record information that is necessary to reconfigure IP address subnet mask and so on of NIC after replacement Open iSCSI initiator Click the Targets tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties window One of the targets displayed in Discovered targets is connected to the NIC to be replaced If you know which target select the target click the Devices button and proceed to step 10 If you do not know select any target click the Properties button and proceed to step 7 146 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI f iSCSI Initiator Properties Properties 147 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Proced
198. cation by executing the following command cat sys class net bondY bonding active slave If the displayed interface matches the SLAVE interface being replaced execute the following command to switch the current communication interface to another SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethZz ethZ Interface that composes bondY and does not perform hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX 5 Power off the PCI Express slot Forthe partition with Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm pcie slot number command on the shell of OS The PCI Express card is disabled and has become to be ready for removal The LED goes out Example Making the PCI Express slot with PCI Express slot number 20 power off opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm pcie20 This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Forthe partition without Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for the target slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the slot number confirmed in step 1 is shown at slot numbers in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the
199. ccess from external terminals is the management LAN For management LAN related settings for MMB access use the CLI or the Network Configuration menu in the Web Ul For details on the network configuration see 1 1 External Network Configuration The following lists the settings for the management LAN configuration Only a user with Administrator privileges can make management LAN related settings TABLE 1 5 Parts of the management LAN configuration Display Setting item Description Network Interface IP address and other settings for MMB access Virtual IP Address Virtual IP address In a dual MMB configuration the IP address is overtaken during MMB switching Host Name IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address MMB 0 MMB 1 IP Address Physical IP address of MMB 0 MMB 1 You set this IP address for MMB 0 1 MMB 1 mounted in the system Enable Disable setting Interface Name IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS optional Option It specifies the IP address of the DNS server used The default is Disabled Enable Disable setting IP Address DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 DNS Server 3 Maintenance IP Address Specifies the REMCS CE port The default is Disabled Enable Disable Management LAN Specifies duplication of the management LAN ports The default is Disabled Only the ports on the 0 side are enabled Enable Disable settin setting IP Address Subnet Mask SMTP Address Internal L
200. ce Mode Cancels Maintenance mode when Maintenance excludes Replace are finished Raid Drive Maintenance Mode Replace failure physical drives or recover degraded logical drives nes 3 Select PCI Box PCIC click Next 100 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST 2900E Active IMB 1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1400000 Status Normal tem Partition ex Administrat Aaintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Unit Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on C DUPCISIot C1OUPCIC CMP C PCI Box1O FANIO PSU CPCLBoxPCIO C PCI Box PEXC C SB BATTERY CPU DIMM Mezz PCISIot FBU Press renj 4 Select the radio button of PCI Box with the particular number click Next Example of operation for hot replacing PCI Express card of PCIC 1 mounted on PCI_Box 0 Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active IMB 1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1400000 Status Normal System Partitior Net k Config gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI_Box PCIC Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on fe PCLBoxsoPCICe0 1 OK 0 Ton 9PCI_Box 1 PCIC 0 11 Not present S PCI Box 2 PCIC 0 11 Not present PCI_Box 3 PCIC 0 11 Not present _Proious neal 5 Select the radi
201. ce Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first IF you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI_Box 0 PCIC 1 ae When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previous Next View Configuration Note Don t click Next Button before replacing PCI card About powering off PCIC slot the system administrator must perform 8 Replace target PCI card power on target PCIC slot and click Next button About powering on PCIC slot see Powering on and off PCI slots About powering on PCIC slot system Administrator will perform 126 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first If you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI Box PCIC 1 When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button View Configuration Note About powering on PCIC slot the system administrator must perform 9 Status updating menu will be opened Model PRIME
202. ce engineer will go to your premises on the next business day after the contact date The service charge including the technical fee parts costs and transportation expenses for each request depends on the product and work time Note that some products are outside the service range Confirm that we will be able to repair your product when you contact us 10 2 4 Finding out about abnormal conditions If a problem occurs in the system use the LEDs on the front of the device any report on the MMB Web UI windows and any e mail notification to understand the situation E mail notification requires settings made in advance Remarks If Part Number or Serial Number the content or information area in the MMB Web UI window displays Read Error contact a field engineer or your sales representative Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit LED display The following figure shows the LEDs located on the front panel of the device The Alarm LED indicates a problem inside the device If a problem occurs inside the device the Alarm LED goes on orange The Alarm LED stays off when the device is operating normally FIGURE 10 4 Alarm LED on the front panel of the device Q power Q Alarm Q Location O css As long as a problem remains inside the device the Alarm LED is on This indication does not change even if multiple problems have occurred Note that the
203. cedure 1 2 Log in to the server with Administrator privileges Click Control Panel System and Security System Advanced system settings Click Settings under Performance on the Advanced tab The Performance Options dialog box appears Click the Advanced tab FIGURE 10 17 Advanced tab of the dialog box Visual Effects Advanced Data Execution Prevention Processor scheduling Choose how to allocate processor resources Adjust for best performance of Programs Background services Virtual memory A paging file is an area on the hard disk that Windows uses as ifit were RAM Total paging file size for all drives 16384 MB 5 Click Change under Virtual memory The Virtual Memory dialog box appears 194 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data 10 11 FIGURE 10 18 Virtual Memory dialog box v Automatically manage paging file size for all drives Paging file size for each drive Drive volume Labtec System managed size No paging file Total paging file size for all drives Minimum allowed 16 MB Recommended 5586 MB Currently allocated 16384 MB Uncheck Automatically manage paging file size for all drives Drive specifies the drives on which paging files are created The selected drive under Drive of Paging file size for selected
204. ch to Last Event and back to Specified Time the window retains the time data entered in Specified Time The default is Last event The default for Specified Time is 2013 01 01 00 00 00 Number of events to Specify the number of events to display display The denominator represents the total number of events logged The specifiable maximum value is 3000 The default is 100 1 The item of Partition is displayed in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E It is not displayed in PRIMEQUEST 2800B Displaying details of an event Procedure 1 Click the Detail button of the event to display its details The System Event Log Detail window appears FIGURE 10 15 System Event Log Detail window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number SS 26 Status dv arin gt System gt System Event Log System Event Log Detail Help 0x17 1a026460795124 0x0004046201574545 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000030000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 o G o u L o o p L o o n i z 0x00000000000000cc Back Presous 2 Click the button of the chosen operation Back button The display returns to the System Event Log window Previous button The window displays the previous event according to the display order in the System Event Log window Note that the order of events displayed in the System Event Log window is n
205. chapter Usually these cards NICs and FC cards are used in a combination with duplication software Intel PROSET ETERNUS multipath driver This chapter describes the procedure needed for a NIC or FC card used in combination with such duplication software and the procedure needed for a NIC or FC card used alone Note The procedures include operations for related software Depending on the configuration the procedures may differ or require additional operations When doing the actual work be sure to see the related product manuals Overall flow This section shows the overall flow of hot plugging The following procedures are required for all types of cards for PCI Hot Plug support in the current version of Windows Server 2008 R2 2012 and 2012 R2 If an operation is required for a specific type of PCI Express card the operation is described in the relevant procedure The contents of an operation depend on the software to be combined with the card Replacement procedure Confirm the physical location segment number and bus number Disable PCI cards to be replaced by using Device Manager 1 2 3 Stop PCI cards to be replaced by using safely remove devices from computer 4 Replace PCI card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard Field Engineer s FE work 5 Confirm the replaced card by using Device Manager Note 120 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Ex
206. ck Connect button again Click the Browse button to display the image file selection window From the storage devices on the PC you can select those to be connected to the partition 24 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use FIGURE 1 23 Image file selection window Look In My Computer amp 3 Local Disk C amp i DVD RAM Drive D amp i Shared Documents amp My Documents File Name Files of Type ISO iso SO NRG nrg NRG v Cancel Items in image file selection window are listed below TABLE 1 13 Items in image file selection window Item Description Look In Displays the current search location File name Used to enter the device index letter e g E File of type Used to specify a file type Open Adds the selected device to the list Cancel Closes this window Below formats of image can be used for virtual media Floppy ima img CD DVD nrg iso HDD USB img Select the ISO image file and click the Select button Then the display returns to the Virtual Media window Click Connect CD DVD button in Virtual Media window to register the ISO image to target list of virtual media 25 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions
207. co FUJITSU FUJITSU Server PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Administration Manual C122 E175 01bEN Preface Preface This manual describes the functions and features of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series The manual is intended for system administrators For details on the regulatory compliance statements and safety precautions see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Safety and Regulatory Information C122 E171XA Errata and addenda for the manual The PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Errata and Addenda C122 E182EN provides errata and addenda for the manual Read the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Errata and Addenda C122 E182EN thoroughly in reference to the manual Organization of this manual This manual is organized as follows CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation CHAPTER 2 Operating System Installation Link CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 CHAPTER 5 Replacement of HDD SSD CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows CHAPTER 7 Backup and Restore CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control CHAPTER 9 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Appendix B Physical Mounting Locations and Port Numbers Appendix C Lists of External Interfaces Physical App
208. ction describes the setting of conditions to execute automatic partition restart 8 4 1 Setting automatic partition restart conditions Users with Administrators Operator privilege can set all the partitions however only users with Partition Operator privilege can set the permitted partitions Note Check the Cancel Boot Watchdog check box and execute Installation of operating system Starting in the single user mode Backup restoration by System cast Wizard Professional When the above mentioned operations are executed with the Boot Watchdog in the Enable status the specified action Stop rebooting and Power Off or Stop rebooting or Diagnostic Interrupt assert will be executed after repeating the operating system restart for specified number of times The number of retries to restart the operating System and the actions to be executed depend on the settings in the ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window of the MMB At that time Boot Watchdog can be forcibly set to Disable by checking the check box of Cancel Boot Watchdog and clicking the Apply button in the ASR Automatic Server Restart Control window The procedure of automatic restart condition setting of the partition is as follows 1 Click Partition Partition x ASR Control The ASR Control window appears 165 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions FIGURE 8 6
209. d for the device name Ifall the paths in a mounted disk become hidden when an FC card is hot replaced unmount the disk Then execute PCI hot plug FC card removal procedure 4 8 4 The procedure for removing an FC card and peripherals is as follows 1 Make the necessary preparations Stop access to the FC card by stopping applications or by other such means 2 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure See Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 3 Power off the PCI Express slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 4 Physically remove the target card Network card removal procedure Network card referred to below as NIC removal using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes the common PCI Express card removal procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration For bonding multiple NIC by using PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services GLS see PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Service Configuration and Administration Guide Redundant Line Control Function J2UZ 7781 110 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in
210. d DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME ethO0 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME eth10 112 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards 10 11 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in the file after editing The entries for the eth10 interface are commented out SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth0 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME eth10 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Do this editing for all the interfaces confirmed in step 2 Reflect the udev function rules Since rules are not automatically reflected in udev at the removal time take action to reflect the new rules in udev udevadm control reload rules If the removed interface includes any bonding interface delete the driver setting of the interface When removing a bonding interface be sure to delete the setting corresponding to the bonding interface and driver Ex
211. d For details on how to estimate the size required contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative b Check if the points restrictions are clear For detail see 3 2 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR Switch to the maintenance mode Insert the SB to be added into a free SB slot Check for any errors in the SB to be added Example How to check from the MMB Web UI a Open System gt SB gt SB n window b Check if the status of the Board Information is OK Check if the other statuses displayed in SB n window are OK d Open Partition gt Partition Configuration window e Check if the status of the SB for addition is a Free SB or Reserved SB The number of the SB for adding is noted down o Update the firmware of the SB for addition 4 2 2 Confirming the status of SB before SB hot add 1 Estimating how long times OS will take to process SB hot add Estimate how long times OS will take to process SB hot add and confirm that the estimated time does not exceed one hundred minutes If the estimated time exceeds one hundred minutes reduce the load of the system If SB hot add is performed in the system with high load timeout may occur while OS processes SB hot add because big performance of CPU is needed to initialize added memories For how to deal with when timeout occurs see 4 2 3 DR operation in SB hot add The time t when OS will take to process SB hot ad
212. d SB was incorporated in the partition in place of the faulty SB For details on the analysis procedure see 3 5 3 Checking the source partition configuration information when switching to a Reserved SB 2 Checkthe status Click System System Status Check the status in the System Status window 3 Stop the partition a Click Partition Power Control The Power Control window appears b Select Power Off from the Power Control of the relevant partition and click the Apply button 4 Checkthe configuration status of the partition Click Partition Partition Configuration check the configuration status of the partition in the Partition Configuration window 5 Incorporate the replacement SB a Click Partition Partition Configuration Add Unit button Add SB IOU to Partition window appears b Click the radio button of the replacement SB then click the Apply button The replacement SB will be incorporated into the partition 6 Restore the source Reserved SB to a Reserved SB again a Click Partition Partition Configuration Remove Unit button Remove the SB IOU from the Partition window appears b Click the radio button of the source Reserved SB then click the Apply button The source Reserved SB will be disconnected from the partition and will be in the free status c Click Partition Reserved SB Configuration Reserved SB Configuration window check the check box of the SB
213. d can be estimated by below equation where the unit is second t t t t3 t4 where ti the time when OS will take to recognize added resources t2 the time when the pre process of collaboration program is working ta the time when OS will take to activate added resources t4 the time when the post process of collaboration program is working The time t4 when OS will take to recognize added resources can be estimated by below equation ty 0 8 x M where M size of added memories GB unit The time t4 when OS will take to activate added resources can be estimated by below equation Py 1 tz 0 002 x M4 x M x ceil 1 where M size of added memories GB unit M total size of memory after SB hot add GB unit P the number of running process C the number of CPU before SB hot add 60 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 2 Hot add of SB Above ceil x expresses the ceiling function The ceil x is the smallest integer not less than real number x e g ceil 2 15 3 ceil 4 4 For how to get P and C see below Reference The estimation of the time t and t4 when collaboration program is working is equal to the sum of the time when each program registered as collaboration program in opt FJSVdp util user command will take to finish process For how to estimate how long time each collaboration program takes to finish process see
214. d look for the device which has same bus number you confirmed in step 1 File Edit View Port Discovery Batch Help R EI t Hosts Port Information Statistics Maintenance DHCHAP Target Mapping Driver Parameters Diagnostics Transceiver Data VPD wi WIN FKRSESR2TP p ds Port Attributes 3 Port 0 10080000C99E4445 Port WN 10000000C99E 4446 Driver Version 24016001 di vee Node WWI 20000006 99E 4446 Driver Name ebdc Fabric Name No Fabric Attachment Firmware Version 201A12 Boot Version 5 12312 Discovered Ports 0 Port FC 10 g Port Type n a PCI Function OS Device Name w Scsi Symbolic Node Name Emulex LPe12002 M8 FV201A12 0V274016 001 WIN OFKRSEGR2TP Supported Class of Service Class 3 Supported FCA Types 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port Status Link Status Link down Loop Map AL PA Description b See WWN and port number of target device Select Port WWN of target FC card in left pane and select port Information tab in right pane WWN is written at Port WWN in Port Attributes 139 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Wind 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging OWS File Edit View Port Discovery Batch Help Bese E Jp BE Port Attributes Hosts bel WIN FKRSESRZTP Supported FC4 Types Driver Version 274016001 Driver Nome Firmware Version Discovered Ports Port T
215. detailed gformation about each walt Not present Not present Click the icon displayed for an existing trouble spot to display a window showing the component status If Part Number or Serial Number the content or information area in the MMB Web UI window displays Read Error contact a field engineer or your sales representative You can view the component status and system event log SEL contents by selecting System System Event Log to open the System Event Log window The SEL information is important for an investigation so first click the Download button at the bottom of the window to save the information The information will be needed when you contact a field engineer or your sales representative For details on how to read system event log messages see Chapter 1 Message Overview in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN 181 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FIGURE 10 8 System event log display Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB O Part Number MC XXXAXXX Serial Number FOLIC Stars N gt System gt System Event Log System Event Log Hele gt sy I gt TU r T Pensione PE Sve Sams CDD OSFY Power OF In Progress Pez Svs Same Hamas Bethe COSFO3FF POST hme uum snb em anons 2 COSEOIFF Power On ia Progress 3 Perens BSS Sis Stats CosFOsFF Powe
216. details on SBx window see 1 2 15 DU menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Too Reference C122 E177EN Hot replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration This section describes the workflow of hot replacement of HDD or SSD with RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration when one HDD or SSD fails Remarks Step is performed by field engineers in charge of your system Copy back may run after rebuild has been completed 1 Replace the HDD or SSD with the Alarm LED on by using MMB Maintenance Wizard 2 Confirm whether a rebuild of the HDD or SSD has been already completed by using the below steps depending on whether a spare disk is set or not If not set a spare disk A rebuild is automatically performed to replaced HDD or SSD Then the Alarm LED of the HDD or SSD starts blinking Confirm whether a rebuild of replaced HDD or SSD has been already completed by MMB Web UI How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a SB Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN 116 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 5 Replacement of HDD SSD 5 2 Preventive replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware R
217. dev fioal 9 Confirm the serial number of the replaced PCI Express card 10 Register the serial number of the replaced PCI Express card in the pre allocate memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf Note After replacing the PCI Express card add the target serial number in the pre allocate memory in etc modprobe d iomemory vsl conf 11 Restart the partition opening system 3 4 Expansion of components This section describes how to add components The components and the conditions for maintaining the addition of each component are listed in the table below Some components cannot be added TABLE 3 12 Expandable components Component name AC power off AC power on AC power on AC power on Device stop All partitions off Target partition Target partition hot off hot on hot maintenance maintenance maintenance PSU_P PSU_S Expandable Not Not Expandable Not Expandable Expandable FANM FANU i x FANM SB Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable 2 CPU Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable DIMM Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable Mezzanine E DIMM Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable PCI Express card Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable FBU Expandable Expandable Expandable Not expandable HDD SSD 3 Expandable Expandable Expandable Expandable battery i E
218. dows installed When these workaround steps are executed restart is not requested when there is a switching to the Reserved SB due to SB failure 1 2 6 7 8 Shutdown the partition after completing the installation of Windows Remove one SB from the partition by using the MMB Web UI When there are multiple SBs any SB can be removed For details see Removal of SB and IOU of 3 4 1 Partition Configuration Setting in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Add the SB of the Reserved SB to the partition For details see Adding an SB IOU of 3 4 1 Partition Configuration Setting in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Power on the partition and start the Windows Log in with Administrator privilege After the message that the system must be restarted is displayed on the window follow the instructions and restart the system Shutdown the system after restarting the Windows has been completed Using the MMB Web UI remove the SB of the Reserved SB which was added in Step 3 Add the SB removed in Step 2 to the partition Notes on VMware When there is a switching to the Reserved SB in the partition running VMware the guest operating system may not start at the first restart after the switch over Set the guest operating system to automatically restart and the Blue Window Timeout items when setting Reserved SB in a partition running VMware For details on the se
219. drive is displayed Notes No dump files and paging files can be stored at the iSCSI connection destination during internal disk boot and SAN FC boot The file system for ReFS volumes cannot store paging files Select Custom size and enter a value in Initial size The specified size must be greater than the size of mounted memory plus 1 MB in order to acquire memory dumps normally The recommended size is approximately 1 5 times the size of mounted memory Notes Check Automatically manage paging file size for all drives Select System managed size Enter a value in Maximum size Specify a value that is the same as or larger than Initial size The recommended size is the same as Initial size Save settings Click Set under Paging file size for selected drive The settings are saved and Paging File Size of Drive displays the set values Click the OK button to close the Virtual Memory dialog box The message You must restart your computer to apply these changes appears Click the OK button to close the message box Click the OK button to close the Performance Options dialog box 195 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data 12 Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box 13 Restart the partition After the partition restart the settings take effect For Window
220. dware address of other interfaces by repeating the operation with the same command The following table lists examples of descriptions 77 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 5 OU hot remove TABLE 4 5 Hardware address description examples Interface name Hardware address Bus address Location ethO 20 d4 44 f1 44 f0 0000 89 01 0 Onboard 0 eth1 2c 04 44 11 44 11 0000 89 01 1 Onboard 1 eth2 00 19 99 d7 36 5f 0000 8f 00 0 PCI 0 3 Execute the higher level application processing required before NIC replacement Stop all access to the interface as follows Stop the application that was confirmed in step 2 as using the interface or exclude the interface from the target of use by the application 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 2 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations before deactivating the real interface sbin ifdown ethX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the SLAVE interface of a bonding device If the bonding device is operating in mode 1 use the following steps to exclude safely SLA
221. e 3 2 High availability configuration FIGURE 3 16 Status when there error has occurred in the memory memory capacity maintenance mode rese oT omena OSS SUMA EI as Cuaos2 OM MOET E Tuma a Ad LAS A XI RL im The patterns supported in the combination of memory mirror status and failed DIMM are listed in the table below DIMM 0C5 DIMM 0C4 DIMM 0C3 DIMM 0C2 DIMM 0C1 DIMM 0C0 TABLE 3 9 Combination of the memory mirror status and the failed DIMM Non Mirror Mirror RAS Mode Mirror mode before reboot during Places where the DIMM has failed Mirror mode after reboot Memory capacity after reboot Non Mirror part Partial Mirror 1 operation Mirror Keep Mode Full Mirror Mirror part Full Mirror 1 Reduction 1 Partial Mirror Mirror part Partial Mirror 1 Reduction 1 1 Reduction 1 46 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 3 Replacing components Mirror RAS Mode Mirror mode before reboot during Places where the DIMM has failed Mirror mode after reboot Memory capacity after reboot Non Mirror 1 operation Capacity Keep Full Mirror Mirror part Partial Mirror or No change 1 Mode Non Mirror 1 Partial Mirror Mirror part Partial Mirror or No change 1 Non Mirror part
222. e etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Confirm that the ATTR address and NAME items have the same definitions as in the above output Example ethO grep eth0 etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME ethO0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed You can always obtain the correct hardware address from the description in etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules regardless of whether the interface is incorporated in bonding Confirm the hardware address of other interfaces by repeating the operation with the same command The following table lists examples of descriptions TABLE 4 7 Hardware address description examples Interface name Hardware address Bus address Slot number ethO 00 06e 0c 70 c3 38 0000 0b 01 0 20 eth1 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 0000 0b 01 1 20 The above step is used in creating the correspondence table in step 13 Prepare a table here so that you can reference it later Note In a replacement due to a device failure the information in the table showing the correspondence between the interface and the hardware address bus address and slot number may be inaccessible depending on the failure condition We strongly recommend that a table showing the correspondence between the interface and the hardware add
223. e Memory Mirror RAS see Memory Mirror RAS of 8 2 4 43 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration Memory Operation Mode Description Memory Mirror Spare Mode Mode in which the Memory Spare is used Note The Memory Spare cannot be used when the Memory Mirror has been set 3 2 4 Memory Mirror In the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series the Mirror Mode and the Partial Mirror Mode are supported as the memory mirror in which the function with the CPU is used Full Mirror Partial Mirror can be selected from the MMB Web UI TABLE 3 7 Memory Mirror Mode Mirror type Description Full Mirror Memory Mirroring is executed in each CPU for all SBs included in a partition Partial Mirror 1 Memory Mirroring is executed in each CPU only for the Home SB included in a partition Memory Mirroring is not executed for an SB which is not the Home SB 1 The operation of both Full Mirroring and Partial Mirroring is the same when the partition is configured by one SB Note When configuring the partition with one SB the Memory Mirror may be deleted before and after the Reserved SB depending on the SB DIMM configuration of the Reserved SB For details Reserved SB setting rules of 3 2 2 Reserved SB Memory Mirror RAS This section describes the operation when there is an error in the DIMM in the Memory Mirror status The Memory operati
224. e PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Instructions server PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Describes how to use tools and software for system C122 E175ENEN Administration Manual administration and how to maintain the system component replacement and error notification PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Provides information on operation methods and settings C122 E177ENEN Tool Reference including details on the MMB SVAS and UEFI functions PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Lists the messages that may be displayed when a C122 E178EN Message Reference problem occurs during operation and describes how to respond to them PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Describes REMCS service installation and operation C122 E180EN REMCS Installation Manual PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Defines the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series related terms and C122 E179EN Glossary abbreviations Related manuals The following manuals relate to the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series You can access these manuals at the following site htto Awww fujitsu com global services computing server primequest htto manuals ts fujitsu com Contact your sales representative for inquiries about the ServerView manuals Title Description Manual code ServerView Suite ServerView Describes how to install and start ServerView Operations None Operations Manager Quick Manager in a Windows environment Installation Windows ServerView Suite ServerView Describes how to install and start ServerView Operations None
225. e Reserved SB switching The way how to synchronize the time to NTP server is shown below When using Linux do not specify NTPDATE OPTIONS B in etc sysconfig ntpd file in the NTP setting When using the Windows Server in a workgroup environment execute the following procedures 1 Setthe NTP using the Date and Time or w32tm command of the control panel Example w32tm config manualpeerlist time synchronization destination For details see Help by executing the w32tm command Start Server Manager from the task bar Select Configuration Services From the service list right click Windows Time and select Properties Specify Auto Delayed start as Startup Type of the General tab Click the OK button and close the dialog box oar ON When using the VMware use the NTP function of the guest operating system Windows or Linux When using the NTP function of the guest operating system Windows or Linux comply with the above rules The way how to update the time periodically by operating system before Reserved SB switching is shown below f Red Hat Enterprise Linux runs on the partition the time can be taken over by issuing hwclock systohc command periodically after Reserved SB switching If Windows Server or VMware ESXi runs on the partition any setting on OS is not needed 42 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability con
226. e as follows The storage connection is established on a multipath using DM MP Device Mapper Multipath or ETERNUS multidriver EMPD To replace more than one iSCSI card one card at a time will be replaced A single NIC is configured as one interface 113 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards Work to be performed before iSCSI NIC removal For iSCSI NIC hot replacement be sure to follow the procedure below when performing Step 3 of the NIC removal procedure in 4 8 4 Network card removal procedure 1 Perform the work for suppressing access to the iSCSI connection interface a Confirm the state of multiple path by DM MP 1 or EMPD 2 b Use the iscsiadm command to log out from the path ign through which the iSCSI card to be replaced is routed and disconnect the session Example which confirms the state of session before disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 tcp 2 192 168 2 66 3260 3 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 Example which logout path going through a NIC to be replaced sbin iscsiadm m node T iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage System eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 p 192 168 2 66 3260 logout c Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target
227. e begins The default MMB Configuration file name for the backup is as follows MMB save date _ MMB version dat Restoring MMB configuration information 1 Confirm that the system has stopped completely 2 Select the backup MMB Configuration file stored on the Remote PC Then click the Restore button File transfer to the MMB begins A restore confirmation dialog box appears when the file transfer is completed FIGURE 7 5 Restore confirmation dialog box Windows Internet Explorer xi MMB Configuration File Information 1 SavedDate 2010 03 02 x MMB Version 1 19 3 Torestore MMB configuration information click the OK button To cancel restoration click the Cancel button 156 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 1 Power On and Power Off the Whole System 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control This section describes the startup shutdown and the power control in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Power On and Power Off the Whole System This section describes the power on and power off operations which are supported by the system The power control of the whole system is operated from the System Power Control window of the MMB FIGURE 8 1 System Power Control window Modet PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMBso Part Number MCXXXXXXX FU Serial Number se s States oven si LA rrr t gt System System Power Control System Power Control
228. e i td enr dt ed dede i D edt d dd eR HM eR ee 172 10 1 4 Maintenance of the MMB 5 5 1 tr tercio tc fte tts rie tec et SA nnd sie nt d te re 173 10 1 5 Maintenance ofthe PCI BOX PEXU 2 32 2 etri oet tu eo eaae 173 10 1 6 Maintenance policy preventive maintenance essent nente nennen nnne nenne nennen enne nennen 174 10 1 7 REMCS service Overview sans iana Ge ter ee Deo UH ARE eed HE ete er ir ea Le d Ae e aa 174 10 1 8 gizi esi ecc DD 174 10 2 TrOUDIGSHOOTING E L 175 10 2 1 Troubleshooting OVerVIgW 5 2 3 Gert dene f o e deena rU i e Fee i p Decet Cete en eed 175 10 2 2 Items to confirm before contacting a sales repreSentatiVe eeesessesscesessesesseesesseseseeeseeseasatenseeseaeatenseeseatatenseeaeaneneeees 177 10 2 3 Sales representative Contact neret net e nt ne n i e e Te n He Pe P Eee 177 10 2 4 Finding out about abnormal conditions eese nennen tenerent nnne nennen enne 178 10 2 5 Investigating abnormal conditions aei eese seen tente tnn tn theta ttn te tete tette teet tent tete tenth rehenes 180 10 2 6 Checking inito errors in detall reete teta ee Certe o te t dede a CR e ect deett 183 10 2 7 Problems related to the main unit or a PCI BOX ssssese eene tnter 184 10 2 8 MMB related problerris Hr ep et pP RHEIBEDBEU Rai Piin 184 xiv C122 E175 01EN
229. e name different from the one automatically assigned by the system Normally there is no requirement on the name specified for a new interface To use an interface name other than the one automatically assigned by the system follow the instructions in step 14 of the NIC replacement procedure in 4 6 4 Network card replacement procedure The contents differ slightly depending on whether the interface is a single NIC interface or a SLAVE interface of the bonding configuration For a single NIC interface Example DEVICE ethl lt Specified interface nam confirmed in step g NM_CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 BROADCAST 192 168 16 255 IPADDR 192 168 16 1 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 NETWORK 192 168 16 0 ONBOOT yes TYPE Ethernet SLAVE interface of the bonding configuration Example DEVICE ethl lt Specified interface nam confirmed in step g NM CONTROLLED no BOOTPROTO static HWADDR 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 MASTER bondY SLAVE yes ONBOOT yes Note Adding the bonding interface itself also requires the MASTER interface configuration file of the bonding configuration To add a bonding interface configure the bonding interface driver settings If the bonding interface has already been installed execute the following command to check the descriptions in the configuration file and confirm the setting corresponding to
230. e switching to is detected When a PCI Express Lane Speed degradation on a SB is detected When a CPU core degradation is detected Remarks Set a value which is not 0 in Number of Restart Tries of the ASR Control window as the frequency of automatic partition restart for switching to the Reserved SB For details on the ASR Control window see 8 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions Active Reserved SB switching process The process of switching of the Active Reserved SB 1 is described in this section 41 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration 1 SB which is incorporated in a partition and is also set as the Reserved SB in another partition When the partition that incorporates the Reserved SB is powered off the corresponding SB will be disconnected When the partition that incorporates the Reserved SB is powered on the firmware instructs power off for the corresponding partition However as cases in where the partition is not powered off have been assumed if a partition is not powered off after the firmware has instructed power off for a partition and the forced shutdown time has lapsed Force Power Off is issued the power of the partition is forcefully disconnected and the corresponding SB is disconnected The forced shutdown time of 0 99 minutes can be set from the MMB Web Ul When SBs have been set as Reserved SB in multiple partitions a
231. e target and click the Apply button If there are multiple reserve targets select them simultaneously and click the Apply button 3 5 3 Checking the source partition configuration information when switching to a Reserved SB This section describes the method of checking the source partition configuration information when there is a switch to a Reserved SB Note Checking the source partition configuration information is presumed basically from the SEL information output by the MMB but it need not necessarily be uniquely determined It should be determined from the operation status of the partition during Reserved SB switching A case where the partition and a Reserved SB have been set is given below SB c of Partition R is set as the Reserved SB of Partition P and Partition Q TABLE 3 13 Partition setting before switching Partition SB a b C Partition P O Partition Q O Partition R O O Indicates the partition setting status TABLE 3 14 Reserved SB setting before switching Partition SB a b C Partition P O Partition Q O Partition R O Indicates the status of the Reserved SB When there is a fault in SB a and SB a is switched to Reserved SB c the SB that configures the partition changes as follows Partition P SB a gt Partition P SBfc Partition Q SB b gt Partition 40 SB b Partition R SB 4c gt Partition 4R The status tr
232. e the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX To remove the interfaces including the bonding device deactivate them collectively by executing the following command sbin ifdown bondY 5 Power off the PCI slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Remove the NIC from the PCI Express slot Remove the interface configuration file Delete the configuration files of all the interfaces confirmed in step 2 by executing the following command rm etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethX When deleting a bonding device also delete the related bonding items ifcfg bondY files 8 Editthe settings in the udev function rule file The entries of the interface assigned to the removed NIC still remain in the udev function rule file letc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules Leaving the entries will affect the determination of interface names for replacement cards or added cards in the future For this reason delete or comment out those entries The following example shows editing of the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules In this example the file is edited when the eth10 interface is removed Example of descriptions in the file before editing SUBSYSTEM net ACTION ad
233. ear the dialog box that displays the JViewer information You cannot operate the video redirection in the meantime In such a case please wait a while for the dialog box to appear or stop the javaw exe task in task manager and then restart the video redirection Server Information Display information of server 1 Set mouse mode to Hide mouse mode when operate LSI WebBIOS since action of cursor in LSI WebBIOS is adjusted to actual action of your mouse cursor C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use When you use two displays to operate LSI WebBIOS in Legacy Mode use primary display of monitor 1 If you set to Hide mouse mode in secondary display of monitor 2 cursor does not run Even if you set to Hide mouse mode it is no problem to use primary display and operate UEFI 2 Power menu is shown in only PRIMEQUEST 2800B It is not shown in other models Sometimes you cannot operate any power operations because power button menu is grayed out In such case reconnect the video redirection to select power menu button or perform the power operation by Power Control window of MMB Web UI TABLE 1 10 Tool Bar menu in Video redirection window Tool bar Description Resume Redirection Release pause of Video redirection window Pause Redirection Perform pause of Video redirection w
234. ected However the entries of a NIC are not automatically 93 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards 10 11 12 deleted even if the NIC is removed Leaving the entries of the removed NIC may have the following impact The interface names defined in the entries of the removed NIC cannot be assigned to the replacement NIC or an added NIC For this reason delete or comment out the entries of the removed NIC from the udev function rule file a Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address in the table created in step 2 b Edit the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules to delete or comment out the entry lines of all the interface names and hardware addresses confirmed in the above step 1 The following example shows editing of the udev function rule file Example of descriptions in the file before editing PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 ATTR type 1 X KERNEL eth NAME eth0 PCI device Ox 0x e1000 SUBSYSTEM net ACTION add DRIVERS Y ATTR address 2 00 0e 0c 70 c3 39 ATTR type 1 KERNEL eth NAME eth1 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Example of descriptions in
235. ecute the following command to check the descriptions in the configuration file and confirm the setting corresponding to the bonding interface and driver Example Description in etc modprobe d bonding conf grep 1 bonding etc modprobe d etc modprobe d bonding conf Edit the file that describes the setting and delete the setting of the removed bonding interface alias bondY bonding Delete bondY Name of the removed bonding interface Note There are no means to dynamically remove the MASTER interface bondY of the bonding configuration If you want to remove the entire bonding interface you can disable the bonding configuration and remove all the SLAVE interfaces but the MASTER interface itself remains Execute the higher level application processing required after NIC removal Perform the necessary post processing such as changing application settings or restarting an application for the operations performed for the higher level applications in step 3 4 8 5 Hot removal procedure for iSCSI NIC When performing hot replacement of NICs used for iSCSI connection use the following procedures 4 8 1 Common removal procedures for all PCI Express cards 4 8 2 PCI Express card removal procedure in detail 4 8 3 FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure A supplementary explanation of the procedure follows Prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot removal The prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement ar
236. edirection 5 Exit video redirection The following shows an example of the Video Redirection window FIGURE 1 7 Video Redirection window m JViewer MMB2PILOT2 iRMCFOCOCE 0 fps E Dashboard WELCOME TO SERVER MANAGER mnfigure this IC ROLES AND SERVER GROUPS Ell Windows Server 2012 R2 Only Actual Size option of Window Size option caa be enabled for the current host resolution setting TABLE 1 9 Menu Bar in Video redirection window Menu Bar Description Video 15 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use Menu Bar Description Pause Redirection Perform pause of Video redirection window Resume Redirection Release pause of Video redirection window Refresh Video Refresh Video redirection window Low Bandwidth Mode Turn ON Host Display Video Show video operation on host monitor Turn OFF Host Display Show video operation on host monitor Set bits per pixel bpp of Video redirection window Normal Set Normal 8 bpp Set 8 bpp 8 bpp B amp W Set 8 bpp monochrome 16 bpp Set 16 bpp Capture Screen Capture Video redirection window The screen is preserved into terminal PC in jpeg format Full Screen Maximize Video redirection window It is required that client and host are the same resolution Start Record
237. edures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data Memory dump type Minimum memory dump Memory dump file size 32bit windows 128 KB 64bit windows 256 KB Create new file Automatic memory dump Depends on memory space during system operation max 8TB Overwrite 2 1 In a system using the Memory Mirror function it is half the size of the mounted physical memory 2 The existing file is overwritten by default You can change this setting to not overwrite the dump file However unlike the minimum memory dump no new dump file would be created in such cases Notes Be sure to reserve enough free space on the HDD SSD before acquiring a memory dump Select the optimum settings for system operation by taking the following into account The causes of some problems may not be identified because kernel memory dumps do not record user mode information The time taken to create a complete memory dump is proportional to the memory size and the down time before a system restart is longer Also the saved dump file requires freer disk space The memory dump file cannot be stored in the iSCSI connection destination However only when the paging file is arranged on the iSCSI boot disk it is possible to store it in booting it iSCSI Memory dump configuration methods The methods of configuring memory dumps are described below For Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012R2 Configure the memory dump file i
238. eges of the partition power on operation see 1 1 WEB UI Menu List in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 TABLE 8 1 Power on method and power on unit Power on method Power on unit Entire Power on unit Single Remarks partition partition MMB Web UI MMB CLI Power on is posssible Power on is posssible Scheduled operation Power on is not possible Power on is posssible Automatic operation Wake On LAN WOL Power on is not possible Power on is posssible Corresponding partition unit which includes IOU 8 2 3 Types of Power off Method of Partition The three methods to power off the partition are as follows 1 Shutdown from the operating system Recommended Shutdown the operating system by using the operating system commands When powering off the partition perform the shutdown from the operating system For the operating system shutdown commands refer to the manual of each operating system 2 Powering off of the partition using the MMB Web UI window or the MMB CLI The power can be turned off by the Web window operation of an external terminal or the MMB CLI In such operations all partitions can be powered off or a partition unit can be powered off 3 Powering off a partition by a scheduled operation A partition can be powered off by a scheduled operation Automatic operation function A partition unit can be automatically powered off by registering the powering of
239. ement for FRU management target components Serial No part No product name etc System information management and backup by FRU Log management Log collection Log collection and generation management by MMB Log clear MMB log clear Firmware management Generation management Management at one generation Version display Overall version display Firmware update Batch firmware update in Web UI CLI Version matching between SBs by MMB BIOS BMC SB version confirmation at power off Configuration setting information management Configuration setting information save and restore Save and restoration of MMB UEFI REMCS information Maintenance guidance Maintenance wizard Component replacement procedure instructions on Web Ul Failure cause search Remote maintenance Internal log trace MMB BNC internal log acquisition Dump function MMB core dump sadump Hardware log CPU chip set hardware log REMCS REMCS Hardware failure information notification System configuration information notification 202 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 1 7 Security functions A 1 5 Redundancy functions TABLE A 5 Redundancy functions operation Minor item Description Network Management LAN Management LAN duplication switching duplication Power supply Dua
240. emote storage devices This issue does not occur when only one USB device is used Example One of your remote storage devices is a USB device and the other is an iso image If your terminal is running on Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 you can avoid this issue by applying the hotfix from KB 974711 For details see the Microsoft Knowledge Base If your terminal is running on Windows XP Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 use only one USB device For more information related to Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 see the Microsoft Knowledge Base The following shows a diagram of the connection configuration for remote storage FIGURE 1 21 Configuration of virtual media connection BMC LAN Processor i gt gt a ie a Video memory Terminal 1 USB Mass Storage emulation No Description 1 USB Mass Storage emulation To recognize and display the devices that can be connected remotely select Virtual Media Wizard from the Media menu in the Video Redirection window To recognize CD drives and DVD drives as devices that can be connected remotely the drives must already have media inserted in them 23 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use FIGURE 1 22 Virtual Media window 1
241. ems Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Other company names and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Trademark indications are omitted for some system and product names in this manual Notation This manual uses the following fonts and symbols to express specific types of information Font or symbols Meaning Example italics Title of a manual that you should refer to See the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Installation Manual C122 E174EN Window names as well as the names of Click the OK button buttons tabs and drop down menus in windows are enclosed in brackets Notation for the CLI command line interface The following notation is used for commands Command syntax Command syntax is represented as follows Variables requiring the entry of a value are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt Optional elements are enclosed in brackets Options for optional keywords are grouped in stroke separated lists enclosed in brackets Options for required keywords are grouped in stroke separated lists enclosed in braces Command syntax is written in a box Remarks The command output shown in the PDF manuals may include line feeds at places where there is no line feed symbol X atthe end of the line Notes on notations fyou have a comment or request regarding this manual or if you find any part of this m
242. en the interface names before and after the NIC replacement From the interface information created before and after the NIC replacement in steps 2 and 11 confirm the correspondence between the interface names before replacement and the new interface names a Confirm the correspondence between the bus address and interface name on each line in the table created in step 2 b Likewise confirm the correspondence between the bus addresses and interface names in the table created in step 11 Match the interface names to the same bus addresses before and after the NIC replacement d Inthe table created in step 11 enter values corresponding to the interface names before and after the NIC replacement TABLE 4 9 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement 15 Interface name After replacement Hardware address Bus address Slot number Before replacement eth1 gt ethd 00 0e 0c 70 c3 40 0000 0b 01 0 20 etho eth1 00 0e 0c 70 c3 41 0000 0b 01 1 20 If an interface name is switched before and after the NIC replacement make the interface name correspond to the same bus address as before the NIC replacement by using the following procedure Note Confirm that the interface name is the same before and after the NIC replacement Then proceed to step 15 a Power off the PCI Express slot again Repeat the process done in step 5 to power off the PCI Express
243. endix D Physical Locations and BUS Numbers of Built in O and PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers Appendix E PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Cabinets Link Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions Appendix H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Appendix I Windows Shutdown Settings Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card Appendix K Software Link Appendix L Failure Report Sheet Appendix M Information of PCI Express card C122 E175 01EN Preface Revision History Edition Date Revised location type 1 Description 01 2014 02 18 1 Chapter section and item numbers in the Revised location column refer to those in the latest edition of the document However a number marked with an asterisk denotes a chapter section or item in a previous edition of the document C122 E175 01EN Preface Product operating environment This product is a computer intended for use in a computer room environment For details on the product operating environment see the following manual PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Hardware Installation Manual C122 HO007EN Safety Precautions Alert messages This manual uses the following alert messages to prevent users and bystanders from being injured and to prevent property damage personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly This indicates a hazardous
244. ent 1 Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm IOU command on the shell of OS The IOU to be removed will turn off Example Turning off the IOU 3 opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm IOU3 2 Login to MMB console as administrator 3 Execute hotremove command on MMB console Example removing IOU 3 from partition 1 hotremove partition 1 IOU 3 quiet 4 Pulling the IOU out from the slot of cabinet For replacing IOU itself insert PCI Express card mounted on old IOU to new one For replacing expanding or removing PCI Express card on the IOU do it now Inserting IOU to the slot of the cabinet Execute hotadd command on MMB console Example Adding IOU 3 to partition 1 hotadd partition 1 IOU 3 quiet 7 Execute opt FUSVdp util sbin dp stat IOU command A list of IOU included in the partition is shown Check that added IOU is shown Example adding IOU 3 69 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU opt FJSVdp util sbin dp stat IOU IOUO empty IOU1 empty IOU2 empty IOU3 offline IOU added to partition is shown as offline state because it is power off state at this time Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp add IOU command on the shell of OS The IOU to be removed will turn on Example turning on IOU 3 opt FJSVdp util sbin dp add I0U3 4 3 3 Operation after IOU hot replacement NIC
245. ent firmware version it is not necessary to update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version If the firmware version of new FC card is not coincident with that of the FC card which had been replaced current firmware version update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version For how to update the firmware version see firmware update manual for fibre channel card Note If you cannot confirm the firmware version of the FC card before replacing due to the fault of the FC card check the firmware version of the FC card which is same type as the faulty one to update firmware version 9 Start ETERNUS Multipath Manager and place all the replaced devices online Confirm that the devices are normally incorporated with the multipath driver 144 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI ETERNUS Multipath Manager OE x File Tools Help Fault list O Status Machine name Unit name E wsosxes Disk Number 2ndPath 3rd Path LUNO Disk1 Offline Active LUNT1 Disk2 Offline Active LUN2 Disk3 Offline Active Auto Path Check ON Auto Path Recovery ON 10 Confirm replaced FC card by using Device Manager Open Device Manager and confirm that the target device is recognized correctly Note As the follow right click target device in Device Manager if there are Enable in displayed menu chec
246. ente tente tente ttn tette tente tente tente ttn teen neeaae 11 TABLE 1 7 Maximum number of connections using the remote operation function eene 13 TABLE 1 8 List of video redirection function s eeseesesese nente nente tente tnn te ttnte tente tenti tente ttn tete nte te nti te nte tentes tton 13 TABLE 1 9 Menu Bar in Video redirection windOW seen nennen nennen tenentes 15 TABLE 1 10 Tool Bar menu in Video redirection windOw eene nennen nennen nnne 18 TABLE 1 11 Status Bar in Video redirection windOwW seen nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne tentent tette entes 18 TABLE 1 12 Buttons in Virtual Media windOW eese tne enne nette tenete entente nennen 24 TABLE 1 13 Items in image file selection windOW essent nennen tenerent nennen 25 TABLE 3 1 Configuration rules for partition components essent tenerent tentent tette ttn tette tente tentent 28 TABEE 3 2 Applicable criteria ec t tt ren tt td etn auus 33 TABLES SDR Suppe d IlISE ir Ha P REGERE nsec rie ERES cete ie ecu tes iei SNES EENE 34 TABLE 3 4 Memory Operation Mode before and after Reserved SB switching when a partition is configured from one SB 37 TABLE 3 5 Operational restrictions when switching to a Reserved SB essent tenentes 43 TABLE 3 6 Overview of Memo
247. equired for the selections to become effective O Performance Mode Normal Mode O Partial Miror Mode O Full Mirror Mode O Spare Mode mil Mirror Keep Mode Mirror Keep Mode Capacity Keep Mode current status PCI Segment Mode On board LAN Mode current statas Enable WOL enabled Enable WOL enabled O Enable WOL disabled O Disable Apply Cancel gt Item Description Dynamic Reconfiguration current status Setting status of the current DR function Enable Disable setting Dynamic Reconfiguration function Enable Disable setting Enable Disable Default 58 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 2 Hot add of SB 4 1 2 dp Command Package Install Uninstall This section describes the install uninstall of the dp command package The dp command can be applied using the SVIM application wizard When installing after building the system procure the package from Fujitsu Web download site and install following the procedure below Common install uninstall gt Use FJSVdp util RHEL lt Version number gt x x x x x86_64 tar gz The file name for the RHEL6 dp command package is FUSVdp util RHEL6 x x x x x86_64 tar gz the following files are stored FJSVdp util RPMS FJSVdp util RHEL6 x x x x noarch rpm FJSVdp util SRPMS FJSVdp util RHEL6 x x x x noarch rpm FJSVdp util DOC README ja_JP EUC txt
248. er specifications For the appropriate procedures see the respective manuals Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard This item describes Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card PCIC by Maintenance Wizard Below works are performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 1 Start Maintenance Wizard menu by MMB Web UI and display Maintenance Wizard view 2 Select Replace Unit and click Next Model PRIMEQUEST AGWeMMBE Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Notice Maintenance screen can only be used by one user at time Select the type of maintenance activity to perform Maintena bz Replace Unit Replaces a failed unit or replaces a unit to prevent failure C Enter Maintenance Mode Sets only Maintenance mode when Maintenance excludes Replace are performed C Exit Maintenance Mode Cancels Maintenance mode when Maintenance exchides Replace are finished Raid Drive Maintenance Mode Replace failure physical drives or recover degraded logical drives 8 Select PCI Box PCIC click Next Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJiTsU Serial Number JC12450010 Status AV arsine System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard
249. er version in LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration T Controller Configuration EFI Driver Version 4 After confirming version select LSI SAS2 MPT Controller HII Configuration Application and press Enter key 5 Select Controller Management in Configuration Options window and press Enter key FIGURE J 16 Configuration Options window Confiyuraliun Oplious 6 Select View Controller Properties in Controller Management window and press Enter key 249 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card FIGURE J 17 Controller Management window Controller Management 7 Check firmware version in View Controller Properties window FIGURE J 18 View Controller Properties window Controller Management gt View Controller Properties Note Press Esc key sometimes and go back to top menu J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card Below steps show how to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card Note Firmware and UEFI driver of FC card have to be same one within a partition If there is a FC card with different version from that of other FC cards update firmware version and driver version of the FC card to the version of other FC cards in a partition 250 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 3
250. ere R 5 Windows Windows Server 2012 Windows Windows Server 2008 Linux RHEL6 RHEL Oracle Linux Oracle Linux 6 VMware vSphere 5 x VMware 5 VMware 5 x ESXi ESXi 5 ESXi 5 x VMware R ESXi TM 5 ix C122 E175 01EN Preface Formal product name Abbreviation Novell R SUSE R LINUX Enterprise Server 11 Service Pack 3 SLES11 SP3 Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Windows Server are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Linuxis a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Red Hat the Shadowman logo and JBoss are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the U S and other countries ntel Intel logo Intel Inside Intel Inside logo Intel Atom Intel Atom Inside Intel Core Core Inside Intel vPro vPro Inside Celeron Celeron Inside Itanium Itanium Inside Pentium Pentium Inside Xeon Xeon Phi Xeon Inside and Ultrabook are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and other countries Ethernetis a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd in Japan and is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp in the United States and other countries VMware is a trademark or registered trademark of VMware Inc in the United States and other countries Novell and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server are trademarks of Novell Inc Xenis a trademark or registered trademark of Citrix Syst
251. ere see D 2 Correspondence between PCI Slot Mounting Locations and Slot Numbers PCI Express slot to check the mounting location and see also B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to identify the physical mounting location corresponding to the PCI Express slot number You can confirm that it matches the mounting location of the operational target NIC 2 Collect information about interfaces on the same NIC For a NIC that has more than one interface you will need to deactivate all the interfaces on the NIC Use the following procedure to check each interface that has the same bus address as that confirmed in step 1 Then make a table with information including the interface name hardware address and bus address Note Collect the following information even if the NIC has only one interface QConfirm the correspondence between the bus address and interface name Execute the following command and confirm the correspondence between the bus address and interface name Example The bus address is 0000 0b 01 ls l sys class net device grep 0000 0b 01 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 X sys class net eth0 devic gt 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 0b 01 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 sys class net ethl devic 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 050 01 1 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed The following table shows the correspondence betwee
252. ese netten nnn nnn nnne tnnt tn snnt ekeit itni ie 218 F 1 2 PSU racial A ete rch aA ETT ETETA TETTETETT RETT 218 F 1 3 FANU ees Aa ace P ea vg aa ee even a Weite 219 p EE 219 F 1 5 jo ie H 219 F 1 6 POI Express Slokof IOU 2 ecce tetro ace REI ee a diete eni dee nde dg te dese toi nh te de RT dee eed 220 F 1 7 DUE E cuu Mm UII 220 F 1 8 HDD SSD Ses tteht E DEEP IMEI MEM MM EM 220 XV C122 E175 01EN Preface Fe ES RNIMBEE EEE chas sh tae etu LL LL LUUD LM ILU 221 F 1 10 LAN ioni Ep dd ua lip oo ad Se Oo ASO pave 221 F 1 11 OP Lena a ea aa aa aaa at Ea et 222 F 1 12 PGI BOX qu E 222 F 1 13 PGI Express slotin PGI BoX nace canadienne edn aac ananawinaanaatenitanandnanunataneneinin ae 222 F 1 14 IO PSU iui detti ele eiui Da D idea Ginsu pain iae Si aima I aet lei 223 F 1 15 e 223 F2 LED Mounting Locations 3 6440 e Ee e UD A ee Seed 223 F3 EDU MEI 225 FA Button dnd Switch ET DL 228 Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions esee eese nente nnne tnt ntntentnte tete treten tette tnter te tnter te tete nnns 229 G 1 dE 229 G2 DIMMs T C Not 229 G 3 Configuration when using 100 V PSU eesessesessesestesesesessesees
253. esesseseenesesaesessesesseeeesesesseeesseeesaeensseseeseseeaeeesaeeeeaeeeeaseneaeeteaseteaeens 237 G4 Available intemal VO Orte otia oett at acta dt ditt ette ht dence totae itt ttti 237 G 5 Legacy BIOS Gompatibllity COM tote teet ec tette et trei teet c t tee ta o e e n ina 237 G 6 Rack Mouritlng eite ee D OU d uale d s etie ic die dieses 237 G 7 a rzlFz nilo ass TFI ou ED 237 G 8 NIC Network Interface Card cerent etichette tette pea reat darte hcec epe 237 Appendix H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series x 239 H 1 MIB Tree Str ct res ec tent t tet eere eoe tate cena ies 239 H 2 MIB File Contents 240 Appendix Windows Shutdown Settings 241 I1 Shutdown From MMB Web Ul us zu we a 1 241 Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card E oh ws 242 J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card s we 242 J 2 How to confirm firmware version of SAS card sss a 247 J 3 How to confirm firmware version and UEFI driver version of FC card is 250 J 3 1 How to confirm firmware version for FC card made by Qlogic gu us wn 251 J 3 2 How to confirm firmware version for FC card made by Emulex Appendix K Software Link essent tentent tentnentnnns Appendix L F
254. et unit Source Target source CPU DIMM Chipset Voltage Temperature Other Test E Mail button Sends test e mail Video redirection remote storage network settings Partition Console The video redirection remote storage network relays traffic through the MMB Redirection Setup menu so the BMC IP address is not seen by users Users access the system via the management LAN of the MMB Here specify the IP address used for access by the video redirection client Java applet The MMB handles address conversion between the specified address and BMC IP address 1 3 3 1 Only PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E can have two MMBs PRIMQUEST 2800B can have only one MMB The settings of the management LAN on the partition side are made on the operating system These are required to access SVS from a management PC on the management LAN SVS also communicates with the MMB via the management LAN to monitor and to switch cluster nodes in the PRIMECLUSTER linkage To the NIC to be used for the management LAN the LAN port on IOU or the network card mounted in the PCI Box is assigned Following is used for Management LAN Onboard LAN ports in IOU PCI express card in IOU or PCI Box The subnet of the management LAN shares the virtual IP address and the physical address of the MMB which are specified by Web UI CLI on the MMB The management LAN and production LAN can be configured in the same subnet In such case an IP address is assigned to b
255. ettings l1 1 1 Shutdown From MMB Web UI Appendix Windows Shutdown Settings This appendix describes how to set arbitrarily Windows to shut down Shutdown From MMB Web UI Windows shutdown from the MMB Web UI requires ServerView Agent For details on how to set ServerView Agent contact the distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative 241 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card This section explains how to confirm the firmware of I O device J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card You can confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card by WebBIOS and ServerView RAID Note Below figures are sample window Contents such as version shown in figures may differ from that of actual windows in your system Confirming by WebBIOS 1 Select Force boot into EFI Boot Manager from Boot Selector in Power Control window of MMB Web Ul Partition is powered on and Boot Manager front page appears FIGURE J 1 Boot Manager front page 1 2 Select Boot Manager and press Enter key Boot Manager window appears 242 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card FIGURE J 2 Boot Manager fro
256. f time in advance by a scheduled operation function 8 2 4 Powering Off Partition Units The units that can be powered off and how to power off a partition unit is shown below For details on the operation privileges for powering off partitions see 1 1 Menu list of WEB UI in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 158 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 2 Partition Power on and Power off TABLE 8 2 Power on method and Power on unit 8 2 5 8 2 6 Power off method Power on unit All Power on unit Single partition Remarks partitions MMB Web UI MMB Power off is Power off is possible CLI possible Schedule operation Power off is not Power off is not possible Automatic operation possible Notes In the following cases confirm the details according to 10 2 Troubleshooting If the error recurs contact your sales representative or field engineer Before contacting confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed on the main unit Until the problem is solved do not execute Reset Force Power Off for the partition When Power Off Reset or Force Power Off is executed for partition or when shutting down from the operating system the MMB Web UI Information area status changes to Error When the MMB Web UI displays the status of each component Read Error will be displayed in the Part number and Serial
257. face NIC addition procedure This section describes the procedure for hot plugging only a network card Note When adding multiple NICs be sure to add them one by one If you do this with multiple cards at the same time the correct settings may not be made 1 Confirm the existing interface names To confirm the interface names execute the following command Example ethO is the only interface on the NIC sbin ifconfig a ethO Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 38 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 106 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards Lo Link encap Local Loopback inet addr 127 0 0 1 Mask 255 0 0 0 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU 16436 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 2 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure See Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 3 Confirm that power status of the PCI Express slot See Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express c
258. figuration When using the Trusted Platform Module TPM function the Reserved SB function cannot be used Do not set a Reserved SB for a partition where the HDD SSD on the SB is used as a boot disk or data disk When simultaneously using the Software RAID and the Reserved SB function do not configure the HDD SSD Mirror in the SB Home SB switching method When the Home SB fails the method of taking over the information of the various settings when switching to Reserved SB is as follows Note License authentication may be prompted after the switch to the Reserved SB when using the volume license or package product and the SB purchased at the same time as the enable kit is not being used TABLE 3 5 Operational restrictions when switching to a Reserved SB Item Operational restrictions USB port When connected to a USB port the connection to the USB port of the Reserved SB must be changed manually after the switching VGA port When connected to a VGA port the connection to the VGA port of the Reserved SB must be changed manually after the switching Time setting If the NTP is not used operating system time must be verified and set as there may be a time difference time after the switching Remarks License authentication may be prompted after switching to a Reserved SB in the following cases When using a volume license or package product When using an SB purchased together with the enable
259. figuring and Checking Log Information This section describes how to configure and confirm the log information on problems that occurred in the system 10 5 1 List of log information This section lists the types of log information that can be acquired Available log information System event log Syslog and event log Agent log Partition Event Log Hardware error log BIOS error log nformation on factors in partition power supply control Network configuration log information NTP client log information REMCS configuration log information 198 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 6 Firmware Updates Operation log information Physical inventory including PCI Boxes information System and partition configuration information System and partition configuration file nformation on internal rack sensor definitions 10 6 Firmware Updates The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server is configured with BIOS BMC and MMB firmware Each firmware is managed as a total version integrating different versions The firmware is updated from the MMB in batch applying to all the firmware at all locations within the system For details on firmware updates see 1 6 1 Firmware Update menu in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN 10 6 1 Notes on updating firmware If the MMB or SB fails perform maintenance on it before updating the firmware D
260. fore add after the switching In the above example since Partition R was powered off just before SB c was removed you can see that SB c has been removed from Partition R that is in operation Replacing the Home SB No The Socket No of the Home SB is made as 0 and operated This section describes the replacement of the Home SB No which logically replaces the physical SBO when an SB not being a physical SBO becomes the Home SB A number will be allocated for an SB not configured with LSB of PO P1 An example can be seen below TABLE 3 19 Example of Home SB No replacement Physical SB Physical SBO Physical SB1 Physical SB2 Physical SB3 Partition partition PO partition1 P1 56 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 6 Replacing the Home SB No configuration home SB Home SB of PO Home SB of P1 Logical SB of PO LSBO LSB1 LSB2 LSB3 LSB Logical SB of P1 LSB1 LSBO LSB2 LSB3 LSB As default one partition four SB configuration the relationship between the LSB No follows TABLE 3 20 Relationship between LSB No and Socket No LSB No Socket No Co m o o 1 3 5 7 57 and Socket No is as C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR CHAPTER 4PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red 4 1 4 1 1 Hat Enterprise Linux 6 T
261. fter being disconnected as a Reserved SB the Reserved SB for other partitions will be automatically removed Limitations of Reserved SB function The function of the Reserved SB has the following limitations When the I O device is connected to the USB port or VGA port of the Home SB and the Home SB switches to the Reserved SB the connected I O device must be manually reconnected The system must be restarted during Reserved SB switching Set the Reserved SB according to the partition priority Do not set mutual loops although it can be done under the configuration rules When the memory capacity is reduced after switching to a Reserved SB confirm that the decreased capacity has to be within the permissible range for applications The shutdown wait time for switching to a Reserved SB being used by another partition is the value that is set from the MMB Web UI 0 to 99 minutes the default is 10 minutes One shutdown wait time can be set in the system in the chassis If the shutdown is completed before the specified time elapses the switching starts immediately Set only when the switching time is acceptable When using a Reserved SB it is required that time is taken over after switching to Reserved SB be sure to use the NTP function to synchronize the time after switching There are two way how to take over the time One is to synchronize the time to NTP server and the other is to update the time periodically by operating system befor
262. g Replace NIC with 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards NIC addition procedure Referring to 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards add a NIC FC Card Hot Plugging For FC card hot plugging replacement you need to especially consider other matters in addition to the procedure described in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards The hot plugging of an FC card changes the WWN of the FC card if the WWN is set on an FC switch or RAID device ETERNUS For details on how to set the WWN again for a new card see the respective device manuals This section describes hot plugging of an FC card combined with ETERNUS MPD multipath driver It is required that the firmware version of new FC card is same as that of the FC card which had been replaced If the firmware version of new FC card is coincident with that of the FC card which had been replaced current firmware version it is not necessary to update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version If the firmware version of new FC card is not coincident with that of the FC card which had been replaced current firmware version update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version For how to update the firmware version see firmware update manual for fibre channel card Notes FC cards at PCI Segment Mode are not valid SAN boot paths are not va
263. g format with card name information omitted scsil0 on PCI bus Of device 08 irq 59 89 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards In this case check for the relevant message on the FC card incorporation by using the following procedure a Confirm the host number xx in scsixx xx is a numerical value in the message is a host number In the above example the host number is 10 b Check whether the following file exists by using the host number sys class scsi host hostxx modeldesc xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 If the file does not exist the judgment is that no such message was output from the FC card c If the file exists check the file contents by using the following operation cat sys class scsi host hostxx modeldesc Emulex LPe1250 F8 8Gb PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter xx in hostxx is the host number entered in step 1 If the output is like the above the judgment is that the relevant message was output by the incorporation of the FC card 4 6 4 Network card replacement procedure Network card referred to below as NIC replacement using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI Express slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes to the common PCI Express card replacement procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configu
264. ge Install Uninstall esses entente tne tenete nter tentent nter tenen 59 4 2 Hot add of SB Xii C122 E175 01EN Preface 4 2 1 Preparing for SB hot AC des scores se namemno nue aCDGEU IULII DIL 4 2 2 Confirming the status of SB before SB hot add sees ntntentn tente tn ttn teen tnttnis 4 2 3 DR operatioriin SB hot add ei Ree e ER ERE RE e EU RC RC e IRAE Na 4 24 How to deal with when timeout occurs while OS is processing SB hot add ses 4 2 5 Operation after SB hot add rn otc tie oe edo scite te d o rte oda e roc ve e 4 3 POL replacement Ot KOL J titer petet ei rci e e i D ID S e AEE S aE SPESIES 4 3 1 Preparation for IOU hot replacement died Ide dr d o dec pd ned dp es 4 3 2 DR operation of IOU hot replacemerit 1 2 rre tre re t E E HE EH PCR S t E e t 4 3 3 Operation after IOU hot replaceMennt eseesessesessesessesessesessecessesesseseeseseeseseeseseeseseeseseeseseeseeeseeseseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeens 44 Hotadd OU aea 4 4 1 Preparation forIOU hobadd te e REDE UHR E HR E LEURS E Ee Re dh 4 4 2 DR operation Of QU hot add orsi en epo ERROR URRIIPIDUR DURUM D EDU 4 4 3 Operationafter lOU hotadd 2 eoe eR n a ee EH T SE 4 5 JOU Not Wiz apo 4 5 1 Preparation for OU hot rermoVve aiu hcec i toi dina ii e re De fedt te o
265. ger essent teet tnter ntn 247 igi CB sie Menu aoo 248 FIGURE J 14 Device List in Device Manager windOw sesenta 248 FIGURE J 15 EFI driver version in LSI SAS2 MPT Controller Configuration eere rnnt 249 FIGURE J 16 Configuration Options windOw eseesseeeseeeeeeeene entente tenerent nnne teet tt teet teet te tete ntnnin 249 FIGURE J 17 Controller Management windOw esee netten tenente tente tenete tette entente 250 FIGURE J 18 View Controller Properties windOW eese eene nennen tenente tenente tenete teten tette tenen 250 FIGURE J 19 FUJITSU logo WITnIdOW 1 coin iei eese reete eet nt rece rec e te ee eet deren 251 FIGURE J 20 Confirmation of UEFI driver version and firmware version sesenta 251 FIGURE J 21 Boot Manager front page 1 s sssseeeese sete ntnte tete ntete tette teret tete te tates tete te antena FIGURE J 22 Boot Manager front page 2 FIGURE J 23 Boot Manager menu FIGURE J 24 UEFI Shell FIGURE J 25 Driver list FIGURE J 26 Confirmation of UEFI driver version FIGURE J 27 Boot Manager front page 1 2 eret ire coe ecc sciet ee dece Rue ree echtes terae FIGURE J 28 Boo
266. gs for the incorporated destination partition will be canceled The Reserved SB settings for other partitions will be continued If a partition is configured of one SB the Source SB is disconnected from the partition by Reserved SB switching Therefore there is no need to consider the DIMM and CPU mixing criteria between the Reserved SB and the source SB There may be one or two CPUS for a Reserved SB The Reserved SB need not consider Yes No for Memory Mirroring Sparing However if the DIMM configuration of the Reserved SB is different from the switching source SB the Memory Operation Mode may change after switching to the Reserved SB switching may change from the Memory Operation Mode of the source SB Specific changes in the Memory Operation Mode before and after Reserved SB are shown below TABLE 3 4 Memory Operation Mode before and after Reserved SB switching when a partition is configured from one SB Source SB Memory Operation SB DIMM configuration for Reserved Memory Operation Mode after Mode SB Reserved SB switching Mirror Normal Normal Mirror Mirror Spare Spare Normal or Mirror 1 Normal Normal or Mirror or Spare 2 Normal Mirror Normal Normal Mirror Mirror Spare Spare Normal or Mirror 1 Mirror Normal or Mirror or Spare 2 Mirror Spare Normal Normal Mirror Mirror Spare Spare Normal or Mirror 1 Normal Normal or Mirror or Spare 2 Spare 1 DIMM co
267. h any other key to continue Shell gt drivers_ For details on UEFI operation see PRIMEQUEST 2000 series User Interface Operating Instructions C122 E176EN and PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Note If driver list does not fall within window input drivers b Driver list is shown by a page 6 Check the number of UEFI driver and the number of LSI EFI SAS Driver In below example the number of UEFI driver is 126 FIGURE J 5 drivers command of UEFI Shell Shell gt drivers T Tt PF VERSION E G G WD WC DRIVER NAME IMAGE NAME 7E FFFFFFFF POST Watchdog Driver PostUatchdogDr iut F 00000000 7 PCI UGA Mini Port Driver UgaMiniPort 86 0000000A i Platform Console Management Driver 4 PlatfornDxe 81 0000000 I Platform Console Management Drive ConP lat formDxe 82 09000000A te splitterDxe 83 80000008 B msole Splitte splitterDxe 84 00000008 msole Splitte slitterDxe 0000006 B 2 2 Console Splitter Drive itterDxe 0000006 B msole Splitte itterDxe 30000006 iraphics Console Drive Consol 000000060 IGA Class Driver Uga 3sDxe sole Split O80600A B 2 2 Serial Terminal ve TerninalDxe eneric Disk I 0 I DiskloDx 4 Partition Driver Torito PartitionDxe P IT ISA Device Enu r Isaf 0 ISA Bus Driver Isak 93 000000060 B 2 2 ISA Serial Drive saSer ialDxe 126 06000300 B X X 2 LSI EFI SAS Driver Offset OxDAGO Ox14 141 66000300 B X X 1 2 LSI EFI SAS Driver Offset 0xDA00 0x14 Shell _
268. h LEDs E LED Type F 1 11 OPL The OPL comes equipped with an LED indicating the status of entire system the MMB Ready LED and the System Alarm LED From the OPL LED display you can check the power status of the entire device check for any problem and check the MMB firmware status TABLE F 18 OPL LED LED type Color Function System Green Indicates the power status of the system Power CSS Yellow System Orange Indicates whether there is an error in the Alarm System System Blue Identifies the system Location Can be arbitrarily turned on set to blink or turned off by the user TABLE F 19 System status and LED display System status System CSS System Location Power Alarm The system power status is standby Standby On orange status means that MMB is running and all partitions are off Any of partition is on On green Warning or Error of CSS components in the On System Warning or Error of components other than On CSS components in the system Identifying the system On F 1 12 PCI Box PCI Box comes equipped with following LEDs TABLE F 20 PCI Box LED LED type Color Function Power Green Indicates power state in a PCI Box Alarm Orange Indicates whether there is error or not in a PCI Box Location Blue Identifies a PCI Box Can be arbitrarily set to blink or turned off by the user Indicates the comp
269. h had been replaced current firmware version update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version For how to update the firmware version see Firmware update manual for fibre channel card Note If you cannot confirm the firmware version of the FC card before replacing due to the fault of the FC card check the firmware version of the FC card which is same type as the faulty one to update firmware version 9 Confirm the incorporation results The method of confirming is the same as that is performed in the replacement of FC card See Confirming the FC card incorporation results in 4 6 3 FC card Fibre Channel card replacement procedure 4 7 4 Network card addition procedure NIC network card addition using hot plugging needs specific processing before and after PCI slot power on or power off Its procedure also includes the common PCI Express card addition procedure The procedure describes operations where a single NIC is configured as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration For bonding multiple NIC by using PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services GLS see PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Service Configuration and Administration Guide Redundant Line Control Function J2UZ 7781 Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface FIGURE 4 4 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration inter
270. he power failure occurred Powers on the partitions that were On when the power failure occurred and retains the power off status for partitions that were powered off when the power failure occurred Schedule Sync Automatically powers on the partition according to the scheduled operation settings when a power failure had occurred during working hours 1 1 For details on the scheduled operations see 8 3 Scheduled operations If the startup of an external SAN unit connected to the UPS and such unit is slow during power restoration then the SAN device does not become usable if the partition is powered on by the server Therefore SAN boot may fail In that case Partition Power On Delay units of seconds 0 to 9999 seconds default 0 seconds can be set in addition to the above mentioned settings For details on the method of settings for power failure restoration see 1 2 7 System Setup window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Remote shutdown Windows Windows with versions of Windows XP onwards comes with a shutdown exe command This command can be used for remote shutdown from a management terminal Prerequisites for remote shutdown The following are the prerequisites for using the remote shutdown Windows The operating system of the management terminal should be one of the following Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Windows 7 Windows
271. he system administrator will perform Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Under Maintenance Status Partition 0 gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first Tf you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI_Box 0 PCIC 1 When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previo ufr View Configuration Note About powering on PCIC slot system Administrator must perform 9 Status updating menu will be opened 132 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Maintenance Wizard Waiting for status update Status Updating PCI Box PCIC status Maintenance Wizard Post Maintenance View Check PCI Box PCIC O status and then click Next button 11 Confirm Maintenance Mode is released information zone non gray background and click OK button 133 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 3 NIC Hot Plugging Model PRIMEQUEST Active IMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX EVT1600000 Normal PCI_Box 0 PCIC 1 replacement o
272. hich had been replaced current firmware version update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version For how to update the firmware version see Firmware update manual for fibre channel card Note If you cannot confirm the firmware version of the FC card before replacing due to the fault of the FC card check the firmware version of the FC card which is same type as the faulty one to update firmware version Confirm the incorporation results Confirming the FC card incorporation results describes the confirmation method Start operation with the FC card again by restarting applications as needed or by other such means Perform the necessary post processing If you stopped any other application in step 1 restart it too as needed Confirming the FC card incorporation results Confirm the incorporation results of the FC card and the corresponding driver in the following method Then take appropriate action Check the log The following example shows a log of FC card hot plugging As shown below the output of an FC card incorporation message and device found message as the log output to var log messages after the PCI Express slot containing the mounted FC card is enabled means that the FC card was successfully incorporated Scsil0 Emulex LPel250 F8 8Gb PCIe Fibre Channel X Adapter on PCI bus Of device 08 irq 59 1 lpfc 0000 0d 00 0 0 1303 Link Up Event xl received X Data xl x0 x10 x0 xO x0 O 2
273. his chapter describes hot maintenance of PCI cards in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR This section describes Dynamic Reconfiguration DR DR function has to be enabled by MMB Web UI and Dynamic Reconfiguration Utility package has to be installed in the system to perform hot maintenance of SB and IOU For hot maintenance of PCI Express card neither Enabling DR function nor installing Dynamic Reconfiguration Utility package has to be always needed For the summary of the DR function applicable rules and corresponding list and restrictions see 3 2 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR For details on the MMB Web UI CLI see respective chapters in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 For details on the OS CLI see 5 1 DR command in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 DR function configuration setting Enable Disable is set for the DR function of each partition from Partition Partition x gt Mode window of MMB Web UI If the settings are changed while the target partition is running the settings will be reflected at the next partition restart Items for Dynamic Reconfiguration of the Mode window can be seen below FIGURE 4 1 Mode window Dynamic Reconfiguration Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMBW0 Part Number MCF3AC111 FUJITSU Serial Number 5012450006 AWarning Mode re Select mode for the partition then click the Apply Burton Note A partition pow Don i5 r
274. hout SB in such cases the partition cannot be powered on and operated Partition can be powered on without DU and PCI_ Box while these components are necessary for expansion of storage capacity or PCI slots Configuration rules for partition are shown below TABLE 3 1 Configuration rules for partition components Components Required number common for all models SB One or more IOU One or more DU Optional PCI Box Optional Regarding DU it is necessary that IOU containing DU should be possible Example To use DU O the use of IOU or IOUsH should be enabled To use DU 1 the use of IOU 2 or IOU 3 should be enabled For the installation conditions of the CPU see Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions A conceptual diagram of PPAR partitioning function for each model is shown below 28 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 1 Partition Configuration PRIMEQUEST 2400E For PRIMEQUEST2400E up to two partitions can be configured An optional SB and an optional IOU can be freely combined The partition configuration is shown below Components with dotted line and white background color in the diagram show the components that are not mounted FIGURE 3 1 Conceptual diagram of the partitioning function PRIMEQUEST 2400E 3 4 No Configuration example Description 1 Partition configuration example possible Example of dividing into two partitions Part
275. hysical replacement of CPU and DIMM as hardware is not possible When replacing the CPU and the DIMM the SB is removed by the hot remove of SB Or the partition is stopped 8 DR function of PCI Box is operated with DR function of IOU How to check the dp command package Execute the following command and check whether the dp command package has been installed rpm qa grep FUSVdp util Example rpm qa grep FJSVdp util FJSVdp util RHEL6 1 0 0 1 noarch In case it has not been installed see 4 1 Dynamic Reconfiguration DR Type of memory in DR There are three types of memory of DR shown below depending on the conditions of use Kernel memory It is the memory internally used by the operating system The kernel memory cannot be disconnected from the system by SB hot plug operation It is secured from the memory of the Home SB at startup User memory If is a memory in which the kernel memory is not loaded the user memory can be hot removed from the system by the SB hot plug operation Special memory It is a hugetlbfs special memory hugetlbfs cannot be disconnected from the system by SB hot plug operation Therefore this memory is present only on the Home SB Notes Limitations All the SB firmware shall be of the same version number The added SB and CPU have same product name in the partition Kernel memory is present only in the Home SB Therefore hot remove of Home SB is not supported The
276. ied Time PIDE FEES EI LI I NI 7 Number of events to display Max 3000 100 99 Apply Cancel Default Setting 2 Specify the condition to filter events Then click the Apply button The System Event Log window appears again The window displays the events matching the specified conditions To clear the specified conditions and return to the System Event Log window click the Cancel button To clear the specified conditions and restore the default values click the Default Setting button TABLE 10 5 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window Item Description Severity Select the severity of events to display by using the following check boxes You can check multiple check boxes Error Warning Info All check boxes are checked by default Partition 1 Select the partition to display Select the All or Specified radio button If you select All filtering by partition will not be applied In this case the check boxes for partitions in Specified are grayed out and cannot be checked If you select Specified you can check the check boxes for selecting a partition Even after a switch to All and back to Specified the window retains the selections made with the Specified check boxes All is grayed out and cannot be selected for users with Partition Operator accounts Also they can select partition filtering only for the target partition The def
277. ile at its start time and then retains the rules in memory Simply changing the rule file does not mean the changed rules are reflected Take action as follows to reflect the new rules in udev udevadm control reload rules iSCSI NIC on the IOU If replace iSCSI NIC on the IOU you have to take not only the same steps of NIC on the IOU including Onboard NIC but also takes below steps in step 3 of that 1 Perform the work for suppressing access to the iSCSI connection interface Confirm the state of multiple path by DM MP 1 or EMPD 2 Use the iscsiadm command to log out from the path iqn through which the iSCSI card to be replaced is routed and disconnect the session Example which confirms the state of session before disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 ign 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 tcp 2 192 168 2 66 3260 3 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 Example which logout path going through a NIC to be replaced sbin iscsiadm m node T iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage System eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 p 192 168 2 66 3260 logout c Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been disconnected Example which confirms the state of session after disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 iqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage s
278. in a scheduled operation the booting of the partition powered on earlier may not complete Cause An MMB firmware restriction causes this problem Corrective action Execute Force Power Off on the partition causing the problem and execute Power On again Notes on Troubleshooting This section provides notes on troubleshooting n the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series if you unplug all the AC power cables while the device is in standby mode the system event log records AC Lost Severity Info This is neither a problem nor a failure It is a normal situation The following example shows this type of message Item Severity Unit Source EventlD Description Display Info PSU Power Supply input lost during the cabinet power off Collecting Maintenance Data System problems include cases where the partition abnormally stops and cases where the partition is running but hangs In all such cases you need to collect data for investigation to troubleshoot the problem Be sure to configure the memory dump before starting to use the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server Fujitsu uses this information to identify the cause of the system problem and solve it quickly TABLE 10 4 System problems and memory dump collection System status Memory dump collection See Partition stopped abnormally A memory dump for the partition 10 4 2 Collecting data for has already been collected investigation Windows 10 4 3 Setting up the dump envir
279. indow Full Screen Maximize Video redirection window It is required that client and host are the same resolution Hard disk USB Set virtual media Floppy Set virtual media CD DVD Set virtual media Cursor Display cursor Softkeyboard Display software keyboard Video Record Perform setup for record of Video redirection such as record time and save location Hot Keys Set Hot keys shortcut key Zoom Zoom in or Zoom out Video redirection window TABLE 1 11 Status Bar in Video redirection window Status Bar Description LALT Hold down left Alt key LALT button turns red LCTRL Hold down left Ctrl key LCTRL button turns red RALT Hold down right Alt key RALT button turns red RCTRL Hold down right Ctrl key RCTRL button turns red Num Hold down right Num key Num button turns red Caps Hold down right Caps key Caps button turns red Scroll Hold down right Scroll key Scroll button turns red Note When resolution of window in server is 800 x 600 a part of window displayed in video redirection may luck or track of mouse cursor may remain during installing Linux While the video redirection is being used a warning message indicating that the digital signature is expired may be displayed Since this warning message does not affect the operation of Java Application click the Execute button To avoid displaying this waning mes
280. ing Procedure for PCI Express cards E Device Manager mix File Action View Help LL Acad M HMEN SE luu 1 Eg WIN JOEKP4USV1O gm Computer Ec Disk drives amp Display adapters Eef DVD CD ROM drives cg IDE ATA ATAPI controllers MK Monitors Ej Network adapters E E Intel R 1350 Gic Update Driver Software X Intel R 1350 cg Disable X Intel R 1350 gig Uninstall Intel R 1350 Gic Intel R 1350 Gic Intel R I350Gic Properties Intel R 1350 Gigabit Network Connection E i Other devices e Bl Processors lt gt Storage controllers gE System devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers Scan for hardware changes 6 2 2 Addition procedure 1 Confirm the physical location segment number and bus number Confirm the mounting location of the PCI card See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card 2 Add PCI card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard FE s work This section describes the procedures of hot addition of PCI cards PCIC using Maintenance Wizard This work is performed by FE mainly 1 Open Maintenance Wizard menu in MMB Web UI and open Maintenance Wizard 2 Check Replace Unit button and click Next button Model PRIMEQUEST Active NIMIB O Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT
281. ining 3 In first terminal PC window where connection privilege of second terminal PC is selected appears Select connection privilege from below Allow Virtual Console permit Full Virtual Console access where all operation of video redirection can be performed Allow only Video permit only video where display function of video redirection can be performed Deny Access deny access to video redirection If thirty seconds passes Allow Virtual Console is selected FIGURE 1 9 Popup window of Virtual Console Sharing Privileges Virtual Console Sharing Privileges Give Permission to user MMB2PILOT2 with IP address MENNNNNEEI Allow Virtual Console O Allow only Video Deny Access OK 21 seconds remaining 4 Popup which shows result selected by first terminal PC Display in first terminal PC Such below window is displayed depending on result of selection except for Allow only Video FIGURE 1 10 Popup for Allow Virtual Console in first terminal PC INFORMATION 9 Provided Full Access permission to MMB2PILOT2 user with IP address EMEN FIGURE 1 11 Popup for TIMEOUT in first terminal PC INFORMATION Granted Full Virtual Console access to user MMB2PILOT2 with IP EE due to Virtual Console access request time out Display in second terminal PC Result selected by first terminal PC is shown below in second terminal PC FIGURE 1 12 Popup for Allow Virtual Console in second terminal PC
282. ions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Sets information 2 2 Setting Commands Displays information Updates firmware 2 3 Display Commands 2 4 1 update ALL Displays the version and update status of firmware 2 4 2 show update status UEFI The following lists the functions provided by the UEFI For details on the UEFI provided commands see Chapter 4 UEFI Command Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN TABLE 9 3 Functions provided by the UEFI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN Displays menus for migration to boot processing Boot Manager Device Manager and Boot Maintenance Manager 3 1 Boot Manager Front Page Sends processing into automatic operating system startup and performs boot processing in the currently set boot sequence 3 2 Continue Menu Sets the boot devices 3 3 Boot Manager Menu Makes settings such as whether to assign an I O space to each I O device CPU settings and whether to enable PXE boot 3 4 Device Manager Menu Makes settings such as addition and deletion of boot options and boot priority changes 3 5 Boot Maintenance Manager Menu Setting of sadump environment 6 Setting of sadump environment ServerView Suite You can use ServerView Suite to visually confirm the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series configuration and
283. ircle Remarks If Part Number or Serial Number the content or information area in the MMB Web UI window displays Read Error contact a field engineer or your sales representative Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit Alarm E Mail notification Alarm E Mail notification can inform you of system problems You can configure Alarm E Mail notification for problem occurrences by selecting Network Configuration Alarm E Mail from the MMB menu You can also filter the notification such as by error status type partition or target component 179 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FIGURE 10 6 Alarm E Mail settings window Model FEDAEQUEST26 0E Acti e MS1B40 Fart Nanber MU XXNXAAX FU Serial Number cos z Surs vr tm d Y Arter gt Network Ceniguction gt Abun E Mod Alarm E Mail Chek the Apply Bron so apply al charges Rode Ticahie Use sv cose Boas aic g 12 15 102 qox ol amt cce mmc rest tm Miscellaneous Problems related to system startup or drivers may occur For details on these problems see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Message Reference C122 E178EN If the status is one of the MMB error or warning statuses listed in the following operation interrupt criteria stop the system and cont
284. is automatically canceled after the Reserved SB operates Note When restoring during maintenance after the Reserved SB operation replace the faulty unit and reset the Reserved SB information from the Web UI Reserved SB Setting Rules The Reserved SB setting criteria are as follows Any SB not belonging to the own partition can be set as a Reserved SB 36 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration ia Pe An SB can be set as a Reserved SB for multiple partitions Multiple Reserved SBs can be set for a single partition If a partition is configured by a single SB the CPU and DIMM of the Reserved SB must comply with the installation rules in the Reserved SB 1 Two CPUs must be mounted on a Reserved SB If a partition is configured by multiple SBs only the SB with the DIMM configuration that meets the mounting order of the Memory Operation Mode which is the same as the source SB can be set as a Reserved SB If a partition is configured by multiple SBs only the SB that meets criteria for mixing the CPUs with the partition can be set as the Reserved SB If a partition is configured by multiple SBs only the SB that meets the conditions for mixing DIMM with the partition can be set as the Reserved SB The SB that is set as the Reserved SB is set from the MMB Web UI and can be incorporated in an arbitrary partition At that time the Reserved SB settin
285. is set for a partition set power is turned off at the set time A daily weekly monthly specific date or a combination of these options can be set a schedule For the details on schedule settings see 1 3 2 Schedule menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 8 3 3 Relation of scheduled operation and power restoration function In the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series scheduled operation and power restoration function are linked when power restoration mode is set to Schedule Sync TABLE 8 5 Relationship between scheduled operation and partition power restoration mode No When there is power When the power is Always OFF Always ON Restore 1 Schedule failure restored 1 1 Sync 1 1 Outside the operation Within the operation OFF ON OFF ON time time 2 Within the operation Within the operation OFF ON ON ON time time 3 Outside the operation Outside the operation OFF ON OFF OFF time time 4 Within the operation Outside the operation OFF ON ON OFF time time ON Partition Power On OFF Partition Power Off Notes Operations indicated by 1 in the table assume normal shutdown when a power failure occurs If there is an abnormal power off because the UPS had not been used the partition will not automatically start OFF mode operation in a restoration operation irrespective of the operation settings 8 3 4 Scheduled operation support conditions The description of power on off items scheduled opera
286. isplay HDD SSD status HDD SSD Access HDD SSD Alarm Note Accessing to HDD or SSD Blinking Off Error of HDD or SSD Off On When RAID configuration breaks When Agent is offline Indicating location of HDD Off Blinking periodically When using SAS RAID card or SSD with 3 Hz 220 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs E LED Type HDD SSD status HDD SSD Access HDD SSD Alarm Note Rebuilding array Blinking Blinking periodically When using SAS RAID card with 1 Hz F 1 9 MMB The MMB comes equipped with the Active LED Ready LED and Location LED The Active LED indicates the active MMB and the Ready LED indicates the MMB firmware status Location LED is used to specify the MMB After the MMB firmware starts the active MMB turns on the Active LED The Ready LED blinks while MMB firmware startup is in progress The Ready LED stays on when the startup is completed TABLE F 14 MMB LED LED type Color Function Ready Green Indicates the MMB status Alarm Orange Indicates whether there is an error in the MMB Active Green Indicates whether the MMB is the active or standby MMB Location ID Blue Identifies the MMB TABLE F 15 MMB device status and LED display MMB status device status Ready Alarm Active Location MMB startup is in progress Blinking The MMB has started normally On Ready status An error occurred in the MMB On
287. ition 1 includes one SB and two IOUs SBs and IOUs can be freely combined 2 Partition configuration example possible Example of combining two SBs and one IOU 3 Partition configuration example not possible DU 1 cannot be used if IOU 2 or IOU 3 is not included in the partition 4 Partition configuration example not possible No partition can consist of only an SB and IOU 29 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 1 Partition Configuration PRIMEQUEST 2800E For PRIMEQUEST2800E up to four partitions can be configured Optional SB and optional path can be freely combined Examples of partition configuration are shown below Components with dotted line and white background in the diagram show the components that are not mounted FIGURE 3 2 Conceptual diagram of the partitioning function PRIMEQUEST 2800E Configuration example 1 Partition configuration example possible Description Example of dividing into three partitions Partition 1 includes one SB and two IOUs Partition 2 includes one SB and one IOU SBs and IOUs can be freely combined 2 Partition configuration example possible Example of configuring a partition of two SB and one IOU into two partitions ossible possible 3 Partition configuration example not 4 Partition configuration example not DU 1 cannot be used if IOU 2
288. ition by scheduled operation When a scheduled operation is set for a partition power is turned on at the set time Daily weekly monthly specific date or a combination of these options can be set as a schedule Note The times recorded in the SEL may lag behind the scheduled operation as can be seen below After the configuration check and preparation for the startup has been carried out the power is turned on It takes a while to start In such case the display of the SEL may be delayed by six to eight seconds from the scheduled operation time Shutdown instruction from the MMB to the operating system is executed within few seconds from the set time However the time shown below may change under various conditions like setting configuration etc 163 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 3 Scheduled operations Time till the instruction reaches the operating system from the MMB Time until the operating system shutdown is started and time until the start of the operating system shutdown is notified to the MMB Even if the Power on Delay is set to 0 seconds it may take 30 70 seconds from the time of turning on the power and starting up to reset For the scheduled setting see 1 3 2 Schedule menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 8 3 2 Power off a Partition by scheduled operation When a scheduled operation
289. itions 40 FIGURE 3 11 Example 5 Example where the Reserved SBs 1 2 3 of Partition 0 belong to other partitions 40 FIGURE 3 12 Example 6 Example where a Reserved SB has been set in SB 0 When the Home SB has failed 41 FIGURE 3 13 Example 7 Example when SB 0 is set as the Reserved SB when an SB other than the Home SB fails 41 FIGURE 3 14 Status when there is an error in the memory mirror maintenance mode senes 45 FIGURE 3 15 Status when the error had occurred in the system was restarted mirror maintenance mode 45 FIGURE 3 16 Status when there error has occurred in the memory memory capacity maintenance mode 46 FIGURE 3 17 Status when an error has occurred in the memory memory capacity maintenance mode 46 FIGURE 4 1 Mode window Dynamic Reconfiguration esee eese nente nnne rnnt ntnte tete nter ntn nnns 58 FIGURE 4 2 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface essere tette ttn 90 FIGURE 4 3 Example of single NIC interface esses essent tente tentent ttnte tnter tette tette ttn tette te ente tne nenas 97 FIGURE 4 4 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface essent 106
290. itions G 2 1 See DIMM TABLE G 9 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 1CPU 1SB 1 CPU 0 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO OB3 OCO 0C3 ODO 0D3 Slot OA1 OA4 OB1 0B4 OC1 OCA OD1 0D4 0A2 0A5 OB2 0B5 OC2 0C5 OD2 OD5 Normal O JO JA JA x Perfor O O A A mance O O IA IA x x Full or Partial Mirror Oo O A A Ww Spare O O A A O O A A Ww 233 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 DIMM TABLE G 13 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 1CPU 1SB when a Partition includes 8 sockets with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition when a Partition includes 4SBs with PCI Address Mode Segment Mode or DR is enabled in a Partition TABLE G 10 DIMM mixed mounting condition at 2CPU 1SB 1 CPU 0 CPU 1 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO OB3 OCO 0C3 ODO 0D3 1A0 1A3 1BO 1B3 1CO 1C3 1DO 1D3 Slot 0A1 OA4 0B1 0B4 0C1 0C4 OD1 OD4 1A1 1A4 1B1 1B4 1C1 1C4 1D1 1D4 0A2 OA5 0B2 0B5 0C2 0C5 OD2 0D5 142 1A5 1B2 1B5 1C2 1C5 1D2 1D5 Normal O O A A B o e A A Perfor O O A A m L o e A A mance O O E E O6 A A x
291. k Enable In case of Disable this work is not necessary Device Manager Mie x File Action View Help ERIT EXT e rit nbi m t E E WIN JOEKP4U8V1O qi Computer Eg Disk drives SS Display adapters Eef DVD CD ROM drives Cg IDE ATAJATAPI controllers EM Monitors Ea Network adapters x S a Intel R 1350 Gic uio Driver Software X Ine n is50g Disable X Intel R 1350 gi Uninstall X Intel R 1350 Gic X Intel R 1350 Gic X Intel R 1350 Gic Properties X Intel R 1350 Gigabit Network Connection 15 Other devices Bl Processors f lt gt Storage controllers gli System devices 8 Universal Serial Bus controllers Scan for hardware changes 6 4 2 FC card addition procedure Referring to 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards add an FC card 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI The prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement are as follows The maintenance person has the Administrator privileges required for operations The ETERNUS multipath driver MPD has been applied To replace more than one card one card at a time will be replaced 145 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI 6 5 1 Confirming the incorporation of a card with MPD This section describes the procedure for confirming that a card has been incorporated with MPD 1 Confirm physi
292. k Drives HDD or Solid State Drives SSD with Hardware RAID configuration 5 2 1 Preventive replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAIDO configuration This section describes the workflow of preventive replacement of HDD or SSD with RAIDO configuration For mirror configuration Hot preventive replacement can be performed if HDDs or SSDs are mirror configuration by software such as PRIMECLUSTER GDS Remarks Step1 and Step2 are performed by field engineers in charge of your system If HDD or SSD other than target HDD or SSD for preventive replacement fails in step3 field engineers in charge of your system replace the failed HDD or SSD 1 Replace HDD or SSD with the Alarm LED on by using MMB Maintenance Wizard 2 Create a logical drive with RAIDO configuration by using MMB Maintenance Wizard 3 Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by MMB Web UI How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a SB Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a DU Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System
293. k encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 38 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b ethl Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 0E 0C 70 C3 40 BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 1000 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b lo Link encap Local Loopback inet addr 127 0 0 1 Mask 255 0 0 0 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU 16436 Metric 1 RX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 0 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 0 RXbytes 0 0 0 b TX bytes 0 0 0 b 9 Create an interface configuration file Create an interface configuration file etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethX for the newly created interface as follows In HWADDR set the hardware address confirmed in step 7 If multiple NICs are added or if a NIC where multiple interfaces exist is added create a file for all the interfaces 107 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards 10 11 The explanation here assumes as an example that a name automatically assigned by the system is used To install a new interface you can use a new interfac
294. k target identified device name with step 2 a in displayed list and disable PCI card 4 Replace PCI card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard FE s work This section describes the step of hot replacement of PCI cards PCIC using Maintenance Wizard This work is performed by FE mainly 1 Open Maintenance Wizard menu in MMB Web UI and open Maintenance Wizard 2 Check Replace Unit button and click Next button 123 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST Active MIMIB20 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number EVT1600000 AW arnine System Partition Maintenance Wizard ESA Notice Maintenance screen can only be used by one user at time Select the type of maintenance activity to perform Replace Unit Replaces a failed unit or replaces a unit to prevent failure C Enter Maintenance Mode Sets only Maintenance mode when Maintenance excludes Replace are performed C Exit Maintenance Mode Cancels Maintenance mode when Maintenance exchides Replace are finished C Raid Drive Maintenance Mode Replace failure physical drives or recover degraded logical drives 3 Check PCI_Box PCIC button and click Next button Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number 3C12450010 Status AW arsine System Partition User Administra
295. kit For details see License Authentication with SB and Enable kit Combinations in 3 4 Expansion of components 3 2 3 Memory Operation Mode The Memory Operation Mode can be set from the MMB Web UI for each PPAR partition The following five modes are supported as Memory Operation Modes Performance Mode Normal Mode Partial Mirror Mode Full Mirror Mode Spare Mode The default is Normal Mode The overview of each mode is given the TABLE below TABLE 3 6 Overview of Memory Operation Modes Memory Operation Mode Description Performance Mode Mode that elicits the maximum memory performance However it does not support any RAS function except the SDDC Normal Mode Mode in which the Memory Mirror and Memory Spare are used DDDC is supported as a memory RAS function in addition to SDDC Mode which is set as the default Full Mirror Mode Mode in which the Memory Mirror is used in all the SBs included in a partition In this mode mirror maintenance mode or the capacity maintenance mode is selected as the Memory Mirror RAS mode For details on the Memory Mirror see 3 2 4 Memory Mirror For details on the Memory Mirror RAS see Memory Mirror RAS of 3 2 4 Memory Mirror Partial Mirror Mode The Memory Mirror mode is used only in the Home SB In this mode mirror maintenance mode or capacity maintenance mode is selected as the Memory Mirror RAS mode For details on the Memory Mirror see 3 2 4 Memory Mirror For details on th
296. l address and a MAC address The MMB monitors errors of the management LAN including connections to unit external switches and LAN cable disconnections When it detects an error it switches the duplicated NIC so that the monitoring operation which includes the Web UI operations can continue The values of the physical IP address and the MAC address of the MMB prior to switching are maintained To set up the management LAN in a redundant configuration select Network Configuration Network Interface from the MMB Web UI and then set Enable for Dualization of Maintenance LAN For the redundant configuration of the management LAN on the partition side duplicate the NIC by teaming with Linux Bonding driver GLS or Intel PROSet When the MMB is duplicated but the management LAN user port of the MMB is not duplicated if an error occurs on the management LAN MMB access is disabled in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E Because the MMB does not recognize its error it does not automatically switch the active MMB and the virtual IP address of the MMB cannot be switched to the available MMB In such cases the active MMB must be switched manually The procedure is described below for only PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E When MMB3 0 is active and MMB 1 is standby an error occurs during an attempt by the management LAN to access the user port on the MMB O side and MMB 0 access is disabled 1 Connect to the physical IP address of the management LAN
297. l power feed Dual power feed monitoring PSU redundancy PSU N 1 redundancy monitoring and control Unit FAN redundancy Fan redundancy monitoring and control MMB duplication 1 MMB duplication control Return of reset and doubling after switch anomaly detection SB redundancy 1 Faulty SB switching with Reserved SB Component and DIMM duplication Memory Mirror mode each partition module DINN spare Memory Spare Mode each partition Firmware storing memory FWH duplication duplication System clock Clock multiplexing PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server has oscillator on each SB Distribution from Home SB System Cluster in cabinet Independent clock in each partition 1 Available for only PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E A 1 6 External linkage functions TABLE A 6 External linkage functions operation Minor item Description External IF API IPMI RMCP IPMI RMCP interface SNMP SNMP interface telnet ssh Access to MMB CLI via telnet ssh http https Access to MMB Web UI via http https NTP Time synchronization with NTP client of MMB EMS linkage ServerView Suite linkage Linkage with ServerView Suite Other management Linkage with server management software of each software linkage company CLUSTER linkage PRIMECLUSTER linkage Linkage with PRIMECLUSTER UPS linkage Power failure control Coordinated support with UPS device in power failure shutdown processing User script execution support before power failure
298. lacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards 150 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI 6 Replace NIC by using MMB Maintenance Wizard FE s work Replace NIC with step 4 at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Note In case of using SVagent Source SVagent ID 25004 Error massage is logged in SEL when replacing itis no problem 7 Setan IP address for the replacement device Set the IP address and subnet mask recorded in step 2 Remarks If the following message appears when you set the IP address select Yes Microsoft TCP IP E4 dXX The IP address 192 168 3 150 you have entered for this network o adapter is already assigned to another adapter Intel R A PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 6 which is no longer present in the computer If the same address is assigned to both adapters and they both become active only one of them will use this address This may result in incorrect system configuration Do you want to remove the static IP configuration for the absent adapter 8 Click the Refresh button on the Targets tab in the iSCSI Initiator Properties window Confirm that the target status becomes Connected Windows Server 2008 R2 151 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Repl
299. lect partition s then click the Restore button Configuration File Information Partition 2 Partition Name cannotboot Saved Date 2013 11 14 BIOS Version 1 12 O Select All defined partition s 1 cannotboot 1 12 2 cannotboot 1 12 3 ima 1 12 lt gt 2 Select the partition to restore Then click the Restore button 7 1 2 Backing up and restoring MMB configuration information From the Backup Restore MMB Configuration window you can back up and restore MMB configuration information The procedure is as follows 155 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 7 Backup and Restore 7 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information FIGURE 7 4 Backup Restore MMB Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 co Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number JC12450016 Status d Warning System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Backup Restore Configuration Backup Restore MMB Configuration Backup MMB Configuration To backup the MMB Configuration click Backup button Restore MMB Configuration To restore the MMB Configuration select a file and click Restore button lt gt Backing up MMB configuration information 1 Click the Backup button The browser dialog box for selecting the save destination appears 2 Select the save destination path Then click the OK button Download of the fil
300. licated the maintenance LAN can only access to the MMB on the active side The NIC on the standby MMB is disabled Remarks The active and standby MMBs in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server each have a CE terminal port used in maintenance and a LAN port for REMCS notification Communication through the ports is enabled only on the active MMB and disabled on the standby MMB A field engineer configures the maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN during system installation Production LAN This section describes the configuration of the production LAN for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Overview of the production LAN The IOU includes LAN ports for the production LAN You can mount additional LAN cards in the PCI Express slots on the IOU and PCI Box as needed to use their ports for the production LAN 11 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use 1 5 2 Redundancy of the production LAN This section describes redundancy of the production LAN Duplication of the transmission path between servers high speed switching method For details on duplication of the transmission path between servers see PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Service Configuration and Administration Guide Redundant Line Control Function J2UZ 7781 Duplication between the server hub switch in the same network Virtual NIC method NIC switching method For details on duplication between the server hub switch i
301. lid LTO library devices are not supported Depending on the Windows specifications if the FC card connection destination has a Page File or other such paging scheme FC card hot plugging may not be supported 138 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging Incase of using SVagent Source SVagent ID 25004 Error massage is logged in SEL when replacing itis no problem 6 4 14 Hot plugging an FC card incorporated with the ETERNUS multipath driver This section describes the hot plugging procedure for an FC card incorporated with the ETERNUS multipath driver 1 Confirm physical location segment number and bus number of target NIC Confirm the physical location segment number and bus number with step 1 at 6 2 1 Replacement procedure in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Note In case of multi function card there are some cards that have same segment number same bus number and different function numbers In this case please perform Step 2 to Step 6 of follows respectively 2 Confirm target device by using administration manager of the FC card and confirm WWN port number and firmware version Case Emulex FC card a Open OneCommand Manager confirm target device with step 2 Select Port WWN as the same type of target FC card in left pane and select Port Information tab in right pane See PCI Bus Number in Port Attributes an
302. mands starts at For the partition with Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed and description about the operation by sysfs starts at For the partition without Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Note If you hot add PCI Express cards into an IOU see 4 5 IOU hot remove Common removal procedures for all PCI Express cards 1 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI Express card type 2 Powering off a PCI slot Removing a PCI Express card 4 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI Express card type Note This section describes instructions for the operating system and subsystems e g commands configuration file editing Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card removal with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations Step 3 is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system PCI Express card removal procedure in detail This section describes operations that must be performed in the PCI Express card removal procedure Preparing the software using a PCI Express card See Preparing the software using a PCI Express card in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement
303. mp for investigating the cause of stopping the partition The default is Stop rebooting and Power Off Retry Counter Displays the remaining number of retries possible Cancel Boot Watchdog Cancels the operating system Boot monitoring The default value is the check box being Off Check the Cancel Boot Watchdog check box to cancel the Boot Watchdog function Click Apply button Set the operating system Boot monitoring cancellation Further even though Cancel Boot Watchdog check box was set to On it changes to Off after clicking Apply button For details on the operation of ASR Control window see 1 3 8 Partition x menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 166 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 5 Power Restoration 8 5 8 5 1 8 6 8 6 1 Power Restoration In the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series the system operations for power restoration can be set in the chassis unit This can be set by MMB Web UI Settings for Power Restoration When using a UPS the following items can be set when a power failure is detected The default is Restore TABLE 8 8 Power Restoration Policy Item System operation Always Off Continues the power off status after the power is restored Always On Power on the partition after restoring the power irrespective of the status of the power failure Restore Returns to the state at the time when t
304. n setting User account management Partition creation editing removal CPU DIMM configuration check Memory Operation Mode Spare Mode per partition Performance Mode per partition Normal Mode per partition Partial Memory Mirror Mode per partition Full Mirror Mode per partition PCI Box control PCI Box management allocation to partitions Virtualization MAC address fixing of internal LAN PCH System operation Start Power on by Web UI CLI or Wake On LAN power control Stop Shutdown or forced power off from Web UI CLI or OS Restart Reboot from Web UI or OS partition reset 200 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 1 3 Monitoring and reporting functions operation Minor item Description Power recovery processing Power on control when power is restored from AC Lost Boot control Boot device selection in Web UI Diagnosis mode selection at boot Boot device selection by UEFI Boot Manager boot option setting Scheduled operation Automatic power on off at specified date and time specification Wake On LAN Power on via network Automatic Degraded operation Automatic degraded operation on CPU DIMM SB recovery etc Reserved SB SB automatic switching from faulty SB to Reserved SB ASR Automatic restart of partition when failure occurs Continuous Continuous operation Processing takeover between duplicate MMBs oper
305. n Example bondY is the bonding interface name and ethX is the name of the interface to be incorporated sbin ifenslave bondY ethX For a newly added bonding interface with a SLAVE interface execute the following command to activate the interfaces You need not execute the ifenslave command individually for the SLAVE interface sbin ifup bondY Removing PCI Express cards This section describes the PCI Express card removal procedure with the PCI Hot Plug function The procedure includes common steps for all PCI Express cards and the additional steps required for a specific card function or driver Thus the descriptions cover both the common operations required for all cards e g power supply operations and the specific procedures required for certain types of card For details on removal of the cards not described in this section see the respective product manuals There are two ways to perform PCI hot plug Operation by using sysfs Operation by using dp commands You can perform the operation by using dp commands if Dynamic Reconfiguration utility is installed in the partition If not be sure to use the operation by using sysfs Although you can perform the operation by using Sysfs even if Dynamic Reconfiguration utility is installed in the partition it is recommended to perform the operation by using dp commands to prevent wrong operation Hereafter description about the operation by using dp com
306. n a DU A HDD or SSD which S M A R T has predicted to fail is a HDD or SSD with its status SMART error in System DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For details on DUx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN 3 If HDD or SSD other than target HDD or SSD for preventive replacement fails replace the failed HDD or SSD prior to perform preventive replacement 4 Restart the partition Start WebBIOS from Boot Manager front page 5 Perform Clear Configuration or delete a VD For there is only one VD with RAID 0 Select Clear Configuration from Configuration Wizard in WebBIOS and click Next If below massage appears click Yes This is Destructive Operation Original configuration and data will be lost Select Yes if desired so Note If you perform Clear Configuration all data are deleted Configuration Preview window appears Forthe VD number of RAID 0 group is the most biggest among the environment where there are multiple VDs Select the particular VD and delete it 6 When the data has been erased exit WebBIOS and power off the partition 7 Replace the HDD or SSD which S M A R T predicted to fail 8 Start the partition Then start WebBIOS from the Boot Manager front page 9 In WebBIOS create an array configuration 10 Restore backup data or reinstall the operating system 5 2 2 Preventive replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAID 1 RAID 1
307. n the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Procedure after expansion Start the relevant partition referring to 7 1 1 Powering on Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 3 4 2 Procedure of expansion in cold maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after expansion in cold maintenance 52 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 5 Process after switching to the Reserved SB and Automatic Partition Reboot Procedure before expansion Stop all the partitions referring to 7 1 2 Powering off Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Procedure after expansion Start the required partition referring to 7 1 1 Powering on Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 3 4 3 Expansion of PCI SSD card This section describes the procedure of expanding the PCI SSD card PCI Express SSD card 785GB PCI SSD card1 2TB Note Hot replacement is not supported in the PCI SSD card Stop the partition before the addition In a RAID configuration Linux software RAID 1 Power off the partition For details on powering off see 7 1 2 Powering off Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Add the PCI Express card Power on the partition For details on powering on the partition see 7 1 1 Powering on Partitions
308. n the bus addresses and interface names from the above output example TABLE 4 6 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names Interface name Hardware address Bus address Slot number ethO 0000 0b 01 0 20 eth1 0000 0b 01 1 20 Note When recording a bus address include the function number number after the period Confirm the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address Execute the following command and confirm the correspondence between the interface name and 91 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards hardware address Example ethO For a single interface cat sys class net eth0 address 00 0e 0c 70 c3 38 Example ethO For a bonding interface The bonding driver rewrites the values for the slave interface of the bonding device Confirm the hardware address by executing the following command cat proc net bonding bondY Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver Slave interface eth0 Permanent HW addr 00 0e 00c 70 c3 38 You can use this procedure only when the bonding device is active If the bonding device is not active or the slave has not been incorporated use the same procedure as for a single interface Also the correspondence between the interface name and hardware address is automatically registered by the system in the udev function rule fil
309. n the following procedure 1 2 3 4 Log in to the server with Administrator privileges Confirm the free space on the drive to store the memory dump file Click Control Panel System and Security System Advanced system settings Click Settings under Startup and Recovery on the Advanced tab The Startup and Recovery dialog box appears 192 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data FIGURE 10 16 Startup and Recovery dialog box System startup Default operating system Windows Server 2012 v Time to display list of operating systems 30 S seconds _ Time to display recovery options when needed 30 seconds System failure Write an event to the system log Automatically restart Write debugging information Automatic memory dump Dump file stSystemRoot amp MEMORY DMP vi Overwrite any existing file 5 Specify the following values Select the type of memory dump file from Write debugging information Set the dump file storage location in Dump file Click the OK button to close the Startup and Recovery dialog box Click the OK button to close the System Properties dialog box 8 Restart the partition After the partition restart the settings take effect Then make the following settings Configuring a complete memory dump of Windows Server 2008 R2 The dum
310. n the same network see PRIMECLUSTER GLS for Windows User s Guide B1FN 5851 042Z2 Teaming by Intel PROSet The teaming configuration using Intel PROSet is available For details see the help for Intel PROSet 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use This section describes the operating conditions and use of the management tools 1 6 1 MMB The MMB Web UI operating conditions are as follows Supported Web browsers Firefox version 20 or later operating system Windows or Linux Internet Explorer version 8 or later operating system Windows Maximum number of Web UI login users Up to 16 users can log in to the Web UI at a time If 16 users have logged in when another user attempts to log in a warning dialog box appears and the login attempt is rejected The MMB Web UI login procedure is as follows 1 Specify the URL of the MMB in the Web browser to connect to the MMB gt gt The Login window appears 2 Enter your user name and password The Web UI window System System Status appears MMB user privileges User privileges specify the levels of MMB operating privileges held by user accounts Only users with Administrator privileges can create delete and modify user accounts For details on operations permitted i e privileges in the MMB Web UI menus see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN NTP client function setting on
311. nance object 173 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 1 Maintenance 10 1 6 10 1 7 10 1 8 2 Those who maintain it confirm all partitions that the PCI box belongs have stopped and exchange PCI boxes PEXU Remarks It can be confirmed whether all partitions in the PCI box have stopped when Maintenance Wizard is used Maintenance Wizard is recommended to use and to be exchanged Only the charge maintenance member uses it Maintenance policy preventive maintenance For details on the maintenance policy preventive maintenance for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series see 9 1 Maintenance Policy Preventive Maintenance in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series General Description C122 BO25EN REMCS service overview REMCS Remote Customer Support System connects your server to the REMCS Center through the Internet to enable the system to send server configuration information and automatically report failures when they occur REMCS is thus intended to facilitate prompt responses and solutions to problems The REMCS function of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series are implemented by the following components MMB Collects hardware configuration information of the entire server monitors the server for problems and reports thereon to the REMCS Center QSS Collects troubleshooting information when a software failure occurs in a partition Communication with the REMCS Center is handled by
312. nd FAN speed Supported display Temperature monitoring and display Supported Voltage monitoring and display Supported SB status display CPU DIMM Supported Chipset TPM BMC FBU clock IOU status display Supported DU status display Supported OPL status display Supported MMB status display Supported PCI Box status display Supported status A 2 5 Display of partition configuration information and partition TABLE A 12 Display of partition configuration information and partition status Function Partition status display number of CPUs COREs memory size power status MMB Web UI Supported MMB CLI Supported UEFI A 2 6 Partition configuration and operation setting TABLE A 13 Partition configuration and operation setting Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI Partition configuration Supported Supported Reserved SB allocation Supported Supported CPU setting Supported Flexible I O mode Supported ASR Automatic Server Restart setting for Supported partitions I O space allocation to I O device Supported Memory Operation Mode Supported Supported Memory Mirror RAS Mode Supported Supported PCI Address Mode Supported Supported Dynamic Reconfiguration DR Supported Supported TPM Supported A 2 7 Partition operation TABLE A 14 Partition operation Function MMB MMB CLI UEFI Web UI Video redirection
313. nded BIOS with the partition inactive after replacing the FC card This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device This manual does not describe how to change the configuration of peripherals such as expanding and removing the unit of SAN disk device 87 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards To prevent a device name mismatch due to the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card access the SAN disk unit by using the by id name dev disk by id for the device name If all the paths in a mounted disk become hidden when an FC card is hot replaced unmount the disk Then execute PCI hot plug FC card replacement procedure The procedure for replacing only a faulty FC card without replacing other peripherals is as follows 1 10 11 Make the necessary preparations Stop access to the faulty FC card such as by stopping applications Confirm the slot number of the PCI Express slot See Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Power off the PCI Express slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Physically replace the target card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard This step is performed by the field engineer in cha
314. nent Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 3 Replacing components Since there may be a time deviation after the Home SB is replaced set the time in the operating system when the NTP is not used IOU 1GbE IOU 10GbE If the DR function IOU hot remove and IOU hot add is used the IOU 1GbE and IOU 10GDbE can be replaced even if the partition that uses the IOU 1GbE IOU 10GDbE is powered on If the DR function is not used then the replacement is possible when the partition that uses the IOU 1GbE IOU 10GbE is powered off DU DU can be replaced when the status of the partition that uses the DU to be replaced is powered off MMB In a system with two MMBs installed hot replacement can be used to replace an MMB when the system continues operating Basically the faulty MMB Standby MMB can simply be replaced since a faulty MMB would have been switched with a standby MMB To replace the active MMB switch it with the standby MMB before replacing it The replacement does not affect control and monitoring in the system 3 3 3 Replacement procedures in hot maintenance This section describes the procedures before and after replacement in hot maintenance Procedure before replacement See 7 1 2 Power off of Partitions in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 and stop the relevant partition Procedure after replacement See 7 1 1 Power on of partitions in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E
315. nfiguration wherein both the Normal Mode and the Mirror Mode can be set In case of one CPU 8 16 or 24 DIMMs are mounted and in case of two CPUs 16 32 or 48 DIMMs are mounted 2 DIMM configuration wherein the Normal Mode the Mirror Mode and the Spare Mode can be set In case of one CPU 24 DIMMs are mounted and in case of two CPUs 48 DIMMs are mounted Notes on Windows The operating system may not start at the first startup after an SB is switched to the Reserved SB in a partition running Windows Set Windows to automatically restart to set the Reserved SB in the partition running Windows For details on the setting see 11 4 3 Dump environment setting Windows and check the Automatically restart check box of FIGURE11 14 Startup and Recovery dialog box Consider the time taken to restart if the SB failure results in the suspension of work for the above stated reason The restart will require twice the length of the time since a restart is needed after the switching to the Reserved SB and the subsequent initial startup However the following workaround can suppress the restart request 37 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration Workaround for Windows restart In the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series the restart request can be suppressed by identifying the Reserved SB in advance Execute the following procedures for all the partitions with Win
316. ng time depending on the environment Setting up the dump environment Windows Memory dump is a standard operating system function in Windows However before you can acquire dumps you need to allocate an area for them on the disk This section describes how to set up the environment to acquire memory dumps in Windows To ensure System recovery from a failure configure the following to set up the memory dump environment before starting to use memory dumps Memory dump files and paging files Memory dump and paging files are described below A memory dump file stores debug information on a STOP error fatal system error that occurred in the system After installing the operating system and applications for operations make settings for acquiring memory dumps Different information collected by a memory dump The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series enables you to acquire the following four types of memory dump Each type of memory dump gathers different information Complete memory dump A complete memory dump records all the physical memory contents at the time when the system stops It requires free space equivalent to the physical memory size plus about 300 MB on the boot volume The system can store only one dump at a time The new file would overwrite any existing dump file at the specified storage location Kernel memory dump A kernel memory dump records the contents of the Kernel memory space only For 32 bit windows dump file of up to
317. ning may be output about scaling on the receive side being disabled for the above described reasons In this event simply click the OK button For details on the scaling function on the receive side or other precautions see the help for Intel PROSet or check the information at Device Manager Properties of the target LAN Details Receive Side Scaling 237 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 8 NIC Network Interface Card For the WOL Wake on LAN support conditions of operating systems see the respective operating system manuals and restrictions For remote power control in an operating system that does not support WOL perform operations from the MMB Web UI 238 C122 E175 01EN Appendix H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series H 1 H 1 MIB Tree Structure Appendix H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series This appendix describes the tree structure of the MIB provided with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series If SVS agent options are installed MIB information of Agent can be acquired by SNMP service on the partition For details on the MIB tree of SVS see the MIB file of SVS MIB Tree Structure MIB information under mmb 1 is provided by the MMB firmware You can acquire it by accessing the MMB You can also acquire the standard MIB information from the MMB Note The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series uses the SNMP function of the MMB to recogni
318. nnecting path sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 2 enabled XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready X 5202020 sdo 8 32 active ready 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux Hot Addition of PCI Express cards This section describes the PCI Express card addition procedure with the PCI Hot Plug function The procedure includes common steps for all PCI Express cards and the additional steps required for a specific card function or driver Thus the descriptions cover both the common operations required for all cards e g power supply operations and the specific procedures required for certain types of card For details on addition of the cards not described in this section see the respective product manuals There are two ways to perform PCI hot plug Operation by using sysfs Operation by using dp commands You can perform the operation by using dp commands if Dynamic Reconfiguration utility is installed in the partition If not be sure to use the operation by using sysfs Although you can perform the operation by using Sysfs even if Dynamic Reconfiguration utility is installed in the partition it is recommended to perform the operation by using dp commands to prevent wrong operation Hereafter description about the operation by using dp commands starts at Fo
319. nstallation Guide ESXi 5 server MegaRAID SAS Software Provides technical information on using array controllers None Refer to the manual from the second DVD for ServerView Suite which you can purchase optionally or from the following URL The Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server htto manuals ts fujitsu com MegaRAID SAS Device Provides technical information on using array controllers None Driver Installation Refer to the manual from the second DVD for ServerView Suite which you can purchase optionally or from the following URL The Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server http manuals ts fujitsu com Modular RAID Controller Provides technical information on using array controllers None Installation Guide Refer to the manual from the second DVD for ServerView Suite which you can purchase optionally or from the following URL The Fujitsu Technology Solutions manuals server http manuals ts fujitsu com Abbreviations This manual uses the following product name abbreviations Formal product name Abbreviation Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 for Intel64 Oracle Linux 6 x86_64 VMware vSph
320. nt page 2 3 Select EFI Internal Shell and press Enter key UEFI Shell starts up FIGURE J 3 Boot Manager menu Boot Manager Boot Option Menu Legacy CD ROM 4 Input below command on UEFI Shell Shell gt drivers 5 Driver list appears 243 C122 E175 01EN Appendix J How to Confirm Firmware of SAS RAID Controller Card J 1 How to confirm firmware version of SAS RAID controller card FIGURE J 4 Driver list EFI Shell version 2 31 0 38 Current running mode 1 1 2 Device mapping table bIkO Removable BlockDevice Alias ull PcieRoot 0 ci 0x1A 0x0 USB 0x0 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x0 blk1 Removable Bl kDev ice Alias null Pc ieRoot 0x0 Pc i 0x1f 0x0 USB 0x0 0x0 US x4 0x0 Unit 0x1 blk2 Removable BlockDevice Alias mull PcieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1A 0x0 1x0 0x0 USB 0x0 Umit O gt blk3 Removable B kDev ice Alias mull PcieRoot 0x0 i 0x1A 0x0 USB 0x0 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x3 blk4 Removable ockDevice Alias ull PcieRoot 0 Pci Ox1A 0x0 USB 0x0 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Unit 0x4 blk5 Removable BlockDevice Alias mull PcieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1A 0x x0 0x0 USB 0x4 0x0 Un it 0x5 blk6 Removable BlockDevice Alias null PcieRoot 0x0 Pci 0x1C 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x0 Ctr 1 0x0 Scsi 0x1 0x0 blk Removable B De gt Alias null Pc ieRoot 0x0 0x1C 0x0 Pci 6x0 0x0 Ctr 1 0x0 Ses Press ESC in 1 seconds skip startup ns
321. ntrol 8 2 Partition Power on and Power off FIGURE 8 2 Power Control window Model PRIMEQUEST2S00 Active MMB O Part Namber MCXXXXXXX Fujitsu Serial Number SHS Status Nan uad Perution Power Control Power Control Select a Power Control opton for ome or more parions then chok the Apph buon to take effect column has the partition number For the details of Power Control window see 1 3 1 Power Control window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 3 Click the Apply button after the Power Control of the partition to be powered on is set to Power On gt A confirmation dialog box appears 4 Click the OK button to execute and click the Cancel button to cancel Remarks A warning message appears if the partition is already powered on or if the specified control fails because the power is turned off For the details on the display and setting items see 1 3 1 Power Control window in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 8 2 7 Controlling Partition Startup by using the MMB Only users with Administrators or Operator privileges can set partition boot control This section describes the partition startup control procedure using the MMB 1 Click Partition Power Control The Power Control window appears 160 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 2 Partition Power on and
322. number Procedure for Partition Power On and Power Off There are single as well as multiple partitions Power on Power off operation is also the same in case of multiple partitions If multiple partitions share one external device first turn off the power source for multiple partitions and then power off the external device The privileges for powering on and powering off the partitions are as follows TABLE 8 3 Privilege for power on and power off User Privilege Power on and power off privilege Administrator Has permission for all partitions Operator Has permission for all partitions TABLE 8 4 Privilege for power on and power off continued User Privilege Power on and power off privilege Partition Operator Has permission for only the partition authorized for the user User Does not have permission for any partition CE Does not have permission for any partition For the details on the user privileges of the MMB Web UI menu see 1 1 Menu list of Web UI in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 Partition Power on by MMB This section describes the procedure of powering on the partition by MMB 1 Log into the MMB Web UI gt MMB Web UI window appears 2 Click Partition Power Control gt Power Control window appears This window displays only the partitions having an SB or IOU 159 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Co
323. o button of the particular PCIC number and click Next 101 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXXXXX Serial Number Status 2Maintenance Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Selection Her Select the unit to perform maintenance on Cei OK fret l Ee 1528 1 Standby Not present Not present Not present C4 Standby Not present Not present il Say DENM 6 Select Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition and click Next Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMBRO Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status Normal gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Maintenance System State Help Select the maintenance system mode Maintenance System Mode Hot System Maintenance arget unit not included in a partition Hot Partition Maintenance Target unit in a running partition Warm System Maintenance Target unit in a powered off partitions Cold System Maintenance All partitions powered off breakers on Cold System Maintenance gl All partitions powered off breakers off Previous Next 7 Maintenance mode is set with information area of MMB Web UI gray out and then replacement instruction for the particular PCIC appears Add a new PCI Express ca
324. o not update the firmware in a configuration containing a faulty MMB or SB 199 C122 E175 01EN Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series A 1 2 Operation Appendix A Functions Provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series This appendix lists the functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series It also lists management network specifications A 1 Function List The following lists the functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series A 1 1 Action TABLE A 1 Action Operation Minor item Description User operation User operation setting Operation privilege setting for each user account Account synchronization between duplicate MMBs via LDAP GUI Web user interface CLI External interface KVM local MMB command line interface SVS command line interface Local VGA USB Remote console Console redirection Serial console over LAN Video redirection Virtual media UEFI UEFI interface management LAN connection PC etc Function that uses PC connected to management LAN as graphical console Function that assumes drive of drive partition side of UEFI shell Boot Manager A 1 2 Operation TABLE A 2 Operations operation Minor item Description System Management LAN setting MMB management LAN setting construction Maintenance LAN REMCS CE port setting Network setting internal LAN Operating privilege range Partition configuratio
325. ode A mouse pointer in Video redirection window is adjusted to relative position calculated by difference from previous position of a mouse in terminal PC Hide mouse mode 1 Set a mouse to Hide mode This mode should be used if action of a mouse pointer in Video redirection does not match with that in terminal PC Options Keyboard Mouse Encryption Encrypts keyboard data and mouse data Window Size Actual Size Return size of Video redirection window to normal size 100 Fit to Client Resolution Fit to resolution of client window Fit to Host Resolution Fit to resolution of host window GUI Languages DE Deutsch Set menu display to German EN English Set menu display to English JA AAR Set menu display to Japanese Media Set virtual media Active Users Display user who is performing video redirection Power 2 Power On Power on a partition Immediate Power Off Power off a partition immediately Power Cycle After powering off a partition power on a partition again Press Power Button Press power button Immediate Reset Perform hardware reset Pulse NMI Issue NMI Graceful Reset Reboot Perform Graceful Reset Reboot Graceful Power off Shutdown Perform Graceful Power off Shutdown Set Boot Options Perform setup of Boot Options Help About JViewer Display version information If you click the About JViewer it may take a few minutes to app
326. of Home SB No replacement eseeesenene tenerent tentent tenente tente tente tente tente tente ttn tents 56 TABLE 3 20 Relationship between LSB No and Socket No sese tente tentent tenente tente tentent 57 TABLE 4 1 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names sss 66 TABLE 4 2 Hardware address description examples eeeseeee esent tenente tenente tenente tenen enne 67 TABLE 4 3 Example of interface information about interfaces after replacement eene 70 TABLE 4 4 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names sees 77 TABLE 4 5 Hardware address description examples eeeeeeeeeete tenente tenente tenente nnne nente nennen 78 TABLE 4 6 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names sees 91 TABLE 4 7 Hardware address description examples eese eene nene nntn tnter tenen nennen entente nene 92 TABLE 4 8 Example of interface information about the replacement NIC esee 94 TABLE 4 9 Example of entered values corresponding to the interface names before and after NIC replacement 95 Table4 10 Confirmation of interface names essent nente nnne nnne treten tette tente tente tente tente ttn teen ttn tenens 96 TABLE 8 1 Power on method and power on unit
327. ole BMC Physical IP Set it from This IP address is used to access the console Redirection address the MMB redirection function in each partition from the IP Address 5 Web Ul PC on the management LAN An IP address on the management LAN is assigned to each partition 1 These three addresses must have the same subnet address 2 The server administrator need not be concerned with individual IP addresses specified for communication 3 The IP address is intended only for communication with the active MMB 4 It is connected to the communication of the Internal LAN and is not connected to any external network The assigned IP address must be in a different subnet from the management LAN maintenance LAN or production LAN The default setting is 172 30 0 1 24 and it does not have to be changed unless it is in conflict with another subnet 5 This IP address is to access the console redirection function provided by BMC It accesses BMC from the user port on the management LAN of MMB via the dedicated network for BMC to MMB communication inside the cabinet MMB changes the local IP address of BMC to the IP address on the management LAN by NAT From the PC on the management LAN the console redirection function of BMC is used via MMB 6 If Disable is set for this address neither REMCS notification nor e mail notification in case of panic Remarks A separate subnet must be assigned to Management LAN Maintenance LAN extern
328. on containing the IOU Notes You can enable or disable WOL of LAN ports on IOU per IOU by MMB Web UI Default value of WOL is disable If you use WOL of LAN port on IOU set Onboard LAN Mode to Enabled WOL enable For details on Mode window see Mode window in PRIMEQUEST2000 series Too Reference C122 E177EN If the power supply is stopped or IOU is pulled out the setting of WOL is initialized Restore the setting of WOL with Operating System Enable or Disable WOL is set from both BIOS and the operating system To enable WOL in Windows following settings are required for each port of the device manager Check the Wake On Magic Packet from the powered off state checkbox in Device Manager Network Adaptor INTEL R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection Property Power Management In case of setting in windows Intel PROSet of the supplied driver must be installed n Legacy Boot ROM Priority is Legacy operating system cannot boot from a HDD included a SB other than Home SB Move the HDD installing operating system into HDD slot on Home SB or set the SB including the HDD installing operating system as Home SB After switching Home SB the number of Reset registered in SEL increase by one only first time when the particular partition starts 8 2 2 Partition Power on unit The units that can be powered on and the power on methods are given below For details on the privil
329. on the IOU including onboard NIC T Collect the information associated with NIC on the replaced IOU An interface ethX is created for the replaced NIC Make a table with information including the interface name hardware address bus address and location of the interface made corresponding to NIC mounted on replaced according to step1 and step 2 of the section 4 3 1 Preparation for IOU hot replacement The interface name hardware address and PCI bus address may change before and after replacing IOU TABLE 4 3 Example of interface information about interfaces after replacement Interface name Hardware address Bus address Location etho 20 04 44 f1 44 d2 0000 86 01 0 Onboard 0 eth1 2c 04 4411 44 d3 0000 86 01 1 Onboard 1 eth2 00 19 99 d7 36 5f 0000 87 00 0 PCI 0 For replacing IOU itself confirm that new hardware address is defined to NIC of onboard Confirm that the interface name used before replacing NIC is re assigned New PCI bus address may be assigned Also confirm that the relevant entries in the above described table were automatically added to the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules For expanding or removing PCI Express card by replacing IOU the number of entry in table increase or decrease Deactivate each newly created interface The interfaces created for the replaced NIC may be active by turning on IOU In such cases you need to deactivate them before changing the
330. on when using the Memory Mirror is selected from the MMB Web UI Mirror maintenance mode the default When restarting the partition the failed DIMM and the paired DIMM are not incorporated The other normal DIMMs will maintain the Memory Mirror The Memory Mirror status will be maintained because only the normal DIMM would be used Since the DIMM area suspected to have failed will be degraded the memory capacity seen from the operating system will be reduced Memory capacity maintenance mode The Memory Mirror status of the memory mirror group in which the memory suspected to have failed will be deleted after the partition is restarted Up to six The DIMM DIMM with the same NN number as the DIMMZNNM including the failure suspected memory are not incorporated The memory mirror group maintains the status of the Memory Mirror For details on the memory mirror group see TABLE 3 8 Memory mirror group TABLE 3 8 Memory mirror group Memory mirror group 1 Memory mirror group 2 Memory mirror group 3 Memory mirror group 4 DIMM 0A0 DIMM 0CO DIMM 1 AO DIMM 1CO DIMM 0A1 DIMM 0C1 DIMM 1A1 DIMM 1C1 DIMM 0A2 DIMM 0C2 DIMM 1 A2 DIMM 1C2 DIMM 0A3 DIMM 0C3 DIMM 1A3 DIMM 1C3 DIMM 0A4 DIMM 0C4 DIMM 1 A4 DIMM 1C4 DIMM 0A5 DIMM 0C5 DIMM 1A5 DIMM 1C5 DIMM 0BO DIMM 0D0 DIMM 1 BO DIMM 1 DO DIMM 0B1 DIMM 0D1 DIMM 1B1 DIMM 1D1 DIMM 0B2 DIMM 0D2 DIMM 1B2 DIMM 1D2 DIMM 0B3 DIMM 0D3 DIMM 1B3 DIMM 1D3 DIMM 0B4 DIMM
331. onent undergoing maintenance when Maintenance Wizard is running TABLE F 21 PCI Box status and PCI Box LED display Status Power Alarm Location AC off and partition power Off Off Off Off Partition including PCI Box Power On On green Error of PCI Box On orange Identifying PCI Box On blue Turn on by Maintenance Wizard F 1 13 PCI Express slot in PCI Box For PCI Express slot in a PCI Box Alarm LED turns on per a slot LED display of PCI Express slot conforms to the standard of PCI Express TABLE F 22 PCI Express card status and LED display PCI Express card status Power Alarm Normal state of PCI Express card On Off Error of PCI Express card On Inserting PCI Express card Blinking 222 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs F 2 LED Mounting Locations F 1 1410 PSU The IO PSU comes equipped with the following LEDs TABLE F 23 IO PSU LED LED type Color Function Note AC Green Indicates whether there is AC input to the lO PSU control individual PSU DC Green Indicates the on off status of each IO PSU IO PSU control CHECK Orange Indicates whether there is an error in the MMB FW control lO PSU TABLE F 24 IO PSU status and LED display Status AC DC CHECK AC input to all IO PSUs is off Off Off Off AC input to the IO PSU is off and AC input to another Off Off Off lO PSU is on AC input is on and the IO PSU is off 5 V
332. onment Windows Partition hung up not stopped Acquire memory dump by 10 4 1 Logs that can be collected sadump by the MMB Logs that can be collected by the MMB The MMB Web UI can collect the events that occur in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system The SEL system event log can hold up to 32 000 events When the SEL is full each new entry will replace the oldest entry in the SEL You can filter the event logs to display download event log stored in the SEL and clear all the stored event logs in the SEL from the System Event Log window This section describes operations with the SEL Checking the event log Procedure 1 Click System System Event Log The System Event Log window appears 185 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data FIGURE 10 11 System Event Log window in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E Model PRIMEQUEST2800E Active MMB 0 Part Number MCXXXNXXN Serial Number POSNER gt System gt System Event Log O6FOLFF Power On In Progress F Ta a orr haoa COGFOSFF Power OF In Progress mad cre Clam Al Events Downicad Fite FIGURE 10 12 System Event log window in PRIMEQUEST 2800B Model PRIMEQUEST 2800B E _ Part Number MCF3AC111 _ Serial Number Suspend Status Normal 2014 01 17 113454 2014 01 17 11 3
333. operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number To disable a PCI Express card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out The interface ethX is removed at the same time echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots slot number gt power 6 Save the interface configuration file Save all the interface configuration files that you checked in step 2 by executing the following command udevd and configuration scripts may reference the contents of files in etc sysconfig network scripts For this reason create a save directory and save these files to the directory so that udevd and the configuration scripts will not reference them cd etc sysconfig network scripts mkdir temp mv ifcfg ethX temp following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondX temp 7 Physically replace the NIC by using MMB Maintenance Wizard This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system For details on the operation of replacement see step 1 to 7 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 8 Delete the entries associated with the replaced NIC from the udev function rule file Each entry for the new NIC is automatically added to the udev function rule file etc udev rules d 70 persistent net rules when the NIC is det
334. or SLAVE under bonding Execute the following command to incorporate the SLAVE interface into the existing bonding configuration Incorporate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifenslave bondY ethX The VLAN related operation is normally not required because a VLAN is created on the bonding device Remove the directory to which the interface configuration file was saved After all the interfaces to be replaced have been replaced remove the save directory created in step 6 by executing the following command rmdir etc sysconfig network scripts temp Execute the higher level application processing required after NIC replacement Perform the necessary post processing such as starting an application or restoring changed settings for the operations performed for the higher level applications in step 3 4 6 5 Hot replacement procedure for iSCSI NIC When performing hot replacement of NICs used for iSCSI connection use the following procedures 4 6 1 Overview of common replacement procedures for PCI Express cards 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 4 6 4 Network card replacement procedure A supplementary explanation of the procedure follows Prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement The prerequisites for iSCSI NIC hot replacement are as follows The storage connection is established on a multipath using DM MP Device Mapper Multipath or ETERNUS multidriver EMPD To repl
335. orated in bonding Confirm the hardware address of other interfaces by repeating the operation with the same command The following table lists examples of descriptions TABLE 4 2 Hardware address description examples Interface name Hardware address Bus address Location ethO 20 04 44 f1 44 f0 0000 89 01 0 Onboard 0 eth1 20 04 44 f1 44 f1 0000 89 01 1 Onboard 1 eth2 00 19 99 d7 36 5f 0000 8c 00 0 PCI 0 3 Execute the higher level application processing required before NIC replacement Stop all access to the interface as follows Stop the application that was confirmed in step 2 as using the interface or exclude the interface from the target of use by the application 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 2 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations before deactivating the real interface sbin ifdown ethX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the SLAVE interface of a bonding device If the bonding device is operating in mode 1 use the following steps to exclude safely SLAVE interface to be replaced from operation In any other mode removing it immediately sh
336. ork card removal procedure eeees 4 8 5 Hot removal procedure for iSCSI NIC iere e ete i n dus CHAPTERS Replacement of HDD SSD siiis ien nente tente ttn tette ttn tette tt ttn te tnnt tante tnnt tette ttti tette tnnt tnter 5 1 Hot replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware RAID configuration esee tente tentent tnnt 5 1 1 Hot replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAIDO configuration sseeeneeene etes 5 1 2 Hot replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration 5 2 Preventive replacement of HDD SSD with Hardware RAID configuration sees 5 2 1 Preventive replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAIDO configuration sees 5 2 2 Preventive replacement of failed HDD SSD with RAID 1 RAID 1E RAID 5 RAID 6 or RAID 10 configuration 118 5 3 Replacement of HDD SSD in case hot replacement cannot be performed essere 119 CHAPTER6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows ssseseseeeeeenenene nennen nnne tentent tenente entente nens 120 6 1 Overview of Hot Maintenarice reine E EU RERO RE EHE THERETO EUH CHER o HEC Reo Rn ASE iE Sans 120 6 1 1 Overall flow eR o e Ro RU Rn e e eR te 120 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards sesenta tenerent nnns 121 6 2 1 Replacement proced
337. ot is mounted on an IOU to be replaced hot replacement of the IOU cannot be performed The step of hot replacement of IOU is described below in order 4 3 14 Preparation for IOU hot replacement The description of the flow of preparations is given below 1 Arrange for the IOU for replacement Note This step is not needed if the IOU is reused when expanding replacing or removing PCI Express card After arranging for the IOU check whether I O device of the IOU normally works at free partition Pre diagnosis does not performed when IOU is added For replacing IOU or expanding replacing or removing PCI Express card in the IOU it is needed to remove IOU If IOU is removed PCI Express card and onboard NIC installed in the IOU are also removed Check that no software use the PCI Express card to be removed performing either of below measure a Stopping the software which uses PCI Express card or onboard NIC in the IOU to be removed before removing b Preventing the software from operating PCI Express card and onboard NIC Execute the command opt FJSVdp util sbin dp show IOU from shell on OS to check resources installed in the IOU Example checking IOUS opt FJSVdp util sbin dp show IOU3 64 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU 0000 82 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 83 09 0 PCI bridge
338. ot perform these tasks under any circumstances Otherwise product failure may result PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series General Description Unpacking an optional Fujitsu product such as an optional adapter delivered to the customer Modifying or recycling the product Modifying this product or recycling a secondhand product by overhauling it without prior approval may result in personal injury to users and or bystanders or damage to the product and or other property Note on erasing data from hard disks when disposing of the product or transferring it Disposing of this product or transferring it as is may enable third parties to access the data on the hard disk and use it for unforeseen purposes To prevent the leakage of confidential information and important data all of the data on the hard disk must be erased before disposal or transfer of the product However it can be difficult to completely erase all of the data from the hard disk Simply initializing reformatting the hard disk or deleting files on the operating system is insufficient to erase the data even though the data appears at a glance to have been erased This type of operation only makes it impossible to access the data from the operating system Malicious third parties can restore this data If you save your confidential information or other important data on the hard disk you should completely erase the data instead of simply carrying out the aforementioned operation to prevent
339. ot the actual order of stored events in the SEL 189 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data Next button The window displays the next event according to the display order in the System Event Log window TABLE 10 6 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Detail window Item Description Severity Displays the severity of the event or error Error Serious problem such as a hardware failure Warning Event that is not necessarily serious but is a potential problem in the future Info Event such as a partition power on reported for informational purposes Date Time Displays the local time of occurrence of the event or error Format YYY Y MM DD HH MM SS Source Displays the name of the sensor indicating the occurrence of the event or error Unit Displays the unit whose sensor indicated the occurrence of an event or error For example if an error occurs at CPU 0 on SB 0 this item will display SB 0 To identify the unit the FRU in control of the sensor was identified from the event ID of the sensor Then the associated parent entry was retrieved from the Entity Association Record The displayed name is the Board Unit Name written in the FRU Record of the parent entry Each unit has a link to a webpage for information on the unit You can see the part number and serial number of the unit there Event ID
340. oth the management LAN and the production LAN on the partition connected to the subnet of the LAN to which the MMB User Port is connected Redundant configuration of the management LAN For the MMB only MMB O0 is mounted as standard By mounting MMB 1 the MMB can be redundant for PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E MMB cannot be redundant for PRIMEQUEST 2800B For PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E when the MMB detects an error in the MMB itself it switches the active MMB so that operations can continue When the active MMB is switched the virtual IP address is inherited by the MMB that becomes active Therefore the administrator does not to need to consider which MMB is active 9 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 3 Management LAN Because the MMB cannot recognize errors occurring in the path for accessing the MMB user port from the management LAN it is unable to recover from them by switching the active MMB Therefore two user ports of the management LAN are mounted on the MMB This redundant configuration enables recovery from management LAN errors The redundant configuration of the user port is disabled as standard and only user port 40 is enabled When the redundant configuration of the user port of the management LAN is enabled the NICs on both user port 0 and user port 1 are enabled These two NICs appear as one virtual interface from external devices because of the bonding function each MMB has a physica
341. ould not cause any problems Confirm that the SLAVE interface to be replaced is the interface currently being used for communication First confirm the interface currently being used for communication by executing the following command cat sys class net bondY bonding active slave If the displayed interface matches the SLAVE interface being replaced execute the following command to switch the current communication interface to another SLAVE interface sbin ifenslave c bondY ethZz ethZ Interface that composes bondY and does not perform hot replacement Finally remove the SLAVE interface being replaced from the bonding configuration Immediately after being removed the interface is automatically no longer used sbin ifenslave d bondY ethX 5 Save all the interface configuration files that you checked in step 2 by executing the following command udevd and configuration scripts may reference the contents of files in etc sysconfig network scripts For this reason create a save directory and save these files to the directory so that udevd and the configuration scripts will not reference them cd etc sysconfig network scripts mkdir temp mv ifcfg ethX temp following also executed for bonding configuration mv ifcfg bondX temp 67 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU 6 Delete the entries associated with the repl
342. overview FIGURE 10 3 Label location eee FIGURE 10 4 Alarm LED on the front panel of the device FIGURE 10 5 System status display in the MMB Web UI window FIGURE 10 6 Alarm E Mail settings windOw essent tnte tenete tette terne tete tette tete te tete tete tn te tete nint FIGURE 10 7 System status display rr RHENUM EUREN ERREUR UH et FIGURE 10 8 System event log display esee seeete tenete te tenete tente ten tete ntt te tete teens te rinova stearsa seori FIGURE 10 9 Partition Configuration windOw eseseseeeeseeeee nennen tnter terne tnnt tn tenete teet te tete te etna tntin FIGURE 10 10 Partition Event Log windOW essent tnter ntnte tete tntt tnter te teret tette tete te teen FIGURE 10 11 System Event Log window in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E seen 186 FIGURE 10 12 System Event log window in PRIMEQUEST 2800B eesssseseseseeeeeene entente tete tnte tnter ntn 186 FIGURE 10 13 System Event Log Filtering Condition window in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E sss 187 FIGURE 10 14 System Event Log Filtering Condition window in PRIMEQUEST 2800B seen 188 FIGURE 10 15 System Event Log Detail windOW esses entente tne ntnte tne tete tnter tete tn tatnen FIGURE 10 16 Startup and Recovery dialog bo
343. p of a complete memory of Windows Server 2008 R2 cannot be set from the start and the recovery dialog boxes of the system After it sets the dump file preservation ahead in the start and the recovery dialog boxes the value of the registry is changed as follows HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control CrashControl CrashDumpEnablea Kind REG_DWORD and data 0x1 Please reboot a system after the setting Please refer to above mentioned Memory dump configuration methods of Windows Server 2012 for the preservation passing of the dump file and the setting of the superscription Confirming the memory dump configuration Acquire a memory dump Confirm that dump was created correctly Also measure the time taken to output the dump and restart the system so as to estimate the time required until business could resume Then reconsider the type of dump to acquire as needed To acquire a memory dump select Partition and then the Power Control window of the MMB Web UI Then specify NMI for the target partition 193 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data For details on the procedure see Chapter 1 MMB Web UI Web User Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Configuring the paging file For Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012R2 Configure the paging file in the following pro
344. peration complete Please click OK button ox 3 Confirm replaced PCI card by using Device Manager After replacement of target PCI card open Device Manager and confirm that the target device is recognized correctly Note As the follow right click target device in Device Manager if there are Enable in displayed menu check Enable In case of Disable this work is not necessary z Device Manager ic E File Action View Help e rs LE LI ole EE a WIN JOEKP4USV10 jii Computer E Disk drives ty Display adapters ef DVD CD ROM drives ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers ji Monitors X Network adapters Inc Eu Intel 1350 gc Undete Driver Software X Intel R 1350 gi Disable Intel R 1350 gi Uninstall X Intel R 1350 Gic X Intel R 1350 Gic X Intel R 1350 Gic Properties X Intel R 1350 Gigabit Network Connection p Other devices e Dl Processors H lt Storage controllers EM System devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers Scan for hardware changes 6 2 3 About removal Note Windows does not support PCI card removal 6 3 NIC Hot Plugging For NIC hot plugging replacement you need to especially consider other matters in addition to the procedure described in 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards This section describes NIC hot plugging combined with teaming 6 3 1 Hot plugging a NIC incorporated into teaming 134 C122
345. press cards In case of multi function card there are some cards that have same segment number same bus number and different function numbers In this case please perform Step 2 and No 3 of follows respectively Addition procedure 1 Confirm physical location of added PCI card 2 Add PCI card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard FE s work 3 Confirm added PCI card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard Note FE will perform work of step 4 of replacement procedure and step 2 of addition procedure 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards This section describes the PCI Express card replacement procedure that does not involve additional steps e g when a redundant application is not used Note Insert the PCI Express card securely 6 2 1 Replacement procedure 1 Confirm the physical location segment number and bus number a Identify the mounting location of the PCI card to be replaced See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to check the mounting location board and slot of the PCI card to be replaced b Confirm segment number and bus number Open component information corresponded to confirmed physical location with step a by using MMB Web UI For this example it is explained the method to confirm segment number and bus number of PCI slot 1 in PCl_Box 0 Select System PCI Box PCIl_Box 0 in MMB Web UI and see Seg Bus Dev of PCIC 1 at PCI Express Slots in PCI Boxst0 information
346. procedure in detail Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot See Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 109 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot See Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Powering off PCI Express slots 4 8 3 See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail FC card Fibre Channel card removal procedure The descriptions in this section assume that an FC card is being removed Notes The FC card used for SAN boot does not support hot plugging Although you can hot replace FC card used for dump device of sadump collecting dump of memory fails until reconfiguring HBA UEFI or extended BIOS with the partition inactive after replacing the FC card This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device This manual does not describe how to change the configuration of peripherals such as expanding and removing the unit of SAN disk device To prevent a device name mismatch due to the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card access the SAN disk unit by using the by id name dev disk by i
347. ps are how to acquire memory dump by sadump where partition does not operate due to hung up of operating system and so on 1 Select Power Control from Partition menu in MMB Web UI Power Control window appears 2 Select sadump and click Apply button in Power Control window The partition status changes to Dumping Below window appears during memory dump ACPI PNP0A03 0 PCI 7 0 ACPI PNPOF03 0 TESSTAHEHHESESETAREASSEASAESEES X X oe When acquiring memory dump completes the partition becomes to either of below state The partition automatically starts to re start The partition status changes to Halt and system also becomes to halt state In this case restart the partition manually When acquiring memory dump completes below window appears ACPI PNP0A03 0 PCI 7 0 ACPI PNPOF03 0 100 0 Dumping Complete Waiting for reboot Make the acquired memory dump portable and submit it to distributor where you purchased your product or your sales representative For the way how to make memory dump portable see the manual of operating system sadump may automatically start in some operating systems For such cases see the manual of operating system Note If the first disk fails when dump device is duplicated memory dump is output into secondary disk However memory dump terminates abnormally if the device error is detected during memory dump into first disk 10 5 Con
348. r Oe In Progress iom Status etai itia coerosr post lt gt Finding out about a faulty partition Investigate the entire system partition configuration and the faulty partition in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E Select Partition Partition Configuration in the MMB menu window You can find out the status of each partition FIGURE 10 9 Partition Configuration window Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 0 co Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number JC12450016 Status A Warning User Administration Network Configuration Maintenance Partition gt Partition Configuration a Partition Configuration L Select a partition then click the Add Remove Unit Set Partition Name or Home buttons to configure the partition B O0 masuko On H e O1 annotboot Standby H cannotboot Standby H O3 iiijima Standby H Note R represents Reserved SB H represents Home SB represents Installed SB IOU xPAR other than the above Add Unit Remove Unit Home Cancel aam gt 182 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting Finding out the partition error status 10 2 6 Examine the partition error status in PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E Select System Partition Event Log in the MMB menu window On the Partition Event Log window you can find out about problems in the partition from the displayed log
349. r the partition with Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed and description about the operation by sysfs starts at For the partition without Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Notes If you hot add PCI Express cards into an IOU see 4 4 Hot add of IOU Common addition procedures for all PCI Express cards 1 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type 2 Confirming that the PCI Express slot power is off Adding a PCI card This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 99 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards 4 Powering on a PCI Express slot 5 Performing the required operating system and software operations depending on the PCI card type Notes This section describes instructions for the operating system and subsystems e g commands configuration file editing Be sure to refer to the respective product manuals to confirm the command syntax and impact on the system before performing tasks with those instructions The following sections describe card addition with the required instructions e g commands configuration file editing for the operating system and subsystems together with the actual hardware operations Step 3 is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail This section describes ope
350. rations that must be performed in the PCI Express card addition procedure Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot See Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot See Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Powering on and off PCI Express slots See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Operation for Hot add of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard This item describes Operation for Hot add of PCI Express card PCIC by Maintenance Wizard Below works are performed by the field engineer in charge of your system 1 Start Maintenance Wizard menu by MMB Web UI and display Maintenance Wizard view 2 Select Replace Unit and click Next Status System Partition User Administration Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMBSO Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Notice Maintenance screen can only be used by one user at time Select the type of maintenance activity to perform amp Replace Unit Replaces a failed unit or replaces a unit to prevent failure Enter Maintenance Mode Sets only Maintenance mode when Maintenance excludes Replace are performed Exit Maintenan
351. rd with this window displayed See the figure in B 1 Physical Mounting Locations of Components to confirm the location of the PCI Express card to be replaced 102 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button first If you do so the current Unit configuration will be display in a new window Please replace PCI Box 0 PCIC 1 When replacement operation is complete please click on the Next button Previous Next View Configuration Note Do NOT click Next until adding the PCIC 8 After replacing the particular PCIC and powering on the particular PCIC slot click Next For how to power on the PCIC slot see Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail It is the administrator of your system who power on the PCI Express slot Model PRIMEQUEST Active MMBSO Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Under Maintenance Status Partition 0 gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Replacement Instruction notice If you want to compare the Unit configuration before and after the replacement please click on the View Configuration button
352. re c ener eene ee de nce eee hes e eade ee dc endet d c p e edens 121 6 2 2 fie elisaiotev oi e CET T O v DvoOO eem 129 6 2 3 About remoVval dp OP RUDROURURERURUGERUIARIRUHUGUIDDMM DELE 134 6 3 NIG Hot Plugging iness en An REC ee el En 134 6 3 1 Hot plugging a NIC incorporated into teaming sssssseeseeeeeeeenente nete nennen tnnt nennen tenente nens 134 6 3 2 Hot plugging a non redundant NIC esssssseseeeseeenene nennt tenete tentent tete tette tente tente tente tente tente ten tenens 138 6 3 3 NiCaddition proced re LE 138 6 4 FG Card Hot Pligaglrig tes ulate Rr ERU OE ee ERE ENDO E II UE 138 6 4 1 Hot plugging an FC card incorporated with the ETERNUS multipath driver eene 139 xiii C122 E175 01EN Preface 6 4 2 FG Card addition Procedure xcu eem UE TORRE E INE IUIS IL 145 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI eis esse eese teete tente ttnta tete tte ta tnter te tete tee teen tetensnnan 145 6 5 1 Confirming the incorporation of a card with MPD sss nennen teet tentent tenenti 146 6 5 2 D we sarei BRL 150 CHAPTER 7 Backup and Fiestore ctt tir con ste rti nana tee dto t od e D Eo TP at 153 7 1 Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Information essent ntn nter tentent tenten
353. red as one interface It also describes cases where multiple NICs are bonded together to configure one interface bonding configuration For bonding multiple NIC by using PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services GLS see PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Service Configuration and Administration Guide Redundant Line Control Function for Linux J2UZ 7781 Single NIC interface Bonding configuration interface MASTER SLAVE interface interface FIGURE 4 2 Single NIC interface and bonding configuration interface NIC replacement procedure This section describes the procedure for NIC replacement Notes When replacing multiple NICs be sure to replace them one by one If you replace multiple cards at the same time they may not be correctly configured To perform hot replacement in a system where a bonding device is installed design the system so that it specifies ONBOOT YES in all interface configuration files the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth files and the etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg bond files regardless of whether the NIC to be replaced is a configuration interface of the bonding device An IP address does not need to be assigned to unused interfaces This procedure is for preventing the device name of the replacement target NIC from being changed after hot replacement If ONBOOT NO also exists the procedure described here may not work properly 1 Confirm the slot number of the PCI Express slot that has the mounted in
354. ress bus address and slot number be created for all interfaces at system installation 3 Execute the higher level application processing required before NIC replacement Stop all access to the interface as follows Stop the application that was confirmed in step 2 as using the interface or exclude the interface from the target of use by the application 4 Deactivate the NIC Execute the following command to deactivate all the interfaces that you confirmed in step 2 The applicable command depends on whether the target interface is a single NIC interface or the SLAVE interface of a bonding device For a single NIC interface sbin ifdown ethX 92 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards If the single NIC interface has a VLAN device you also need to remove the VLAN interface Perform the following operations before deactivating the real interface sbin ifdown ethX Y sbin vconfig rem ethX Y For the SLAVE interface of a bonding device If the bonding device is operating in mode 1 use the following steps for safety purposes on the SLAVE interface to be replaced to exclude it from operation In any other mode removing it immediately should not cause any problems Confirm that the SLAVE interface to be replaced is the interface currently being used for communication First confirm the interface currently being used for communi
355. rfaces of the PRIMEQUEST2000 series List of External System Interfaces The following lists the external system interfaces TABLE C 1 External system interfaces IO interface Mounting Number of Location Remarks component ports USB SB 4 Front USB 2 0 VGA SB 1 Front Max 1600 x 1200 dots 65536 colors PCI Express Slot SB SB 1 1 RAID card HDD SSD 3 SB 4 Front 2 5inch HDD SSD LAN IOU IOU 1GbE 2 Rear GbE IOU 10GbE 2 Rear 10GbE HDD SSD DU 4 Front 2 5inch HDD SSD PCI Box 3 interface IOU 1GbE 2 2 Rear PCI Express Gen3 PCNC mounting IOU 8Lane IOU 10GbE 1 2 Rear PCI Express Gen3 8Lane PCI Box 3 Interface PCI Box 2 Rear PCI Express Gen3 PCI Box 8Lane PCI Express Slot IOU IOU 1GbE 4 Rear IOU 10GbE 3 Rear PCI Express Slot PCI Box 12 Rear PCI Box 3 1 It has the PCI Express slot in SB A physical interface does not go out outside of the case 2 It provides with the interface to the PCI box by installing PCNC in the PCI Express slot 8 Available for only PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E List of External MMB Interfaces The following lists the external MMB interfaces TABLE C 2 External MMB interfaces External interface Number of Location Remarks ports LAN MMB 1000Base T 2 Rear User Port Management LAN 100Base TX 1 Rear Maintenance LAN Port 100Base TX 1 Rear REMCS Port COM 1 Rear Connector Type Dsub 9pin 213 C122
356. rge of your system For details on the operation of replacement see step 1 to 7 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Reconfigure the peripheral according to its manual For example suppose that the storage device used is ETERNUS and that the host affinity function is used to set the access right for each server Their settings would need to be changed as a result of FC card replacement Connect the FC card cable Power on the PCI Express slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Check whether there is an error in added FC card by MMB Maintenance Wizard This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system For details on the operation of replacement see step 8 to 11 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail Check the version of the firmware It is required that the firmware version of new FC card is same as that of the FC card which had been replaced If the firmware version of new FC card is coincident with that of the FC card which had been replaced current firmware version it is not necessary to update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version If the firmware version of new FC card is not coincident with that of the FC card w
357. rm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Too Reference C122 E177EN Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a DU Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Operational by System DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 15 DU menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Too Reference C122 E177EN If set a spare disk A rebuild has been already automatically performed to the HDD or SSD set as a spare disk The replaced HDD or SSD automatically becomes a spare disk The Alarm LED of the HDD or SSD goes out Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Hot spare by MMB Web UI How to confirm the status differs depending on whether the HDD or SSD is included in a SB or in a DU For replacement of a HDD or SSD included in a SB Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Hot Spare by System SB SBx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2 13 SB menu in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Forreplacement of a HDD or SSD included in a DU Confirm whether Status of replaced HDD or SSD has been already Hot Spare by System DU DUx window of MMB Web UI For details on SBx window see 1 2
358. root root 0 Aug 27 16 06 2013 sys class net eth0 device gt ef oel ewt 0000 89 00 0 The at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed In this case ethO is the interface name which is correspondent to PCI bus address 0000 89 00 0 Note You will use the bus address obtained here in steps 2 and procedure after IOU replacement Record the bus address so that you can reference it later Next check the PCI slot number for this PCI bus address 76 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 5 OU hot remove Execute ethtool p command making the LED of NIC blinked Check IOU or PCI box connected to the IOU checking in which slots the NIC is mounted e g PCI 0 Example Blinking the LED of the NIC corresponding to interface ethO for ten seconds sbin ethtool p eth0 10 2 Make a table with information including interface name hardware address and PCI bus address of NIC mounted on IOU to be replaced Make a below table with information of IOU to be replaced within information which is got by step 1 TABLE 4 4 Correspondence between bus addresses and interface names Interface name Hardware address Bus address Location ethO 0000 89 01 0 Onboard 0 eth1 0000 89 01 1 Onboard 1 eth2 0000 8f 00 0 PCI 0 Note When recording a bus address include the function number number after the period
359. rranged from the left or the top is as follows FANM 0 Alarm Power and FANM 1 Alarm FIGURE F 2 Mounting locations of PSU and FANU FANM 0 Alarm FANM 1 Alarm Power e The order of MMB LEDs arranged from the left or the top is as follows Ready Alarm Active and Location FIGURE F 3 MMB LED mounting locations MMB Active Location The order of DU LEDs arranged as follows FIGURE F 4 DU LED mounting locations t x o o z o o n a o Q Q Not used The order of System LEDs arranged from the left or the top is as follows Power Alarm CSS Location MMB_ Ready FIGURE F 5 System LED mounting locations CSS Alarm ocation Power The order of PCI Box LEDs arranged from the left is as follows IO PSU IO_FAN 0 IO_FAN 1 Power Alarm Location FIGURE F 6 PCI Box LED mounting locations R X c jd Z i Buc SEX loot 58 oo0909 ax 2 ooQGg eOO0Q Alarm 224 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs F3 LED list F 3 LED list The following table lists the mounted LEDs for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series TABLE F 27 LED list 1 3 Component LED type Color Quantity Status Description PSU Power Green 1 Off PSU AC input off Alarm orange Blinking in green PSU AC input on and PSU off See also F 1 2 PSU On green PSU AC input on and PSU on See also F 1 2 PSU On yellow Error at PSU FANM 0 Orange 1 Off Normal status in Alarm FANM 0
360. rror Cause A failure occurred and prevents the part or serial numbers from being read Corrective action Contact your sales representative or a field engineer Do not execute Reset or Force Power Off on the partition until the problem is solved Before making contact confirm the model name and serial number shown on the label affixed to the main unit 10 2 8 MMB related problems This section describes MMB related problems and how to correct the problems No connection to the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server can be established using the Web Ul Cause 1 The setting of the IP address subnet mask or gateway is wrong Corrective action Referring to 3 3 3 Setting up the connection environment for actual operation in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Installation Manual C122 E174EN set the correct value Cause 2 A failure occurred in the network between the MMB console PC and the MMB USER port Corrective action Replace the faulty network device or LAN cable Cause 3 A problem occurred in the internal network e g internal hub of the MMB Corrective action Switch the active MMB by using the following procedure 1 Login to the standby MMB via telnet ssh 2 Execute the set active mmb command to switch the active MMB For details on the set active mmb command see 2 2 12 set active mmb in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E110EN The MMB windows do not appear Cause 1 The MMB LAN port is not enabled
361. ry Operation Modes essent tnnt tentent tette tette tente tente tente tente ttn tenens 43 TABEE 3 7 Memory Mirror Modein rte rr rt he tier oo t dlc aes 44 TABEE 3 8 Memory Mirror grOUp iere itte EH HEC IEEE EH EROR ACH M CHEER EH be PME et ect aaeei 44 TABLE 3 9 Combination of the memory mirror status and the failed DIMM Non Mirror eene 46 TABLE 3 10 Replaceable components and replacement conditions eene 48 TABLE 3 11 Replacement notification messages RAS support service UPS eene 49 TABLE 3 12 Expandable components 4 2 chr eret eret d d iet 51 TABLE 3 13 Partition setting before switching essent nennt nennen nennen 55 TABLE 3 14 Reserved SB setting before switching sess tette tente ttnte tenete tenente tentent tens 55 TABLE 3 15 Partition status transition 2 eiit centre iretur o tette tre ste Pee fa hebr eue ee eL onere ndn 56 TABLE 3 16 Description of partition status transition eeseceesecssseseesesesseseeseeeesessseeecsesussessesesscseesesessesesussesusaeeusaesusaeseseessaeesaeeeaeenees 56 TABLE 3 17 Partition setting after switching eene nennen tenente nennen nennen tenete nennen nene en enne 56 TABLE 3 18 Reserved SB setting after switching sese tente tente tente tenerte tente tentent 56 TABLE 3 19 Example
362. s Mode Segment Mode or when DR is enabled in a Partition CPU 0 CPU 1 DIMM OAO 0A3 OBO 0B3 OCO 0C3 ODO OD3 1A0 1A3 1BO 1B3 1CO 1C3 1DO 1D3 Slot OA1 0A4 OB1 0B4 0C1 0C4 OD1 OD4 1A1 1A4 1B1 1B4 1C1 1C4 1D1 1D4 0A2 0A5 OB2 0B5 OC2 0C5 OD2 OD5 1A2 1A5 1B2 1B5 1C2 1C5 1D2 1D5 Perfor O O A A B E o eo A A mance O O E E Oe OC A4 A x Partial a a E A A A A Mirror E E L A A A A O O A A Ww B E e o A A Spare O O A A a o e A A O O A A Ww B Bg o e A A 236 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 8 G 3 G 4 NIC Network Interface Card Configuration when using 100 V PSU PRIMEQUEST 2000 series supports 100 V power supply in case of only PSU S Since power efficiency decrease when using 100V PSU maximum quantity of component may decrease in a system Available internal I O ports The following table lists the number of available internal I O ports TABLE G 15 Available internal I O ports and the quantities Internal I O No Remarks SB USB 4 Home SB only VGA 1 Home SB only HDD SSD 4 Home SB only when DR enabled IOU_1GbE GbE 2 IOU_10GbE 10GbE 2 DU HDD SSD 4 G 5 G 6
363. s Server 2008 R2 Configure the paging file in the following procedure 1 Login to the server with Administrator privileges 2 Select Control Panel System The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Click the Advanced tab Then click Performance Settings The Performance Options dialog box appears 4 Click the Advanced tab FIGURE 10 19 Advanced options dialog box i Performance Options 5 Click Change in Virtual Memory The Virtual Memory dialog box appears 196 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 4 Collecting Maintenance Data 10 4 4 10 11 12 13 FIGURE 10 20 Virtual Memory dialog box Drive Volume Label Paging File Size MB ie 2046 3986 Paging file size For selected drive Drive un Space available 38087 MB Custom size Initial size MB 2046 Maximum size MB 3986 C System managed size Mo paging file Set mTotal paging File size For all drives 7 Minimum allowed 16 MB Recommended 1534 MB Currently allocated 1534 MB Specify the drive on which to create the paging file Select the system installation drive in Drive Drive in Paging file size for selected drive displays the selected drive Select a value in Custom size Enter a value in Initial size To correctly acquire a memory dump the specified size must be equivalent to the size
364. s allowed in single SB partition The following lists the number of SBs and CPUs per partition for each model TABLE G 1 Numbers of SBs and CPUS per partition Partition PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST PRIMEQUEST configuration 2400E 2800E 2800B 1 SB 1or2 1or2 2 2 SB 4 4 4 3 SB Not supported 6 6 4 SB Not supported 8 8 CPU mixing condition In a partition all CPUs must have the same frequency cache size core number power QPI rate and scale In a system CPUs which have different frequency cache size and core number can be mounted G 2 DIMM This section describes the number of DIMMs that can be mounted and the criteria for mixing different types of DIMM DIMM mounting conditions At least two DIMMs are required per CPU Up to 24 DIMMs can be mounted per CPU DIMMs must be mounted in the following units In below table N means normal mode or performance mode M means full mirror mode or partial mirror mode and S means spare mode TABLE G 2 DIMM increment unit DR PCI address SB Number DIMM increment unit mode CPU number 1CPUASB 2CPUASB per N M S N M S Partition Disable Bus 1SB 1CPU 1 2 4 6 N A N A N A 1SB 2CPU N A N A N A 2 4 6 229 C122 E175 01EN Appendix G Component Mounting Conditions G 2 N A Not available 1 PRIMEQUEST 2800B is excluded DIMM mixing criteri
365. s not support hot plugging Although you can hot replace FC card used for dump device of sadump collecting dump of memory fails until reconfiguring HBA UEFI or extended BIOS with the partition inactive after replacing the FC card This section does not cover configuration changes in peripherals e g UNIT addition or removal for a SAN disk device This manual does not describe how to change the configuration of peripherals such as expanding and removing the unit of SAN disk device To prevent a device name mismatch due to the failure addition removal or replacement of an FC card access the SAN disk unit by using the by id name dev disk by id for the device name Ifall the paths in a mounted disk become hidden when an FC card is hot replaced unmount the disk Then execute PCI hot plug FC card addition procedure The procedure for adding new FC cards and peripherals is as follows 1 Confirm the slot number of the PCI slot by using the following procedure See Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 2 Confirm that power status of the PCI Express slot See Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 3 Physically add the target card by using MMB Maintenance Wizard For details on the operation of replacement see step 1 to 7 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI E
366. sage every time the video redirection is connected check the check box for Always trust content from this publisher and click the Execute button Network communication problems between the terminal and PRIMEQUEST may cause a session interruption resulting in the Video Redirection window failing to respond to user operation In such cases the window cannot be closed normally Reconnect to the network after forcibly ending the video redirection If below problems occur while using video redirection reconnect video redirection No response comes from video redirection and any operation cannot be performed Display of video redirection window remains black or No Signal Error dialog of video redirection appears and any operation cannot be performed Window of video redirection is disconnected unintentionally 18 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use Below description is how to connect video redirection 1 First terminal PC is connected to a partition by video redirection with Full Virtual Console Access 2 f you connect to same partition by video redirection a massage requesting permission to virtual console access appears in second terminal PC FIGURE 1 8 Message of requesting access to Virtual Console in second terminal PC Requesting permission for Virtual Console access from the user MMB2PILOT2 with IP address 28 seconds rema
367. se Linux 6 4 3 Hot replacement of IOU System eternus dx400 00001049 cml1ca0p0 p 192 168 2 66 3260 logout c Use the iscsiadm command to confirm that the target session has been disconnected Example which confirms the state of session after disconnecting sbin iscsiadm m session tcp 1 192 168 1 64 3260 1 igqn 2000 09 com fujitsu storage system eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 d You can confirm the disconnection of sessions on multipath products using DM MP or ETERNUS multidriver 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session disconnection Example of DM MP display before disconnecting path f sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 2 active Y 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready X A 020 0 sade 8 32 active ready Example of DM MP display after disconnecting path f sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw X round robin 0 prio 1 enabled Y 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux FC card 1 Stop the access to FC card on IOU by such a way as stopping application 4 3 2 DR operation of IOU hot replacement This section describes the DR operation for IOU hot replacem
368. sed supply ator 1 1 operatio Field Suppressed Suppressed Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted n engineer 1 1 Wake On LAN Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed WOL 4 1 Calendar function Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed 1 1 OS boot Permitted Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Stops at Stops at Stops at Stops at BIOS BIOS BIOS BIOS 1 1 1 REMCS report Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed 2 1 C1 DR function Permitted Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed Suppressed 1 1 1 This pertains only to the maintenance target partition 2 Suppresses the REMCS report upon system failure but reports partition failures 10 1 4 Maintenance of the MMB If the server with single MMB fails in MMB take actions below 1 Shut down the operating system LAN from a remote terminal 1 2 Turn off the chassis AC power 3 Replace the MMB 4 Turn on the chassis AC power 1 If you use only port of MMB to login the operating system it is recommended to duplicate MMB If MMB fails you cannot login to the operating system Remarks In a single MMB configuration hot replacement of the MMB is not possible 10 1 5 Maintenance of the PCI BOX PEXU The following concerning maintenance when PCI box PEXU 1 The system administrator stops all partitions that belong to the mainte
369. sed in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server sss nennen enters 3 1 3 Management EAN 5 iude p EORR ERREUR ERR RERBA GRAUE e rete ees 5 1 8 1 Overview of the management LAN sse tentent tentent teneret ttn tette tente tete tete tente te tette tente te treten teni 5 1 3 2 How to configure the management LAN sees nnne nennen tenente tenente tenentem tenen entente nen 7 1 3 3 Redundant configuration of the management LAN essent nennen nennt 9 14 Maintenance LAN REMGS LAN iti tei eite e ente Ce e t ete a te Ce E ud dec tibns 11 1 5 Production LAIN E M 11 1 5 1 Overview ofthe production PAIN e RR UR ER ERU RURAL VELA EE UE A EQ re s 11 1 52 Redundancy of the production LAN sss eese ee eene netten tette tei tatnen te ttt tete tert teet tt totns 12 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use sese tentent ttn te tente tente ten tette tentent 12 1 6 1 MMB citer ase ru e ihe eu EE EET AEEA cst sentes Le ett 12 1 62 Remote operation BMG 5 5 pre RR RUE IRURE RM RUIN UMEN RM RITE 12 1 6 3 ServerView S te a a e EROR RU RR UU EUER EROR RUE PR ERE EUER RR Hee n 26 CHAPTER2 Operating System Installation Link ssseseseeseseeeeeenente tnnt nter ntn ntn ntn nte tnter te tnter ertet 27 CHAPTER3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add REMOVE esses eene 28
370. seeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen nennen nennen nene nenne 219 TABLE F6 SBLEED oa irte pn Dens he e e ade ee e A de et ea ide nae Da DEA EEEE ee Dn ede etr andes 219 TABLEF 7 SBstatus and SB LED display iiic terit cn didt dete insit th Anan dc edi 219 TABLE F SOU LED t thee trat t Rte EE RI US HU Ct P d e et tL OR LOC 220 TABLE F 9 IOU status and IOU LED display seen nennen nennen tenente tente tente tente tente tente tente tenentes 220 TABEE FAO OU EED oe rr e eer ter e Ce rnt te e ER Dt awn eerie ER De 220 TABLE F 11 1OU status and IOU LED display inicr oet iacente entero teneret nito ertet etae etes 220 TABLE F12 HDD SSD BED eene toten ote Hid OR ER De aceasta deta Eben eR eoe ve OR nce 220 TABLE F 13 HDD SSD status and LED display esee seee tente tente tnnt i tnnt tnnt tente ttti tente ttn toten na 220 iTABEE E T4 MMB EED 2 stt trei ueque tei tectis ie ILLIS UI DLL I Ni ILLU 221 TABLE F 15 MMB device status and LED display eese nene 221 TABEE FAG LAN LEDS aio n ttr ti p t t pee d e pe t t p i e be p b Ope anid 221 TABLE F 17 LAN LED and Linkup Speed eene ete etec tite etienne tee ture steterat nas n Dn scene tme ec n eene tees 221 TABEEE 39 OPE BED c itta eee utet atat rat sectio c es Lote e tae 222 TABLE F 19 System status and LED display esses eene ntnte tenete tentent tette ttn tete nte ttn tette tente ttn tetas 222 TABEE E 20
371. ssenecescseseseecessueseeneceseneseensesssaesnenseseenessensesieas 179 TABLE 10 4 System problems and memory dump collection eese nente tentent tentent 185 TABLE 10 5 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Filtering Condition window ess 188 TABLE 10 6 Setting and display items in the System Event Log Detail window eene 190 TABLE 10 7 Memory dump types and sizes nennen tenente tenente tenete entente teen tenete entente tenentes 191 nig Hom M 200 TABLE AZ Operai OS 5 tpe tone eiui C e D IPIE IE Eu LII 200 TABLE A 3 Monitoring and reporting functions eseeeeeeeeeennnnn nene 201 TABLE AA Maintenance f nctlons rccte ent tec tci tee EE rede E e educ epe avare acsi Lees 202 TABLE A 5 Redundancy TUhctlOris s s o to tao tete cote cte tet to citt Det oe tcc eec rires 203 TABEE A6 External linkage f nctiornis a tte tenet t tee ri hr iet n dent ee to ds 203 TABLE AZ Security functions 5659s NUR UDU ED VUUDUUUDUDUPUU UU D MUI Sud UL D ES 203 TABLE A 8 System information display sees esse essen sete tenente tente ten tenente tente ttn tete tte te nte ten setenta nte sen sette sensa 204 TABLE A 9 System Settings C 204 TABLE A 10 System operation TABLE A 11 Hardware st
372. standby being On Off Off output AC input is on and the IO PSU is on 5 V standby being On On Off output 12 V being output There is an IO PSU output error 5 V standby being output On Off On 12 V output error There is an IO PSU output error 5 V standby output error Off On On 12 V being output There is an IO PSU output error 5 V standby output error Off Off On 12V output error F 1 1510 FAN The IO FAN comes equipped with the following LEDs TABLE F 25 IO FAN LED LED type Color Function Alarm Orange Indicates whether there is an error in the IO FAN TABLE F 26 IO FAN status and LED display Error in IO FAN On F 2 LED Mounting Locations This section describes the physical LED mounting locations on each component Components equipped with Power Alarm and Location LEDs have the LEDs mounted as follows The order of mounted LEDs arranged from left to right is as follows Power Alarm Location The order of mounted LEDs arranged from top to bottom is as follows Power Alarm Location From the standpoint of appearance components equipped with LAN ports have the Speed LED on the left and the Link Act LED on the right of each port FIGURE F 1 LED mounting locations on components equipped with LAN ports Speed Link Act Speed Link Act 223 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs F 2 LED Mounting Locations LEDs The order of PSU and FANU LEDs a
373. switched to the Reserved SB the SB including the Reserved SB having the lowest SB number is made as the Home SB Example 6 The Home SB does not change if an SB which is not the Home SB is degraded Example 7 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration FIGURE 3 12 Example 6 Example where a Reserved SB has been set in SB 0 When the Home SB has failed SBwo SB i SBa SBws Partitionso R ec HOME 1 Partitions j 1 No Description 1 Since Partition 0 is the configuration of SB 0 and SB 2 SB 0 with the lowest number becomes the Home SB FIGURE 3 13 Example 7 Example when SB 0 is set as the Reserved SB when an SB other than the Home SB fails SB o s SB 2 Partition o ELM Oo 1 i E T wn a Ed Partition o O O No Description 1 The Home SB does not change when an SB other than the Home fails Switching policy The triggers for switching to a Reserved SB are as follows Furthermore the timing for switching to the Reserved SB is when the partition is started up This section describes the conditions triggers for switching to the Reserved SB when the partition is started up SB degradation DIMM degradation even in a single DIMM degradation When a Memory Mirror collapse is detected When a QPI Lane degradation is detected When an SMI2 Lan
374. system However this setting is applicable only if the shutdown time of the test system can be permitted FIGURE 3 19 Example of operation of a partition of a test system using the SB as a Reserved SB Partition 0 1 Partition 0 1 No Description 1 Production system 2 Test system 3 Partition 1 is shutdown Remarks Reserved SB is used in case of hardware failure The cause of switching to the Reserved SB from the memory dump report cannot be determined See the system event log of the MMB to find out the cause of switching to the Reserved SB The memory dump information is used for determining software failures Ina Windows installed partition restart is prompted at the first startup after switching to the Reserved SB Restart is done following instructions Ina Windows installed partition when the operation is stopped during an SB failure the time taken for restarting has to be considered The total time taken for two restarts the reboot time and the time it takes for the first startup after switching to the Reserved SB will be required Besides restart can be carried out once at the first startup when there is a failure by implementing workaround in advance For details on the workaround see e Procedure to prevent Windows restart of 3 4 3 Reserved SB Setting in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Reserved SB definition The definition of the Reserved SB
375. t 153 7 4 1 Backing up and restoring UEFI configuration information seen 153 7 1 2 Backing up and restoring MMB configuration information esee nennen 155 CHAPTER8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control sees 157 8 1 Power On and Power Off the Whole System esses sete ntete tete ntn ntete teet tette teet te tete nenas 157 82 Partition Power on and Power off 5 2 eine eR de added nd ee RR adnate 157 8 2 1 Various Methods for Powering On the Partition essent ntn tnter tentent tenente tentent 157 8 2 2 Parttion Power Ori Uhlib o c IR ERU RU ED RERO EE EHE eR enu E eros 158 8 2 3 Types of Power off Method of Partition esses nennen tnnt ttnte tnter ttn tette tente tente tentent nens 158 8 24 Powering Off Partition UNIS sr mir ca ihnen di tocco rte a at do dr ton eti 158 82 5 Procedure for Partition Power On and Power Off tenente tentent tette tentent entente nens 159 8 2 6 Partition Power orn by MMB nete eR eren delete Hh Re eere ecc tee tae aeiiae Mese 159 8 2 7 Controlling Partition Startup by using the MMB ssesseeseeeeeeenenene tenente teet 160 8 2 8 Checking the Partition Power status by using the MMB sss tenente nnne ntn tnnt ntn ntn 161 8 3 Scheduled operations sss ae ux 163 8 3 1
376. t FJSVdp util sbin dp add pcie20 This operation concurrently installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system After power on you need to confirm that the card and driver are correctly installed The procedures vary depending on the card and driver specifications For the appropriate procedures see the respective manuals Forthe partition without Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed You can power on and off a PCI Express slot through an operation on the file confirmed in Checking the power status of a PCI Express slot To disable a PCI Express card and make it ready for removal write 0 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the target slot The LED goes out echo 0 gt sys bus pci slots slot number gt power This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system To enable the card again and make it available write 1 to the power file in the directory corresponding to the disabled slot echo 1 gt sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt power 82 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards This operation concurrently installs the device associated with the relevant adapter on the system After power on you need to confirm that the card and driver are correctly installed The procedures vary depending on the card and driv
377. t Manager front page 2 sessi eeee eene nte tente te tente te tete tete tete teen tete teen te entes n sena FIGURE J 29 Device Manager windOW eese eeseeenen sene tetnn tenen tenente tente ten tete n tete n tetas toten setenta nte e ste se stones tena FIGURE J 30 Emulex configuration Utility windOw eene tnte tnnt ntn tnter te teen FIGURE J 31 Adapter Selection window HBA list FIGURE J 32 Emulex Adapter Configuration Main Menu window essent tnter 257 FIGURE J 33 Controller Information windOw esee ntn tnter ntn nte tete tnte tete te etna tete te ettet 258 Xix C122 E175 01EN Preface Tables TABLE 1 1 External network names and functions eeseeeeeeee nennen nnne tenete tnter entente enter 1 TABLE 1 2 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server IP addresses set from the MMB sess 3 TABLE 1 3 IP addresses for the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server set from the operating system in a partition 4 TABLE 1 4 Restrictions on the management LAN esent nennen nennen tete nennen tenente tenete nente tenen 6 TABLE 1 5 Parts of the management LAN configuration eese nnnm nennen tnnt nennen 7 TABLE 1 6 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN sese eese tentent tenete te tente tente tente t
378. t it from The PC connected to the management LAN Address IP address the MMB uses this IP address to communicate with MMB 1 IP MMB 1 1 Physical Set it from The PC connected to the management LAN Address IP address the MMB uses this IP address to communicate with CLI or MMB MMBZO 2 Web Ul CLI or MMB MMB 1 2 Web Ul Maintenance LAN IP address Maintenance IP address This IP address is used for communication when the MMB is connected to the maintenance LAN Maintenance MMB Physical IP Set it from This IP address is used for communication 3 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 2 How to Configure the External Networks Management LAN Maintenance LAN Production LAN Name NIC Type IP address Description setting method IP Address common address the MMB with REMCS without using the management 3 CLI or MMB LAN The MMB also uses the IP address to Web Ul communicate with the maintenance terminal connected to the CE port partition 6 Internal LAN IP address MMB PCH IP Address This is a dedicated IP address for MMB communication with SVS running on the operating system in each Internal IP MMB Physical IP Set it from This is a dedicated IP address for REMCS Address common address the MMB option 4 3 Web Ul Console redirection IP address Console Redirection IP Address Cons
379. t number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot confirm that the sys bus pci slots directory contains a directory for this slot information which will be referenced and otherwise used Below the PCI Express slot number confirmed in Confirming the slot number of a PCI Express slot is shown at slot number location in the directory path in the following format where the directory is the operational target sys bus pci slots lt slot number Confirm that the PCI Express card in the slot is enabled or disabled by displaying the power file contents in this directory cat sys bus pci slots slot number gt power When displayed 0 means disabled and 1 means enabled Powering on and off PCI Express slots For the partition with Dynamic Reconfiguration utility installed Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm pcie slot number command on the shell of OS The PCI Express card is disabled and has become to be ready for removal The LED goes out Example Making the PCI Express slot with PCI Express slot number 20 power off opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm pcie20 This operation concurrently removes the device associated with the relevant adapter from the system Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp add pcie slot number command on the shell of OS to power on the target slot and enable the PCI Express card on the slot The PCI Express card becomes available again Example op
380. t replaceable Not replaceable Not replaceable PCI Box Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable lO PSU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 Replaceable 1 lO FAN Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 1 Replaceable 1 PEXU Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Not replaceable PCI Express card Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable Replaceable 4 1 Possible only in configuration 2 Possible only for redundancy configuration with RAID 3 Possible only for MMB duplication configuration 4 PCI hot plug function is required Operation by maintenance staff is optional 5 DR function is required 3 3 2 Component replacement conditions This section describes the replacement conditions of each component PSU The PSU unit can be replaced while the system continues operating PSU replacement in a non redundant configuration requires the system to be stopped FAN The FAN unit can be replaced while the system continues operating SB If the DR function SB hot remove and SB hot add is used the SB can be replaced even when the partition using the SB is powered on When the DR function is not used the SB can be replaced if the partition using the SB is powered off Remarks Since the CPU Mezzanine DIMM PCI Express card FBU which is mounted on the SB can be replaced after removing the SB from the device the replacement can be done under the same conditions as the SB Note 48 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Compo
381. terface Confirm the interface mounting location through the configuration file information and the operating 90 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards system information First confirm the bus address of the PCI Express slot that has the mounted interface to be replaced Example ethO interface ls l sys class net eth0 devic lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Sep 29 10 17 X sys class net eth0 devic 2 0000 00 01 2 0000 08 00 2 0000 05 01 0 The X at the end of a line indicates that there is no line feed Excluding the rest of the directory path check the part corresponding to the file name in the symbolic link destination file of the output results In the above example the underlined part shows the bus address 0000 0b 01 in the example Note You will use the bus address obtained here in steps 2 and 11 Record the bus address so that you can reference it later Next check the PCI Express slot number for this bus address grep il 0000 0b 01 sys bus pci slots address sys bus pci slots 20 address Read the output file path as shown below and confirm the PCI Express slot number sys bus pci slots lt slot number gt address Notes If the above file path is not output it indicates that the NIC is not mounted in a PCI Express slot e g GbE port in the IOU With the PCI Express slot number confirmed h
382. the MMB In the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series the MMB acts as an NTP client to ensure synchronization with external NTP servers 1 6 2 Remote operation BMC Supported Web browsers Firefox version 20 or later operating system Windows or Linux Internet Explorer version 8 or later operating system Windows Required Java Runtime Environment Java 6 or later Notes 12 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use For a terminal whose operating system is Windows Vista or Windows 7 set UAC User Account Control or UAP User Account Protection to Disabled For video redirection and virtual media a connection may not be established if the network is connected via a proxy In such cases change the browser setting to avoid network connection via the proxy To start the video direction function with Internet Explorer click the mouse while holding down the Control key Even if the following message is displayed click the mouse while holding down the Control key Message displayed on the status bar of Internet Explorer Pop up blocked To allow the pop up window to open click the mouse while holding down the Ctrl key With FireFox you can establish a connection simply by clicking the mouse df java net SocketException Malformed reply from SOCKS server occurs when you attempt to establish a video redirection connection make the following
383. the MMB The MMB summarizes the information from each partition and sends it to the REMCS Center To receive the REMCS service contact your sales representative REMCS linkage This function reports resource information or problems in a partition to the REMCS Center in linkage with the MMB REMCS Agent reports error information log information and other information of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series system to the REMCS Center via the Internet or P P connection REMCS Agent of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series consists of the MMB firmware as well as SVS installed in each partition As the REMCS linkage in the figure shows the MMB firmware monitors the entire system for problems and reports them to the REMCS Center when it detects them SVS notifies the REMCS Center of hardware problem information and hardware configuration information detected by the operating system in the partition via the MMB firmware For details on REMCS see the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series REMCS Installation Manual C122 E180EN 174 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 2 Troubleshooting FIGURE 10 1 REMCS linkage Partition x PRIMEQUEST 2000 series System administrator Operations management software console 10 2 Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot system problems 10 2 1 Troubleshooting overview The following shows the basic procedure for troubleshooting 175 C122 E175
384. the bonding interface and driver Example Description in etc modprobe d bonding conf grep l1 bonding etc modprobe d etc modprobe d bonding conf Note If the configuration file is not found or if you are performing an initial installation of the bonding interface create a configuration file with an arbitrary file name with the conf extension e g etc modprobe d bonding conf in the etc modprobe d directory After specifying the target configuration file add the setting for the newly created bonding interface alias bondY bonding lt Add bondY Name of the newly added bonding interface You can specify options of the bonding driver in this file Normally the BONDING OPTS line in each ifcfg bondY file is used Options can be specified to the bonding driver Activate the added interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces The activation method depends on the configuration For a single NIC interface Execute the following command to activate the interface Activate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifup ethX For the bonding configuration For a SLAVE interface added to an existing bonding configuration execute the following command to 108 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 8 Removing PCI Express cards 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 incorporate it into the bonding configuratio
385. the data from being restored To prevent important data on the hard disk from being leaked when the product is disposed of or transferred you will need to take care to erase all the data recorded on the hard disk on your own responsibility vi C122 E175 01EN Preface Furthermore if a software license agreement restricts the transfer of the software operating system and application software on the hard disk in the server or other product to a third party transferring the product without deleting the software from the hard disk may violate the agreement Adequate verification from this point of view is also necessary Support and service Product and service inquiries For all product use and technical inquiries contact the distributor where you purchased your product or a Fujitsu sales representative or systems engineer SE If you do not know the appropriate contact address for inquiries about the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series use the Fujitsu contact line Fujitsu contact line We accept Web inquiries For details visit our website https www s fujitsu com global contact computing PRMQST feedback html Warranty If a component failure occurs during the warranty period we will repair it free of charge in accordance with the terms of the warranty agreement For details see the warranty Before requesting a repair If a problem occurs with the product confirm the problem by referring to 11 2 Troubleshooting in the PRIMEQUEST 2000
386. the management LAN The MMB has two GbE LAN ports USER ports dedicated to the management LAN The partition side can use the LAN port on the IOU as a management LAN port The PCL communications operations management server is connected to the MMB USER port through an external switch IP addresses of the management LAN MMB Each MMB has one physical IP address for the management interface of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server In addition to that the primary MMB shares a common virtual IP address in the system You can set these IP addresses from the MMB Web UI or CLI Remarks Virtual LAN interfaces are used for the management LAN interfaces The physical LAN interfaces are used only for recognizing the respective MMBs The physical LAN interface of each MMB makes redundant the two User ports located in that MMB using the interface redundancy function to create a single LAN interface Virtual LAN interfaces handle the common virtual IP address shared between the two redundant MMBs The Virtual LAN interfaces share the physical LAN interfaces which are ports on the two MMBs The ports are treated as valid channels on the active MMB Any switching of the active MMB causes switching of the corresponding connections to Virtual LAN channels The following shows a management LAN configuration diagram The IP addresses are examples The addresses depend on the settings 5 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation
387. the status of each part For details on how to operate ServerView see the ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Server Management 171 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures 10 1 Maintenance 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 CHAPTER 10 Error Notification and Maintenance Contents Methods and Procedures This chapter describes the maintenance functions provided by the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series It also describes the actions to take for any problems that occur Maintenance The PRIMEQUEST 2000 series supports hot maintenance of PSUs and fans This enables maintenance of the system as it continues operating For PRIMEQUEST 2400E and 2800E the DR fiction and PCI Hot Plug function can be used for hot maintenance of SB IOU HDD SSD and PCI Express cards For PRIMEQUEST 2800B PCI Hot Plug function can be used for hot maintenance of HDD SSD and PCI Express cards For details and a list of the replaceable components see CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove Remarks Field engineers perform the maintenance on the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series server Maintenance using the MMB The MMB provides system maintenance functions through the Maintenance menu of the Web UI You can use the Maintenance menu to back up and restore system configuration information For details on the Maintenance menu see 1 6 Maintenance Menu in the PRIMEQU
388. the team 137 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 4 FC Card Hot Plugging 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 4 gal Device Manager Ol x Eile Action View Help es en E23 8 mls Gis Eis ws08xe6 fq Computer Eg Disk drives fly Display adapters fq Emulex PLUS R Human Interface Devices H Keyboards H A Mice and other pointing devices EHE Monitors Ea Network adapters X Intel R 82567LF 2 Gigabit Network Connection x Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 10 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 11 Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 12 X Intel R 82576 Gigabit Dual Port Network Connection 9 L3 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 4 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 9 TEAM Team 0 TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 10 E TEAM Team 0 Intel R PRO 1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 3 HS Other devices m n Processors E lt Storage controllers fq System devices EE System management devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers Note As the follow right click target device in Device Manager if there are Enable in displayed menu check Enable In case of Disable this work is not necessary Hot plugging a non redundant NIC This section describes the hot plugging procedure in networks without redundancy a NIC is not incorporated into teamin
389. til sbin dp show IOU command from the operating system shell Example When checking IOU3 opt FJSVdp util sbin dp show IOU3 0000 82 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 83 09 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 84 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 02 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 08 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 09 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 10 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 85 11 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 75 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 5 IOU hot remove 0000 89 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 89 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation 1350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 8c 00 0 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation I350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 8c 00 1 Ethernet controller Intel Corporation I350 Gigabit Network Connection rev 01 0000 8 00 0 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 0000 8 00 1 Fibre Channel Emulex Corporation Saturn X LightPulse Fibre Channel Host Adapter rev 03 Q N
390. tion 2 Tera Term VT File Edit Setup Control Window Help bmc RHEL6 J4 bmc RHEL6 13 bmc RHEL6 Your redirection session was terminated by another user Administrator gt Virtual Media The virtual media function enables a partition to share the floppy disk drives CD or DVD drives and HDD or USB devices of terminals as storage devices For ISO images ISO images on the terminal appear as emulated drives on the partition side Up to two devices can be used per each device at the same time Up to six devices can be used at same time in total Note Fora terminal whose operating system is Windows Vista or Windows 7 set UAC User Account Control or UAP User Account Protection to Disabled f the operation terminal is accessing the USB memory by using explorer and so on the operation terminal does not recognize the USB as a connectable device by virtual media You may receive a STOP error message on a blue screen when using the virtual media function from your terminal The blue screen appears on the terminal under the following circumstances 22 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use You are using the remote storage function from a terminal running one of the following Windows operating systems Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 You are using two USB devices as r
391. tion Network Configuration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard Unit Selection Help Select the unit to perform maintenance on C DUPCISI6t CIOUPCIC C MP C PCI BoxlO FANIO PSU e PCI Box PCIC A C PSUFANU C SB BATTERY CPU DIMM Mezz PCISIot FBU 4 Check the button of the target PCI Box number and click Next button For this example it is a procedure of hot replacement of a PCI card at PCIC 1 mounted in PCI BoxitO 124 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 2 Common Hot Plugging Procedure for PCI Express cards Model PRIMEQUEST 2800E Active MMB 1 Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1400000 ue AV arnin PERDRE MY Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI_Box PCIC Selection Hep Select the unit to perform maintenance on PCI Boxs0 PCICs0 11 o Ond PCI Box i PCIC 0 11 Not present PCI_Box 2 PCIC 0 11 Not present PCI Box 3 PCIC 0 11 Not present 5 Check button of target PCIC number for replacing and click Next button Model PRIMEQUEST Active MIMBRO Part Number MCXXXXXXX FUJITSU Serial Number EVT1600000 Status AWariine 2Maintenance gt Maintenance Wizard Maintenance Wizard PCI Box PCIC Selection Hen Select the unit to perform maintenance on co jon OK dag a 2086 1528 LIEN D ped fore 8086 SE Not pres Standby C5 Standby Standby e standby a Not present
392. tion cannot send or receive data of over 4 Kbytes 3 The connection sends data to the active MMB so adequate performance cannot be obtained 4 Only the following commands can be executed Set command set active mmb 0 Show commands show active mmb show access control show date C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 3 Management LAN show timezone show gateway show http show http port show https show https port show ssh show ssh port show telnet show telnet port show ip show network show exit code ping who netck arptbl netck arping netck ifconfig netck stat show user list help show snmp sys location show snmp sys contact show snmp community show snmp trap show maintenance ip IP address of the management LAN partition 1 3 2 To the partition side an IP address of the management LAN must be assigned to communicate with SVS running on the operating system from the terminal on the management LAN The IP address is assigned to the LAN port on the IOU or the PCI Box mounted on the network card Also for monitoring with SVOM an IP address must be assigned to the management LAN When it is linked with PRIMECLUSTER the SVS on the partition side communicates with the user port of the MMB via the management LAN It also provides the function for monitoring the status of the cluster node and the node switching function How to configure the management LAN The network for MMB a
393. tion period of text console redirection Console redirection is automatically disconnected after a certain idle time You can set automatic disconnection time timeout value by console command For details on console command see 2 2 4 console in PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Tool Reference C122 E177 How to connect console redirection Note If console redirection is disconnected due to timeout below message appears You have exceeded your idle time limit Logging you off now 1 Login to MMB CLI and specify partition to which you intend to connect If the message which confirms whether you connects or not appears input y 20 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use FIGURE 1 17 Example of setting partition 3 1 Tera Term VT aA 2 Ifthe message Do you really want to start the Console Redirection yes no appears input yes You can connect to specified partition FIGURE 1 18 Example of setting partition 3 2 Tera Term VT File Edit Setup Control Window Help ire you sure to connect to BMC Console Redirection or EMS Emergency Management Services o exit the Console Redirection EMS SAC press lt ESC gt Dr press tilde dot Do you really want to start the Console Redirection yes no yes bmcBRHELB 1 bmcBRHELB bmcBRHELB bmc RHEL6 bmcBRHELB bmcBRHEL6 bmcBRHEL6 bmcBRHELB 1
394. tion support conditions and menu items are listed in the table below TABLE 8 6 Power on off Menu Item Scheduled Description operations All Partition Power On Not supported Powers on all partitions All Partition Power Off Not supported Powers off all the partitions which are in powered on following an operating system shutdown Partition Power On Supported Powers on any partition Partition Power Off Supported Powers off any partition following an operating System shutdown Partition Force Power Off Not supported Forcibly powers off any partition without an operating system shutdown This is used to forcibly power off a partition when the shutdown from the operating system is disabled Power Cycle Not supported Powers off and then powers on any partition The partition is forcibly powered off without an operating System shutdown 164 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 8 Chapter System Startup Shutdown and Power Control 8 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions Menu Item Scheduled Description operations Reset Not supported Resets any partition This reset is not followed by a reboot of the operating system NMI Not supported Issues an NMI interrupt for any partition sadump Not supported Instructs sadump for a partition For details on setting for Windows shutdown see Appendix Windows Shutdown Settings 8 4 Automatic Partition Restart Conditions This se
395. to the MMB Creates a self signed certificate 1 5 7 SSL menu Creates a private key for the SSH server 1 5 8 SSH menu Makes the user settings required for control of the 1 5 9 Remote Server Management window MMB via RMCP from the remote server Operates access control for network protocols 1 5 10 Access Control window Sets e mail notification for when an event occurs 1 5 11 Alarm E Mail window Executes the batch firmware update process 1 6 1 Firmware Update menu Backs up and restores MMB UEFI configuration 1 6 2 Backup Restore Configuration menu information Provides support in the form of a wizard for device 1 6 3 Maintenance Wizard window maintenance Operates REMCS and makes settings related to 1 6 4 REMCS menu REMCS 9 2 MMB CLI You can access the MMB CLI via the MMB serial port or the management LAN The commands that you can use from the MMB CLI include those for display and settings For details on MMB command lines see Chapter 2 MMB CLI Command Line Interface Operations in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN For details on functions provided by the MMB CLI see the reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN 170 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 9 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 9 3 UEFI TABLE 9 2 Functions provided by the MMB CLI 9 3 9 4 Function Reference sect
396. to the system is displayed Check if the IOU that was added is displayed Example When IOU1 is added opt FJSVdp util sbin dp stat IOU IOUO online IOU1 offline IOU2 empty IOU3 empty When newly adding an IOU to a partition it will be displayed as offline since the IOU is not recognized by the operating system 4 Execute opt FJSVdp util sbin dp add IOU1 command in the operating system shell The IOU that was newly added to the partition will be powered on Example When IOU1 is powered on 73 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 4 Hot add of IOU opt FJSVdp util sbin dp add IOU1 4 4 3 Operation after IOU hot add This section describes the process and operation after IOU hot add 1 Checkthe resource that was added Execute the opt FJSVdp util sbin dp show IOU command in the operating system shell Example When IOU1 was added opt FJSVdp util sbin dp show IOUI 0000 03 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 04 09 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 05 00 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 06 02 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 06 08 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca 0000 06 09 0 PCI bridge PLX Technology Inc Device 8748 rev ca
397. ton to select the user to be edited The default settings for all users is No Access and Disable You can edit the user name password permission and status Enable Disable in the Edit User o deny access to a user set No Access for permission or Disable for Status Access Control Access control settings for network protocols Add Rem Filter Edit Filter Adds edits or deletes a filter ove Filter button Edit Filter window Protocol Select the target protocol HTTP HTTPS telnet SSH SNMP Access Control Select Enable or Disable Disable Denies access by any IP address Enable Permits access by only the specified IP addresses P Address Subnet Mask You can specify this item only if the Access Control setting is Enable The filtering permits access by only the IP addresses specified here Alarm E Mail Settings for e mail notification of an event Alarm E Mail Used to select whether to send e mail for the occurrence of an event Enable Disable From Sender address To Destination address SMTP Server IP address or FQDN of the SMTP server Subject E mail title Filter button Used to edit Alarm E mail transmission filter settings The occurrence of any event specified in the filter settings is reported by e mail The default for target events is all events Severity Target severity Error Warning Info Partition Target partition Unit Targ
398. trip Size Firmware Tine Apr 19 201 ILO Max Strip Size WebBIOS Version 6 l e 49 00 Rel Uirtual Drive Count Drive Count E Hot Spare Spin Down Unconf Good Spin Down Enabled Spin Down Tine Chip Temp If multiple MegaRAID SAS RAID controller is mounted click Controller Selection in HOME window Go back to step 11 and check firmware version of remaining MegaRAID SAS RAID controller by taking same steps Note When click Home button go back to HOME window Confirming by ServerView RAID 1 Start the system and log in to the OS Start the ServiewView RAID Manager connect it to the target server and log in The account to be used for the login can be either administrator authority or user authority From the tree view select the target array controller 4 The firmware version number is displayed in the General tab in the object window right pane in the window The part to be referred varies with the used RAID controller Check the part for the selected array controller FIGURE J 12 General tab in the ServiewView RAID Manager RAID controller Adapter Name FTS RAID 5 6 SAS based on LSI MegaRAID Vendor Fujitsu Technology Solutions Qd rans A General Settings HB LSI MeeaRAlO SAS G380EM2 Mj LSI MeeaRAID SAS G244ELP 1 S SAS Port E SEAGATE ST314666555 Product RAID 5 6 SAS based on LSI MegaRAID S A SAS Port 1 SAS E SEAGATE ST3146855SS 1 au 512 00
399. tting see the VMware Manual Switching rules Switching rules for the Reserved SB are as follows Determining the switching source SB When an SB has been configured as a Reserved SB for multiple partitions and there is simultaneous failure in multiple partitions the partition with the lowest number takes priority for switching Example 1 When multiple SBs fail in a partition the SB with the lowest number takes priority for switching Example 2 Determining the switching destination SB When multiple Reserved SBs have been sent in a partition and there are Reserved SBs that do not belong to any partition the Reserved SB having the highest SB number takes priority for switching Example 3 When multiple Reserved SBs are set in a partition and there are only Reserved SBs included in the partition the Reserved SB having the highest SB number in a powered off partition takes priority for switching Example 4 If all the partitions are powered on the Reserved SB with the highest SB number takes priority for switching Example 5 FIGURE 3 7 Example 1 a Example where two SBs are set as Reserved SBs in two partitions when SB 0 and SB 1 have simultaneously failed SBwo Partitionso Partitions 3 i 38 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 2 High availability configuration FIGURE 3 8 Example 1 b Example when one SB is set as the Reserved SB in two partitions SB 0 and SB
400. ugh Alarm LED remains off SEL may be displayed which indicates the FANM error due to detecting not enough fan rotation by preventive fan monitoring function 2 There is a CSS LED on an OPL not a PSU F 1 4 SB SB comes equipped with the following LED TABLE F 6 SB LED LED type Color Function Power Green Indicates power state in a SB Alarm Orange Indicates whether there is error or not in a SB Location Blue Specifies a SB Can be arbitrarily set to blink or turned off by the user Indicates the component undergoing maintenance when Maintenance Wizard is running TABLE F 7 SB status and SB LED display Status Power Alarm Location AC off and partition power Off Off Off Off Partition including SB Power On On green Error of SB On orange Identifying SB On blue Turn on by Maintenance Wizard F 1 5 IOU IOU which is IOU 1GbE or IOU 10GbE comes equipped with the following LED 219 C122 E175 01EN Appendix F Status Checks with LEDs E LED Type TABLE F 8 IOU LED LED type Color Function Power Green Indicates power state in an IOU Alarm Orange Indicates whether there is error or not in an IOU Location Blue Specifies an IOU Can be arbitrarily set to blink or turned off by the user ndicates the component undergoing maintenance when Maintenance Wizard is running TABLE F 9 IOU status and IOU LED display
401. up ethX Also if the single NIC interface has a VLAN device and the VLAN interface was temporarily removed restore the VLAN interface If the priority option has changed set it again sbin vconfig add ethX Y f sbin ifup ethX Y enter command to set VLAN option as needed For SLAVE under bonding Execute the following command to incorporate the SLAVE interface into the existing bonding configuration Incorporate all the necessary interfaces sbin ifenslave bondY ethX The VLAN related operation is normally not required because a VLAN is created on the bonding device Remove the directory to which the interface configuration file was saved After all the interfaces to be replaced have been replaced remove the save directory created in step 5 in 4 3 1 Preparation for IOU hot replacement by executing the following command rmdir etc sysconfig network scripts temp Execute the higher level application processing required after NIC replacement Perform the necessary post processing such as starting an application or restoring changed settings for the operations performed for the higher level applications in step 3 in 4 3 1 Preparation for IOU hot replacement iSCSI NIC on the IOU If replace iSCSI NIC on the IOU you have to take not only the same steps of NIC on the IOU including Onboard NIC but also takes below steps in step 8 of that 1 To restore access to the iSCSI connection
402. ure for iSCSI 7 The Source Portal column in the Multiple Connected Session MCS window displays IP addresses Check whether any IP address matches that recorded in step 2 If an IP address matches 192 168 3 150 in this example this is the target connected to the device to be replaced Multiple Connected Session MCS xi MCS policy Round Robin 7 Description The round robin policy attempts to evenly distribute incoming requests to all processing paths To add a connection dick Add Add To remove a connection select the connection above and then dick Remove Eia To edit the path settings for the MCS policy select a Edit connection above and then click Edit ins ox sce s 8 Click the Cancel button to return to Properties window shown in step 5 and click the Cancel button again to return to the iSCSI Initiator Properties window shown in step 4 9 Ifno IP address in step 6 matches select the next target and repeat step 4 Otherwise click the Devices button 148 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in Windows 6 5 Hot Replacement Procedure for iSCSI f iSCSI Initiator Properties E3 x ar A s RRS Quick Gonnect 10 Record the values displayed in the Address column in the Devices window Port 2 Bus 0 Target 0 LUN 0 in this example 149 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 6 PCI Express card Hot Maintenance in
403. user port on MMB 1 with telnet ssh 2 Execute the following command on MMB 1 and switch the active MMB to MMB 1 gt set active mmb 1 3 The virtual IP address of the MMB is switched to MMB 1 and access is enabled with the virtual IP address 10 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 4 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN 1 4 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN The MMB provides the following LAN ports for maintenance purposes TABLE 1 6 Maintenance LAN REMCS LAN Port Description Remarks CE LAN FST CE terminal port for use in maintenance work 100Base TX RJ45 REMCS LAN For a connection with the REMCS Center 100Base TX RJ45 1 5 1 5 1 For REMCS connection without using the management LAN The port based VLAN function of the switching hub on the MMB blocks communication between the CE port and REMCS port The following shows an outline of the maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB FIGURE 1 4 Maintenance LAN and REMCS LAN of the MMB Switching Switching Switching hub hub hub NIC NIC NIC Processor NIC PCI bus Port based VLAN Switching hub RS232 PHY PHY M COM USER USER REMCS CE port port port port 10 100M The maintenance LAN is configured with Web UI or CLI of the MMB The subnet of the maintenance LAN must be separated from the other subnets such as one for the management LAN the production LAN etc When the MMB is dup
404. utton Exports a CSR Note Clicking the Export Key button Export CSR button using FireFox 4 or later flashes a save confirmation dialog box resulting in the secret key not being downloadable Therefore use Internet Explorer during Export Key Export CSR window manipulation Import Certificate Imports a signed electronic certificate sent from a certificate authority To import a file specify the file and click the Import button Create Selfsigned Certificate Creates a self signed certificate SSL certificate status Displays the current status of self signed certificate installation Term Specifies the term of validity number of days of the self signed certificate The other settings are the same as on the Create CSR window Create Selfsigned Certificate button Creates a self signed certificate SSH SSH settings Create SSH Server Key Creates an SSH server private key SSH Server Key Status Displays the status of SSH server key installation Create SSH Server Key button Creates a private key After creation is completed a confirmation dialog box appears Clicking OK installs the created key Clicking Cancel discards it 8 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 1 Network Environment Setup and Tool Installation 1 3 Management LAN Display Setting item Description T Remote Server Management User settings for remote control of the MMB via RMCP Use the Edit User but
405. w Suite ServerView Installation Manager Creating and managing server groups For details on how to create and manage server groups for individual users see the ServerView Suite ServerView Operations Manager Server Management For more information about ServerView Suite see below web site http manuals ts fujitsu com 26 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 2 Operating System Installation Link 1 6 Management Tool Operating Conditions and Use CHAPTER 20perating System Installation Link For details on how to install an operating system on a partition see Chapter 4 Installing the Operating System and Bundled Software in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Installation Manual 27 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 1 Partition Configuration CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove This section describes the configuration and replacement of component of the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series 3 1 Partition Configuration This section describes the configuration of the PPAR partition 9 1 1 Partition Configuration PPAR The partition is set in MMB Web UI 3 1 2 Setting procedure of partition in MMB Web UI 3 1 1 Partition Configuration PPAR In order to configure and operate a partition at least one usable SB and at least one usable IOU are necessary During the course the configuration operation there may be instances where the above conditions are not met e g partitions wit
406. wap and Appendix C Using Module Parameters in the PCle SSD 785GB PCle SSD 1 2TB ioMemory VSL x x x User Guide for Linux x x x is the version number Power off the partition For details on powering off see 7 1 2 Powering off Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Replace the faulty PCI Express card Power on the partition For details on powering on the partition see 7 1 1 Powering on Partitions in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 series Installation Manual C122 E174 Initialize the replaced PCI Express card The executing procedure is as follows a fio detach Disconnecting the device from the operating system b fio format Low level formatting of the device 50 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 3 Component Configuration and Replacement Add Remove 3 4 Expansion of components Remarks If the device is used as a SWAP device the formatting must have a 4K sector size c fio attach Making the device available on the operating system Example fio detach dev fct0 fio format b 4K dev fctO fio attach dev fct0 Remarks For details on each command see Appendix A Utility Reference in the PCleSSD 785GB PCleSSD 1 2TB ioMemory VSL x x x User Guide for Linux x x x is the version number 8 Create a swap entry for the replaced PCI Express card Remarks A partition must be created before creating a swap entry Example mkswap dev fioal swapon
407. x FIGURE 10 17 Advanced tab of the dialog box FIGURE 10 18 Virtual Memory dialog box FIGURE 10 19 Advanced options dialog DOx sese eene ntete tete tntn tete tette tente tt tette etna tete tn tete te nint FIGURE 10 20 Virtual Memory dialog DOx eesesseeeeeeeneee tentent tenente tente tentent tette tenete tette tente tentent neni FIGURE B 1 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 2400E sssssseeseeeee nennen tenerent tenente 209 FIGURE B 2 Physical mounting locations in the PRIMEQUEST 2800E 2800B essere nter 210 FIGURE B 3 Physical mounting locations in the DU essent ntn teneret nteten tette tenete tette ternera tnn 210 FIGURE B 4 Physical mounting locations in the PCI BOx sess netten nennen tette tenen 211 FIGURE B 5 MMB port nurmbels 5 e e aar ree Here edie elle el iid eal elidel ei ala 211 FIGURE B 6 IQU GbE port n mbers rcr trente toten teneret io ere tete De i De ee ete Te Dia DR toe aa 212 FIGURE B7 IOU 1OGbE port Numbers ccce coactis at ants sand au Anan aaa inna canal 212 FIGURE F 1 LED mounting locations on components equipped with LAN ports sesenta 223 FIGURE F 2 Mounting locations of PSU and FANU FIGURE F 3 MMB LED mounting locations FIGURE F 4 DU LED mounting locations FIGURE F 5 System LED mounting locations
408. xpress card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail 4 Reconfigure the peripheral according to its manual For example suppose that the storage device used is ETERNUS and that the host affinity function is used to set the access right for each server Their settings would need to be changed as a result of FC card replacement Connect the FC card cable Power on the PCI Express slot See Powering on and off PCI Express slots in 4 6 2 PCI Express card replacement procedure in detail 105 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 7 Hot Addition of PCI Express cards 7 Check whether there is an error in added FC card by MMB Maintenance Wizard This step is performed by the field engineer in charge of your system For details on the operation of replacement see step 8 to 11 of Operation for Hot replacement of PCI Express card by Maintenance Wizard in 4 7 2 PCI Express card addition procedure in detail 8 Checkthe version of the firmware It is required that the firmware version of new FC card is same as that of the FC card which had been replaced If the firmware version of new FC card is coincident with that of the FC card which had been replaced current firmware version it is not necessary to update the firmware version of new FC card to current firmware version If the firmware version of new FC card is not coincident with that of the FC card whic
409. y window Displays the action taken in response to a PSU failure Displays the fan status 1 2 11 Fans window Displays the reaction response to a fan failure Displays the temperature of the temperature sensor in 1 2 12 Temperature window the system Displays the reaction response to a temperature error Displays and sets the SB x board 1 2 13 SB menu Displays and sets the IOU x board 1 2 14 IOU menu Displays and sets the status of DU x 1 2 15 DU menu Displays the status of the PCI Box connected to the 1 2 18 PCI Box menu system Displays the OPL status 1 2 16 OPL window Displays information related to the MMB 1 2 17 MMB menu Controls the partition power supply 1 3 1 Power Control window Sets a schedule for each partition 1 3 2 Schedule menu Sets the SB and IOU that configure a partition 1 3 3 Partition Configuration window 169 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 9 Configuration and Status Checking Contents Methods and Procedures 9 2 MMB CLI Function Reference sections in the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series Tool Reference C122 E177EN Sets a Reserved SB 1 3 5 Reserved SB Configuration window The video redirection for each IPv4 IPv6 is set 1 3 6 Console Redirection Setup window Power Limiting of each partition is set 1 3 7 Power Management Setup window Displays the partition status and various information 1 3 8 Partition x menu related to the partition Sets
410. ype Emulex LPe 12082 M8 FV201A12 0V274016 001 WIN OFKRSEORITP Class 3 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port Status Link Status Link down Loop Map ALPA Port Information Statistics Maintenance OHCHAP Target Mapping Driver Parameters Diagnostics Transceiver Data VPD c Confirm firmware version of target device Select the device name of target FC card in left pane and see Port Information in right pane File Edit View Port Discovery Batch Help Bese E A Hosts Port Information Statistics Maintenance OHCHAP Target Mapping Driver Parameters Diagnostics Transceiver Data VPD bel WIN FKRSESRZTP Port Attrbutes 3x Port 0 10080000 CS 8E 4608 Port WN MG Port T 100000009 8E4 47 Node WM Fahr Port FC ID PCI Function PCI Bus Number OS Device Name Symbolic Node Name Supported Class of Service Supported FC4 Types 20000000C9 6E 446 Driver Versio 274016001 Driver Name 10000000C93E 4446 ViScsit Emulex LPe 12082 M8 FV201A12 OV2 74 016 001 WIN OFKRSEORITP Obss 3 00 00 01 09 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 d Close OneCommand Manager Case Qlogic FC card a Open QConverge Console CLI and identify target device from the bus number in step 2 1 Select 1 Adapter Information in
411. ystem eternus dx400 00001049 cm0ca0p0 d You can confirm the disconnection of sessions on multipath products using DM MP or ETERNUS multidriver 1 Write down the DM MP display contents at the session disconnection Example of DM MP display before disconnecting path f sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 79 C122 E175 01EN CHAPTER 4 PCI Card Hot Maintenance in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 6 Hot Replacement of PCI Express Cards size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw XY round robin 0 prio 2 active XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready Y 4 0 70 0 sde 8 32 active ready Example of DM MP display after disconnecting path sbin multipath 11 mpathl 36000b5d0006a0000006a104900000000 dm 0 FUJITSU ETERNUS_DX400 size 50G features 0 hwhandler 0 rw XY round robin 0 prio 1 enabled XY 3 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 active ready 2 See the ETERNUS Multipath Driver User s Guide For Linux FC card 1 Stop the access to FC card on IOU by such a way as stopping application 4 5 2 DR operation of IOU hot remove This section describes DR operation for executing IOU hot remove 1 Execute the opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm IOU command from the operating system shell The IOU to be removal will be powered off Example To power off IOU3 opt FJSVdp util sbin dp rm IOU3 2 Log into the M
412. ze changes in the partition state when each partition is started or stopped For an MIB request received at this time from an external manager e g Systemwalker Centric Manager the MMB temporarily returns an error or time out In this case information can be obtained by reissuing the MIB request The following shows the MIB tree structure 239 C122 E175 01EN Appendix H Tree Structure of the MIB Provided with the PRIMEQUEST 2000 Series H 2 MIB File Contents FIGURE H 1 MIB tree structure internet 1 megmt 2 mib 2 1 system 1 interfaces 2 at 3 ip 4 icmp 5 tcp 6 udp 7 snmp 11 private 4 L enterprises 1 L fojitsu 211 L products 1 L iaServer 31 primequest 1 mmb 1 sysinfo 1 agentInfo 1 unitInformation 2 management 3 serverInformation 4 environment 5 hardware 6 recovery 7 status 8 maintenance 9 deployment 10 mmbVartiables 2 mmbEnterprise 3 H 2 MIBFile Contents The following table lists the contents of MIB files TABLE H 1 MIB file contents MIB file Purpose Partition Informatio Description operating n source system MMB MMB COM MIB txt Reference MMB MIB information such as the MIBs firmware hardware configuration of the entire cabinet MMB ComTrap Monitoring MIB information for hardware MIB txt failure monitoring across the entire cabinet MMB SEL event 240 C122 E175 01EN Appendix Windows Shutdown S

Fujitsu PRIMEQUEST2000 Series User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents